Yamaha EL-100 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: EL-100

Categoría: Pianos digitales

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Este manual también es adecuado para

EL-27

(1)B-7 1/2

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from

electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not

limited to, the following:

Power supply/Power cord

• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The

required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust

which may have accumulated on it.

• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or

radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the

cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where

anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it.

Do not open

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal

parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no

user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning,

discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified

Yamaha service personnel.

Water warning

•Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp

or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids

which might spill into any openings.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

Fire warning

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.

If you notice any abnormality

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there

is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any

unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it,

immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug

from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified

Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or

damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

Power supply/Power cord

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet,

always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord

can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is

not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical

storms.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a

multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or

possibly cause overheating in the outlet.

Assembly

• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the

assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the

proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even

injury.

(1)B-7 2/2

Location

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or

extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or

in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel

disfiguration or damage to the internal components.

•Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo

equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the

instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might

accidentally fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/

one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air

circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating.

Connections

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components,

turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on

or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also,

be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum

levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the

instrument to set the desired listening level.

Maintenance

•When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use

paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated

wiping cloths.

Handling caution

• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps

on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power

immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then

have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service

personnel.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument,

since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the

instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons,

switches or connectors.

•Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or

uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent

hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the

ears, consult a physician.

Using the bench (If included)

• Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might

accidentally fall over.

• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a

tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose might result in

accident or injury.

• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to

prevent the possibility of accident or injury.

• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use,

tighten them periodically using the included tool.

Saving data

Saving and backing up your data

• All panel settings and Registration Memories are lost when you

turn off the power to the instrument. If you want to keep the

settings, save the data to a floppy disk (see page 67).

Backing up the floppy disk

• To protect against data loss through media damage, we

recommend that you save your important data onto two floppy

disks.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

GM (General MIDI System Level 1) is an addition to the MIDI standard that ensures that any GM-compatible

music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of maker.

The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support the General MIDI standard.

XG is a new MIDI format created by Yamaha that significantly improves and expands upon the General MIDI

standard by providing a greater variety of high-quality voices plus considerably enhanced effect operation – while

being fully compatible with GM.

• The screen displays and illustrations as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different

from those on your instrument.

• Copying of the commercially available music sequence data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use.

• The company names and product names in this Owner’s manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

• This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license

to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and

sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any

violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

Congratulations!

You are the proud owner of a fine electronic organ, Electone EL-100.

The Yamaha EL-100 Electone combines the most advanced AWM tone generation

technology with state-of-the-art digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound

quality with maximum musical enjoyment.

In order to make the most of the Electone and extensive performance potential, we urge you

to read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described.

Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference.

Included Items

Owner’s Manual

Music Stand

Dust Cover

Bench

Turning the Electone off erases all panel settings you have made. When the Electone is turned on, Basic

Registration 1 is automatically selected.

Voice Sections

Quick Introductory

Guide

Voice Controls

and Effects

Rhythm and

Accompaniment

Registration Memory

Music Disk Recorder

(M.D.R.)

Footswitches and

Expression Pedal

Transpose and

Pitch Controls

MIDI

Accessory Jacks

and Controls

Appendix

The Index on page 131 can be of your help in finding the functions and terms.

Table of Contents

Main Features ............................... 6

Panel Layout ................................. 7

EL-100 Panel Layout.......................................................... 8

1 Quick Introductory Guide ........ 10

1Getting Started ................................................... 10

2 Basic Registrations ............................................. 11

3 Basic Operation .................................................. 12

4 LCD DISPLAY ................................................... 13

2Voice Sections ......................... 17

1Voice Display ....................................................... 17

2 Selecting Voices from the Panel ........................ 18

3 Selecting Voices from the Dotted Buttons ....... 21

4Voice Menus ........................................................ 23

3Voice Controls and Effects ....... 29

1 Selecting from Voice Condition Pages ............. 30

(PAGE 1) .............................................................. 30

1 Initial Touch .................................................... 30

2 Feet .................................................................. 30

(PAGE 2) .............................................................. 31

1 Volume ............................................................. 31

2 Panning ............................................................ 31

3 Reverb .............................................................. 31

(PAGE 3) .............................................................. 32

1 Effect ............................................................... 32

(PAGE 4) .............................................................. 33

1 Vibrato ............................................................. 33

(PAGE 5) .............................................................. 34

1 Tune ................................................................. 34

2 Slide ................................................................. 34

2 Selecting from Effect Set Page ......................... 34

1 Tremolo/Chorus .............................................. 35

2 Symphonic/Celeste ......................................... 35

3 Delay ................................................................ 36

4 Flanger ............................................................. 38

5 Distortion ......................................................... 39

3 Selecting from the Panel .................................... 40

1 Reverb .............................................................. 40

2 Sustain ............................................................. 41

3 Tremolo/Chorus .............................................. 42

4 Rhythm and Accompaniment .. 45

1 Selecting Rhythms from the Panel ................... 45

2Rhythm Condition Pages .................................. 48

3Dotted Buttons and User Rhythms .................. 49

4Rhythm Menus ................................................... 51

5Automatic Accompaniment -

Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) ................................ 52

6Accompaniment Controls ................................. 54

7Preset/User Keyboard Percussion .................... 56

8 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) ............................. 64

5 Registration Memory .............. 67

1 Storing Registrations ......................................... 67

2 Selecting Registrations ...................................... 68

3Saving the Registration Data to Disk .............. 68

4 Registration Shift ............................................... 69

6 Music Disk Recorder (M.D.R.) .. 73

1Precautions on M.D.R. ...................................... 73

2Formatting a Disk .............................................. 75

3 Recording ............................................................ 76

4 Recording Registrations (and Bulk Data) ...... 82

5Recalling Recorded Registrations

(and Bulk Data) .................................................. 83

6 Replacing Registrations .................................... 83

7 Playback .............................................................. 84

8Other Functions .................................................. 88

7 Footswitches and

Expression Pedal .................... 97

1Footswitch ........................................................... 97

2 Expression Pedal .............................................. 100

8Transpose and Pitch Controls 101

9 MIDI ...................................... 102

Accessory Jacks and Controls ....

104

11 Appendix ............................. 105

MIDI .......................................................................... 105

MIDI Data Format .................................................. 111

MIDI Implementation Chart ................................. 120

Troubleshooting ....................................................... 122

EL-100 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS ................ 125

EL-100 Specifications .............................................. 129

Index .......................................................................... 131

Main Features

1 Astoundingly True-to-life Sounds

The new AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation technologies combined with authentic touch

response make this Electone a truly expressive musical instrument.

You can enjoy playing a total of 173 AWM voices using the touch response function.

2 Wide Variety of High Quality Effects

Electone voices can also be enhanced with a full range of high-quality digital effects, ranging from Tremolo

and Reverb to Flanger, Delay and Distortion. Stereo panning is independent of effect on/off status. (page 34)

3 Dynamic Rhythm Patterns and Programmable Percussion Sounds

The Rhythm section of the Electone features authentic drum and percussion sounds, used by expert rhythm

programmers in creating a total of 66 rhythm patterns, ranging across all styles of music. (page 45)

The Keyboard Percussion function lets you play 120 different percussion sounds, each of which can be

assigned onto any key. (page 56)

4 Convenient Registration Functions

The Basic Registrations let you instantly change the voices for playing any styles of music. (page 11)

Also, Registration Memory Function lets you set up and record your own Electone settings, and call up them

in the middle of the performance. (page 67)

5 Versatile Functions of the Music Disk Recorder

The Electone also features a Music Disk Recorder (MDR) for recording your registrations and performances

to a floppy disk. In addition, the MDR allows you to copy a song from a disk to another, duplicate a disk, and

play commercially available XG song data. (page 73)

6 LCD for Systematic and Intuitive Operation

The systematic and intuitive LCD allows you to smoothly understand almost all the Electone operation.

MIDI Jacks (page 104)

Jacks (page 104)

Speaker Unit

Left-Footswitch (page 97)

Right-Footswitch (page 69)

Expression Pedal (page 11)

Upper Keyboard

Front Panel (pages 8-9)

Lower Keyboard

Pedalboard

Music Stand

Panel Layout

REVERB

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

BASIC

REGIST.

UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE

STRINGS BRASS CLARI-

NET

SAXO- CHORUS HARMO -

PHONE NICA

ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI

PHONE

SUSTAIN

UPPER

LOWER PEDAL

LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE

SAXO-

STRINGS BRASS CLARI-

NET

CHORUS HORN

PHONE

ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI

PHONE

RHYTHM

SEQ.

LATIN

LATIN 8 BEAT 16 BEAT

SEQ. TANGO

SEQ. MARCH WALTZ SWING BOUNCE SLOW

2ROCK

LEAD VOICE

VIOLIN FLUTE

OBOE TRUM-

PET

LOWER

PEDAL VOICE

LOWER

CONTRA

BASS

ELEC.

ORGAN

TUBA

KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION

LOWER

PEDAL

BAR/ BEAT

TEMPO

INTRO.

ENDING

RHYTHM

START

SYNCHRO

FILL IN

DATA CONTROL

¨⁄String

Ò⁄String

UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE

(page 17)

LEAD VOICE

(page 17)

PEDAL VOICE

(page 17)

REVERB

(page 40)

SUSTAIN

(page 41)

RHYTHM

(page 45)

BASIC REGIST.

(page 11)

RHYTHM

(page 46)

BAR/BEAT/TEMPO

(page 47)

BAR/BEAT

(page 47)

TEMPO

(page 47)

LOWER KEYBOARD

VOICE

(page 17)

LCD Display

(page 13)

DATA CONTROL

(page 14)

KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION

(page 56)

EL-100 Panel Layout

DATA CONTROL PAGE

DISPLAY SELECT

VOICE EFFECT A.B.C.

DISPLAY SET M.O.C.

FOOT REGIST.PITCH TREMOLO

SW. SHIFT MIDI (FAST)

REGISTRATION MEMORY

MASTER VOLUME

12345678 D.

/TO DISK

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD CUSTOM PLAY

SONG SONG DEL.

REPEAT

POWER

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

TEMPO FORMAT

FROM TO

SONG COPY

s1ÎViolin1 ⁄

s1∏⁄ContBs.1

A.B.C./M.O.C. Button (pages 52, 64)

VOICE DISPLAY Button (page 20)

EFFECT SET Button (page 34)

FOOT SW. Button (page 97)

REGIST. SHIFT Button (page 69)

PITCH/MIDI Button (pages 101, 102)

TREMOLO (FAST) Button (page 44)

DISPLAY SELECT (page 15)

PAGE

(page 14)

MUSIC DISK

RECORDER

(page 73)

POWER

(page 10)

MASTER VOLUME

(page 11)

LED (Lamp in-use) Eject

Registration Memory

(page 67)

D. (Disable)

(page 68)

M./TO DISK

(page 67)

Floppy Disk Slot

DISPLAY SELECT

VOICE EFFECT A.B.C.

DISPLAY SET M.O.C.

FOOT REGIST. PITCH TREMOLO

SW. SHIFT MIDI (FAST)

1 Quick Introductory Guide

1 Getting Started

Plug the power cord in to an appropriate electrical outlet.

Only use the voltage specified as correct

for the Electone. The required voltage is

printed on the name plate of the Electone.

Yamaha products are manufactured

specifically for the supply voltage in the

area where they are to be sold. If you

should move, or if any doubt exists about

the supply voltage, please consult with a

qualified technician.

Turn on the Electone by pressing the POWER switch.

POWER

When you turn on the Electone, the following displays will appear one

after the other on the LCD display:

YAMAHA

Electone

¨⁄Strings1ÎViolin1 ⁄

Ò⁄Strings1∏⁄ContBs.1

This last display, Voice Display, shows you the currently assigned

voice settings for each voice section.

When the Electone is turned on, Basic Registration 1 is automatically

selected.

Quick Introductory Guide

BASIC

REGIST.

Set the MASTER VOLUME control.

The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall control which affects the

volume of the entire instrument.

MASTER VOLUME

Press the Expression pedal down with your foot.

Once you have set the MASTER VOLUME control to a suitable level,

you can use the Expression pedal to change the volume with your foot

as you play.

Louder Softer

2 Basic Registrations

“Registration” indicates a panel setting including upper keyboard voices,

lower keyboard voices, pedal voices, a rhythm and so on. The Basic

Registration section has five factory preset registrations, each with a

different set of voices for Upper/Lower keyboards and Pedalboard and

each specially suited for playing in a different music style.

To select Basic Registrations:

Press the BASIC REGIST. buttons to select each Basic Registration.

When you turn the power on, the Electone automatically selects Basic

Registration 1.

Upper Keyboard

Voice

Lower Keyboard

Voice

Pedal Voice

Basic

Registration 1

Strings 1

Contra Bass1

Basic

Registration 2

Brass 1

Horn1

Tuba

Basic

Registration 3

Flute 1

Piano 1

Contra Bass 1

Basic

Registration 4

Cosmic 1

Cosmic 2

Basic

Registration 5

Synth. Brass 1

Cosmic 3

Synth. Bass 1

NOTE:

Additional basic registrations are preset on

the Registration Memory locations from 1

to 8. See page 67 for the details.

Turning the Electone off erases all panel

settings you have made. When the

Electone is turned on, Basic Registration 1

is automatically selected.

Quick Introductory Guide

Setting Registration

Shift/Footswitch

Registration Set-up

Select the voice

(Voice Menu)

Finely adjust the voice

(Voice Condition)

Add effects

(Effect Set)

Add reverb

Select the rhythm

(Rhythm Menu)

Finely adjust the rhythm

(Rhythm Condition)

Select the keyboard

to play

* The Controls and Effects may

be applied differently depending

on the selected type of Controls

and Effects. See page 29 for

more information.

Playing back

Recording the performance

Saving the

registration data

Loading the

registration data

Expression Pedal

Adjust the total volume

(Master Volume)

Playing Electone

Music Disk Recorder

3 Basic Operation

Quick Introductory Guide

4 LCD DISPLAY

This section introduces you the convenient control functions of the LCD

display. The LCD display lets you see at a glance the current settings and

provides easy-to-understand graphic representation of all parameters.

Selecting a voice/rhythm

Press the panel voice/rhythm button which you want to use (For

example, press the STRINGS button in the Upper Keyboard Voice

section).

MAX

MIN

UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE

STRINGS BRASS CLARI-

NET

SAXO- CHORUS HARMO-

PHONE NICA

ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI

PHONE

The following display will appear, showing all the available voices/

rhythms in the category (Strings Category in this case).

Strings1 Strings2

Pizz.Strs Syn.Strs1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Press the Data Control button corresponding to the voice you want to

play (Strings 2 in this case).

Strings1 Strings2

Pizz.Strs Syn.Strs1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

The first letter of the selected voice/rhythm will start blinking.

For more information on the Voice Menu list see page 23.

Quick Introductory Guide

Function of the Data Control Buttons

Strings1 Strings2

Pizz.Strs Syn.Strs1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

VOL.:24 PAN:C ¨1¤

REVERB:24

DATA CONTROLDATA CONTROL

EFFECT:SYMPHONIC ¨1‹

”SYMPHONIC ’CELESTE

DATA CONTROLDATA CONTROL

<R.SHIFT>[INS][DEL]¤

???????????????????

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Cursor

The Data Control buttons are used to select 1 a voice/rhythm or function

shown on the display. Each pair of buttons corresponding to the section of the

display directly above it increases/decreases 2 the value or chooses 3 a

setting/function. When you are setting the Registration Shift, each of them

moves the cursor 4 to the right/left.

Using Page Buttons

¨⁄Strings1ÎViolin1 ⁄

Ò⁄Strings1∏⁄ContBs.1

pages

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

These buttons 5 are used to select (when available) the various ‘pages’ of the

display, the names of which appear at the top right of the LCD. Use Page F to

select the next page, and Page E to select the previous page.

Quick Introductory Guide

● Selecting voices or setting up the Voice Condition

● Selecting rhythms or setting up the Rhythm

Condition

● Setting the Reverb effect

● Setting the Sustain

● Setting the User Keyboard Percussion

1. To call up the LCD display

1) Pressing Panel Buttons

● Displaying Voice Display (Manual Balance)

● Setting effects

● Setting A.B.C./M.O.C.

● Setting the Left-Footswitch

● Setting Registration Shift (Right-Footswitch)

● Setting Pitch and Transpose

● Setting MIDI

● Selecting and setting Tremolo/Chorus

Using the Data Control buttons to:

● Select voices/rhythms/effects

● Turn on/off the Accompaniment and A.B.C. Memory

● Adjust Initial Touch and Reverb depth

● Move the pan position and cursor position

2) Pressing a Display Select button

LCD display

2. To Select Pages

3. To Actually Change the Settings

Selecting the page you want to

use with the Page buttons

Summary of the LCD Operation

The following chart gives you a general view of the basic operations on the Electone.

Quick Introductory Guide

Language on the LCD

LCD display can be shown in two languages, English and Japanese.

How to select the language:

1. Press the VOICE DISPLAY button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.

The page 1 will be displayed.

DISPLAY SELECT

VOICE EFFECT A.B.C.

DISPLAY SET M.O.C.

FOOT REGIST. PITCH TREMOLO

SW. SHIFT MIDI (FAST)

¨⁄Strings1ÎViolin1 ⁄

Ò⁄Strings1∏⁄ContBs.1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

2. Press the PAGE button to select the page 3.

<v(4∂/Display> ‹

’i-y∫ ”English

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

3. Pressing each pair of Page buttons at the bottom select the language: the

right ones select English and the left ones select Japanese.

<v(4∂/Display> ‹

’i-y∫ ”English

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Voice Sections

2 Voice Sections

The EL-100 features 173 different high quality AWM voices. Each of the AWM voices can be used on the Upper

keyboard, Lower keyboard and Pedalboard. There are two voice sections for the Upper keyboard, one voice

section for the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard, respectively.

Each voice section can, of course, have its own Voice Condition page(s), which allow you to finely set up voice

and volume settings.

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE

STRINGS BRASS CLARI-

NET

SAXO- CHORUS HARMO-

PHONE NICA

ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI

PHONE

LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE

SAXO-

STRINGS BRASS CLARI-

NET

CHORUS HORN

PHONE

ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI

PHONE

LEAD VOICE

VIOLIN FLUTE

OBOE TRUM-

PET

LOWER

PEDAL VOICE

LOWER

CONTRA

BASS

ELEC.

ORGAN

TUBA

1 Voice Display

You can visually confirm the voice assignments to each keyboard.

Pressing the VOICE DISPLAY button in the DISPLAY SELECT section selects

the Voice Display. (The Voice Display always appears when the Electone is

turned on.)

DISPLAY SELECT

VOICE EFFECT A.B.C.

DISPLAY SET M.O.C.

FOOT REGIST. PITCH TREMOLO

SW. SHIFT MIDI (FAST)

The Voice Display is configured with three pages. Each page can be selected

using the Page buttons.

Page 1 and 2 show the currently assigned voice settings for each voice section,

as well as the overall balance between the Upper and Lower voices.

(page 1)

¨⁄Strings1ÎViolin1 ⁄

Ò⁄Strings1∏⁄ContBs.1

UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE LEAD VOICE

LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE PEDAL VOICE

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

PAGE

Voice Sections

(page 2)

¨¤Strings1 M.BAL: 0¤

Ò¤Strings1∏¤ContBs.1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 2

Volume Balance

between UPPER

and LOWER (Page 20)

LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 2 PEDAL VOICE 2

In addition to the four panel voice groups such as Upper Keyboard Voice, Lower

Keyboard Voice, Pedal Voice and Lead Voice, the EL-100 has three “hidden”

voice groups, Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2, Pedal Voice 2.

These three voice groups are displayed on page 2 of the Voice Display screen.

This fact indicates the EL-100 owns the same voice group numbers as those of

the upper models like EL-500. Accordingly, the EL-100 can play back the

registrations created with the upper models like EL-500. You can change the

settings of each “hidden” voice group as you do with the panel voice groups.

See page 27 for the details.

NOTE:

For more information on the volume

balance between the Upper Keyboard and

the Lower Keyboard see page 20.

You can select the language shown on the LCD display on page 3 of the Voice

Display (page 16).

<v(4∂/Display> ‹

’i-y∫ ”English

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

Selecting Voices from the Panel

Since selection of panel voices follows the same procedure throughout the

various sections, instructions for only the Upper Keyboard Voice are given

here.

Select a voice from the Upper Keyboard Voice section by pressing one

of the Voice buttons in that section.

MAX

MIN

UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE

STRINGS BRASS CLARI-

NET

SAXO- CHORUS HARMO-

PHONE NICA

ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI

PHONE

If, for example, you have selected the ORGAN voice, the following

display (Voice Menu) will appear:

Organ1 JazzOrgan1

PopOrgan1 Accordion

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Notice that several different voice names are shown on this display.

These are variations of the basic organ voice category.

Voice Sections

Press one of the Data Control buttons that corresponds to the voice you

wish to select. (Pop Organ 1, in this case)

Organ1 JazzOrgan1

PopOrgan1 Accordion

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

The first letter of the selected voice will start blinking. You have

selected Pop Organ 1 for the Upper Keyboard Voice.

If you wish to, you can select voices from Lead Voice, Lower

Keyboard Voice and Pedal Voice sections, following steps #1 and #2

above.

Set the volume for each voice section.

There are two volume controls:

Coarse:

Use the VOLUME controls of each voice section on the panel to set the

desired level for each voice. The controls have seven volume settings,

from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full volume.

MAX

MIN

UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE

STRINGS BRASS CLARI-

NET

SAXO- CHORUS HARMO-

PHONE NICA

ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI

PHONE

Fine:

Pressing the same panel voice button again (or the same Data Control

button corresponding to the selected voice) calls up the Voice

Condition display. Use the Page buttons to select page 2, which

contains Volume setting.

INIT.T: 8 ¨1⁄

FEET:PRESET

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

Voice Sections

Now select voices for the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard as you did

for the Upper keyboard above. Also set the volumes of the voices.

Adjust the volume balance between the Upper and Lower Voices with

the Balance Control provided on the Voice Display.

To adjust the volume balance:

1. Press the VOICE DISPLAY button in the DISPLAY SELECT

section. The Voice Display always appears when the Electone is

turned on.

DISPLAY SELECT

VOICE EFFECT A.B.C.

DISPLAY SET M.O.C.

FOOT REGIST. PITCH TREMOLO

SW. SHIFT MIDI (FAST)

2. Select page 2 of the Voice Display using Page buttons at the right

side of the LCD display.

¨⁄Strings1ÎViolin1 ⁄

Ò⁄Strings1∏⁄ContBs.1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

3. Adjust the balance with the corresponding Data Control buttons, at

the top right side. The positive values increase the Upper Keyboard

volume, while the negative values lower it, or increase the Lower

Keyboard volume. Range: -6 - +6

¨¤Strings1 M.BAL:+4¤

Ò¤Strings1∏¤ContBs.1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

NOTE:

Pressing this pair of Data Control buttons

at the same time restores the balance to the

center position.

NOTE:

Pressing a voice button once calls up that

voice’s Voice Menu display. Pressing it a

second time calls up the Voice Condition

display. Successive presses alternate

between the two displays.

NOTE:

The Lead and Pedal Voices sound one note

at a time; when you simultaneously press

two or more keys, only the highest note

will sound.

Use the top left side Data Control button pair to change the level of the

desired voice. Fine volume settings, 0-24, are available.

VOL.:24 PAN:C ¨1¤

REVERB:24

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Voice Sections

About TO LOWER - Playing (Upper) Lead Voice and Pedal Voice from the Lower keyboard:

When the TO LOWER button is turned on,

the Lead voices and Pedal voices cannot

be played on the Upper keyboard and

Pedalboard, respectively.

3 Selecting Voices from the

Dotted Buttons

The EL-100 has a wide variety of voices from which you can choose – far

greater than what is immediately apparent from the front panel controls.

You’ve already learned in the section above how to select the different

voices that are available in the Voice Menu display of each panel voice.

The Electone also has dotted buttons in each voice section, giving you access to

even more voices. These dotted buttons function as ‘wild card’ Voice Menu

selectors; any internal voices can be selected from these buttons.

MAX

MIN

UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE

STRINGS BRASS CLARI-

NET

SAXO- CHORUS HARMO-

PHONE NICA

ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI

PHONE

The dotted buttons have two basic uses:

● For playing any voice of the Voice Menus from any of the keyboards or

Pedalboard. You can play on the Upper keyboard, for example, voices

from the twenty-two Voice Menu pages (including User), and not be

limited to only the twelve buttons (equivalent to twelve Voice Menu

pages) that make up the Upper Voice section. Another advantage to this

feature is that when the normally monophonic (one note) Lead and

Pedal voices are assigned to the Upper or Lower keyboard Voice

sections, they can be played polyphonically.

● For having three different voices from the same Voice Menu page

available for selection in the same song. For example, you can

assign one of the voices to a dotted button in the Upper Keyboard

Voice section, the second voice to the other dotted button in the

same section, and the third one on the Voice Menu.

Turning the Electone off erases all panel settings you have made. When the Electone is turned on, Basic Registration 1 is automatically selected.

If you have made panel settings you wish to keep, save them to the floppy disk before turning the Electone off. See page 68 for more information.

The Electone has a special ‘To Lower’ function that lets you assign Lead or

Bass voices to the Lower keyboard. Simply press the TO LOWER button

on the voice section you wish to assign, and that voice will be playable

from the Lower keyboard.

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

LEAD VOICE

VIOLIN FLUTE

OBOE TRUM-

PET

LOWER

PEDAL VOICE

LOWER

CONTRA

BASS

ELEC.

ORGAN

TUBA

Voice Sections

To select voices from the dotted buttons:

Press one of the dotted buttons in any of the voice sections.

Select Honky Tonk piano, for example, to the Dotted button 1 in Upper

Keyboard Voice.

MAX

MIN

UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE

STRINGS BRASS CLARI-

NET

SAXO- CHORUS HARMO-

PHONE NICA

ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI

PHONE

STRINGS, Voice Menu 1, appears.

<STRINGS> ¨1‚⁄

01:Strings1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Select one of the pages with the Page buttons, and choose a Voice

Menu. (PIANO, page 17, in this case)

<PIANO> ¨1⁄‡

01:Piano1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

NOTE:

You can directly view and select Voice

Menu pages by holding down one of the

Dotted buttons and simultaneously

pressing the desired voice buttons in

succession.

Select 03: Honky Tonk piano voice using the Data Control buttons.

<PIANO> ¨1⁄‡

03:Honky Tonk

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

You have selected Honky Tonk for the Upper Keyboard Voice.

About User voices:

Page 22 is “User” area. Although EL-100 cannot exactly play back the user

voices created with the upper models like EL-900, the automatic conversion

function allows your EL-100 play back the voices fairly close to the original

sounds. However, some voices may not be reproduced properly.

<USER VOICE> ¨1¤¤

01:******

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Voice Sections

4 Voice Menus

The following chart lists the voices that are shown by pressing the panel

voice buttons. The other voices that are only available when using the

Dotted buttons are shown on pages 24 - 26.

The details for each voice such as octave (feet) setting and effect on/off status are shown in the list on pages 24 - 26.

Strings1 Strings2

Pizz.Strs Syn.Strs1

Violin1 Violin2

Cello PizzViolin

ContBass1 ContBass2

Pizz.Bass UprghtBass

Brass1 Brass2

Brass3 Syn.Brass1

Horn1 Horn2

Horn3 Huted Horn

Trumpet1 Trumpet2

Trombone1 Muted Trp

Tuba Timpani

Timp.Roll

Flute1 Piccolo

Recorder Whistle

Oboe1 Oboe2

Bassoon1 EnglshHorn

STRINGS Upper/Lower

CONTRABASS Pedal

HORN Lower

OBOE Lead

VIOLIN Lead

BRASS Upper/Lower

TRUMPET Lead

TUBA Pedal

FLUTE Lead

Clarinet1 Clarinet2

Bass Cla. Syn.Cla.1

CLARINET Upper/Lower

Saxophon1 Saxophon2

Sopra.Sax Syn.Lead1

SAXOPHONE Upper/Lower

Tutti1 Tutti2

Tutti3 Tutti4

TUTTI Upper/Lower

Chorus1 Chorus2

Chorus3 Vocal

CHORUS Upper/Lower

Harmoni.1 Harmoni.2

HARMONICA Upper

Organ1 JazzOrgan1

PopOrgan1 Accordion

ORGAN Upper/Lower

Org.Bass1 Org.Bass2

Org.Bass3 Org.Bass4

ORGAN BASS Pedal

Piano1 E.Piano1

E.Piano2 Harpsi.

PIANO Upper/Lower

Guitar1 Guitar2

ElecGtr.1 Harp

GUITAR Upper/Lower

Vibrphone Glocken.

Marimba Syn.Chime

VIBRAPHONE Upper/Lower

ElecBass1 ElecBass2

Syn.Bass1 Syn.Bass2

ELECTRIC BASS Pedal

Cosmic1 Cosmic2

Cosmic3 Cosmic4

COSMIC Upper/Lower

01:******

USER VOICE Upper/Lower/Pedal

Voice Sections

1. Upper/Lower ● 01: Strings 1 8' - Large strings ensemble.

STRINGS ● 02: Strings 2 8' - Relatively small strings ensemble for contemporary music.

03: Strings 3 8' - Small strings ensemble.

04: Strings 4 8' - Having specific harmonics for layering other voices.

05: Strings 5 8' - For legato playing.

06: Strings 6 8' - Strings with clarity. Appropriate for the fast passages.

07: Strings 7 8' - Expressive full bodied strings with a slow attack.

● 08: Pizz. Strings 8' - Pizzicato strings.

09: Trem. Strings 8' - Tremolo strings.

● 10: Synth. Strings 1 8' Cele. Synth. strings with softer attack.

11: Synth. Strings 2 8' Sym. Bright synth. strings.

12: Synth. Strings 3 8' Cele Softer Synth. strings.

2. Lead ● 01: Violin 1 8' - For multi purposes.

VIOLIN ● 02: Violin 2 8' - For solo with sharp attack.

03: Violin 3 8' - Bright fidle for country music.

04: Violin 4 8' - Darker synth. violin with wider dynamic range.

05: Violin 5 8' - Violin with deep vibrato, also suited for chord playing.

● 06: Pizz. Violin 8' - Pizzicato violin.

● 07: Cello 8' - Cello with realistic rubbed string-instrument feel.

08: Kokyu 8' - Ancient Chinese fiddle.

3. Pedal ● 01: Contrabass 1 8' - Standard type.

CONTRABASS ● 02: Contrabass 2 8' - True-to-life tight contrabass sounding in an octave unison.

03: Contrabass 3 16' - Realistic contrabass solo.

● 04: Pizz. Bass 8' - Pizzicato contrabass for classicals.

● 05: Upright Bass 8' - For jazz.

4. Upper/Lower ● 01: Brass 1 8' - Trumpet and trombone ensemble for classicals.

BRASS ● 02: Brass 2 8' - For big band with brighter attack.

● 03: Brass 3 8' - With strong impact. Can be used as orchestra hit.

04: Brass 4 U16'/L8' - Trombone ensemble.

05: Brass 5 8' - Tight octave brass for contemporary music.

● 06: Synth. Brass 1 8' - Synth. brass with sharp attack. Used for Basic Regist. 5.

07: Synth. Brass 2 8' - Analog type. Can be used as melody line.

08: Synth. Brass 3 8' - Fat synth. brass.

5. Lower ● 01: Horn 1 8' - Standard horn for classicals.

HORN ● 02: Horn 2 8' - Horn unison solo. Alpenhorn.

● 03: Horn 3 8' - For solo playing.

04: Horn 4 8' - Impressive horn ensemble.

● 05: Muted Horn 8' - Muted horn.

6. Lead ● 01: Trumpet 1 8' - Standard trumpet for classicals.

TRUMPET ● 02: Trumpet 2 8' - Jazz trumpet 1 with full-bodied sounds.

03: Trumpet 3 8' - Sweet voice.

04: Trumpet 4 8' - Jazz trumpet 2 with a peculiar attack.

05: Trumpet 5 8' - Comical synth. trumpet.

06: Trumpet 6 8' - Resonant trumpet solo.

● 07: Muted Trp. 8' - Harmon mute.

● 08: Trombone 1 U16'/L8' - For legato playing.

09: Trombone 2 U16'/L8' - Bright trombone solo. For fast phrases.

10: Muted Trb. U16'/L8' - Cup mute.

11: Flugel Horn 8' - Flugelhorn.

12: Euphonium U16/L8 - Euphonium with softer sounds.

7. Pedal ● 01: Tuba 16' - Accentuated by touch.

TUBA ● 02: Timpani 8' - Standard timpani.

● 03: Timpani Roll 8' - Typical timpani roll.

8. Lead ● 01: Flute 1 8' - Standard flute solo.

FLUTE 02: Flute 2 8' - For legato playing.

● 03: Piccolo 4' - Standard piccolo.

04: Yokobue 4' - Japanese pipe with clear sounds.

● 05: Recorder 4' - Block floete.

06: Ocarina 4' - Ocarina with simple but warm sounds.

07: Pan Flute 8' - Pan Flute.

08: Shakuhachi 8' - Japanese Shakuhachi with realistic breath noises.

● 09: Whistle 4' - Whistle.

Page/Section Voice Name

Preset

Comments

Feet Effect

The voices not lead by a bullet indicate that they are only selectable using the Dotted buttons.

Details on All Voices

Voice Sections

9. Lead ● 01: Oboe 1 8' - Softer oboe.

OBOE ● 02: Oboe 2 8' - Rounder tone with characteristic tonguing. For fast phrases.

● 03: English Horn 8' - Cor Anglais.

● 04: Bassoon 1 U16'/L8' - For legato playing.

05: Bassoon 2 U16'/L8' - For staccato playing.

10. Upper/Lower ● 01: Clarinet 1 8' - Standard clarinet.

CLARINET ● 02: Clarinet 2 8' - Clarinet solo for jazz and contemporary.

● 03: Bass Cla. 8' - Bass clarinet with fat and resonant sounds.

● 04: Synth. Cla. 1 8' - Resonant synth. clarinet.

05: Synth. Cla. 2 8' - Synth. reed with a unique attack sound.

11. Upper/Lower ● 01: Saxophone 1 U16'/L8' - Alto sax.

SAXOPHONE ● 02: Saxophone 2 U16'/L8' - Characteristic tenor sax with strong tonguing.

● 03: Sopra. Sax. 8' - Standard soprano sax.

04: Sax. Ens. 1 U16'/L8' - Softer sounds for classicals.

05: Sax. Ens. 2 U16'/L8 - Saxophone section for bigband.

06: Synth. Sax. 8' - Wind synthesizer with thick sounds in the middle and lower range.

● 07: Synth. Lead 1 8' - Softer analog synth. reed.

08: Synth. Lead 2 8' - Clear synth. reed with a sharp attack.

09: Synth. Lead 3 4' - Hoarse noise reed.

10: Synth. Lead 4 8' - Digital synth. reed.

11: Synth. Lead 5 8' - Synth. reed with thick fourth notes.

12. Upper/Lower ● 01: Tutti 1 8' - Strings unison and wood winds ensemble.

TUTTI ● 02: Tutti 2 8' - Strings unison and the brasses.

● 03: Tutti 3 8' - The brasses for classicals and bands.

● 04: Tutti 4 8' - Big band. Softer playing = sax only. Harder playing = 1 octave higher brasses added.

05: Tutti 5 8' - Wood winds ensemble. Instruments vary depending on the register played.

06: Tutti 6 8' - Wood winds quintet.

07: Tutti 7 8' - Brass ensemble.

13. Upper/Lower ● 01: Chorus 1 8' - Female “Ah”.

CHORUS ● 02: Chorus 2 8' - Male “Wh”.

● 03: Chorus 3 8' - Mixed chorus.

04: Chorus 4 8' - Mixed chorus with beautiful resonance. Wh.

05: Chorus 5 8' - Scat type vocal ensemble.

● 06: Vocal 8' - Accentuated solo vocal, “Ah”.

14. Upper ● 01: Harmonica 1 8' - Standard type with pitch modulated vibrato.

HARMONICA ● 02: Harmonica 2 8' - Solo harmonica with filter and amplitude modulated vibrato.

15. Upper/Lower ● 01: Organ 1 8' - Small pipe organ. 8'.

ORGAN 02: Organ 2 8' - Big pipe organ with full coupler.

03: Organ 3 8' - Nasard stops. 8'+2 2/3'.

04: Organ 4 8' - Harmonium.

● 05: Jazz Organ 1 16' Chor. For solo playing. 16'+8'+5 1/3'.

06: Jazz Organ 2 16' Trem. 16'+8'+2'.

07: Jazz Organ 3 16' Trem. For cluster playing. 16'+1 3/5'+1 1/3'+1'.

08: Jazz Organ 4 16' Chor. Fat and noisy jazz organ.

● 09: Pop Organ 1 8' Chor. Bright sounds for jazz. 8'+4'+2 2/3'.

10: Pop Organ 2 8' Chor. For multi purposes.

11: Theat. Organ 1 8' Sym. 8'+4' with slower attack.

12: Theat. Organ 2 8' - 16'+8' with slower attack.

● 13: Accordion 8' - Slower attack.

14: Bandoneon 8' - Attack can be controlled by initial touch.

16. Pedal ● 01: Organ Bass 1 8' - Combination organ bass.

ORGAN BASS ● 02: Organ Bass 2 16' - Pipe organ bass 1. Standard type.

● 03: Organ Bass 3 16' - For jazz. 16'.

● 04: Organ Bass 4 16' - Pipe organ bass 2. Full coupler.

17. Upper/Lower ● 01: Piano 1 8' - For multi purposes.

PIANO 02: Piano 2 8' - Brighter sounds. CP80 type.

03: Honkytonk 8' - Honky tonk piano.

● 04: Elec. Piano 1 8' Cele. DX7 type.

● 05: Elec. Piano 2 8' Cele. Old fashioned, full bodied electric piano.

06: Elec. Piano 3 8' - Electric piano with clearly brilliant but deep sounds.

● 07: Harpsichord 8' - Standard cembalo.

08: Clavi. 16' - Funky clavi.

09: Clavichord 8' - Clavichord with stable and grave sounds.

Page/Section Voice Name

Preset

Comments

Feet Effect

Voice Sections

18. Upper/Lower ● 01: Guitar 1 U16'/L8' - Folk guitar. Steel string.

GUITAR ● 02: Guitar 2 U16'/L8' - Acoustic jazz guitar. Tone varies depending on the touch.

03: Guitar 3 U16'/L8' - Classic guitar. Suitable to backing for bossanova.

04: 12Str. Guitar U16/L8 - 12-string classic guitar with gorgeous sounds.

05: Banjo 8' - For country and dixieland.

06: Mandolin 8' Cele. Standard mandolin.

07: Sitar 8' - Indian sitar with the different resonances between lower and mid./high ranges.

08: Shamisen 8' - Japanese classical shamisen.

● 09: Elec. Guitar 1 U16'/L8' - For backing.

10: Elec. Guitar 2 U16'/L8' - For solo playing.

11: Muted Guitar U16'/L8' - Muted guitar.

12: Dist. Guitar U16'/L8' - Distorted guitar.

● 13: Harp 8' - Grand harp.

14: Steel Guitar 8' - Hawaiian guitar. Effective when used with the glide function.

15: Koto 8' - Japanese Koto.

16: Taisho Koto 4' Cele. Japanese Taisho Koto.

19. Upper/Lower ● 01: Vibraphone 8' - Standard vibraphone.

VIBRAPHONE ● 02: Glocken 4' - Glockenspiel.

03: Celesta 4' - Celesta.

04: Music Box 4' - Antique music box.

● 05: Marimba 8' - Concert marimba.

06: Xylophone 4' - Tone varies depending on the initial touch.

07: Chime 4' - Chime.

● 08: Synth. Chime 8' Cele. Starry chime.

09: Steel Drum 8' - Steel Drum.

20. Pedal ● 01: Elec. Bass 1 8' - For multi purposes.

ELECTRIC BASS ● 02: Elec. Bass 2 16' - Slap bass.

03: Elec. Bass 3 16' - Plucked bass with hard attack.

04: Elec. Bass 4 16' Cele. Fretless bass, also suited for solo playing.

● 05: Synth. Bass 1 16' - Sustained sounds.

● 06: Synth. Bass 2 16' - With remarkable attack.

07: Synth. Bass 3 16' - Tone varies depending on the touch.

21. Upper/Lower ● 01: Cosmic 1 4' - Decay type. For multi purposes. UK in Basic Regist. 4.

COSMIC ● 02: Cosmic 2 8' - The lower register of celesta. LK and PK in Basic Regist. 4.

● 03: Cosmic 3 8' - Brass type.LK in Basic Regist. 5.

● 04: Cosmic 4 8' - Decay type. With fantastic image.

05: Cosmic 5 8' - Spacious sounds with feedback.

06: Cosmic 6 8' - Synth. brass type.

07: Cosmic 7 8' - Vocal type with feedback.

08: Cosmic 8 8' - Distortion type with feedback.

09: Cosmic 9 8' - Decay type with unique feedback.

10: Cosmic 10 8' - Clear synth. pad.

11: Cosmic 11 8' - Digital synth. pad.

12: Cosmic 12 8' - Chorus type synth. pad.

13: Cosmic 13 8' - Special sound effect with a slower attack. The sounds drastically changes.

14: Cosmic 14 8' - Fantastic digital music box.

15: Cosmic 15 8' - Ethnic synth. percussion.

16: Cosmic 16 16' - Special sound effect with a complicated mixture of various sounds.

Page/Section Voice Name

Preset

Comments

Feet Effect

Some of the voices may be different from the ones on the upper models like EL-900 even if they have the same voice names.

Voice Sections

To select the “hidden” voices

(Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2):

You can call up the “hidden” voices on the LCD display and select them.

This function allows you to layer the voices on each keyboard to make the

sound thicker.

The procedure is explained with the selection of Upper Keyboard Voice 2,

as an example.

1. Press one of the voice buttons in the Upper Keyboard Voice section

while holding down the VOICE DISPLAY button in the DISPLAY

SELECT section.

MAX

MIN

UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE

STRINGS BRASS CLARI-

NET

SAXO- CHORUS HARMO-

PHONE NICA

ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRA- COSMIC TUTTI

PHONE

DISPLAY SELECT

VOICE EFFECT A.B.C.

DISPLAY SET M.O.C.

FOOT REGIST. PITCH TREMOLO

SW. SHIFT MIDI (FAST)

If, for example, you have selected the ORGAN voice, the following

display (Voice Menu) will appear:

Organ1 JazzOrgan1

PopOrgan1 Accordion

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Notice that several different voice names are shown on this display.

These are variations of the basic organ category.

NOTE:

In this case the lamp on/off status in the

Upper Keyboard Voice section will not be

affected since you are dealing with the

Upper Keyboard Voice 2.

2. Press one of the Data Control buttons that corresponds to the voice you

wish to select. (Pop Organ 1, in this case)

Organ1 JazzOrgan1

PopOrgan1 Accordion

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

The first letter of the selected voice will start blinking. You have

selected Pop Organ 1 for the Upper Keyboard Voice 2.

Voice Sections

3. Set the volume for the Upper Keyboard Voice 2.

Pressing the same Data Control button corresponding to the selected

voice calls up the Voice Condition display. Use the Page buttons to

select page 2, which contains Volume setting.

INIT.T: 8 ¨2⁄

FEET:PRESET

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

Use the top left side Data Control button pair to change the level of the

desired voice.

VOL.:24 PAN:C ¨2¤

REVERB:24

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

You can select the voices of Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice

2 in the same manner.

NOTE:

Also, you can change the volume of the

Upper Keyboard Voice 2 voices by

pressing the Upper Keyboard Voice

volume buttons on the panel while

holding VOICE DISPLAY button.

NOTE:

The panel volume lamp position will not

be affected even if you change the

volume of Upper Keyboard Voice 2.

The volume buttons on the panel are

exclusive for the panel voice groups.

Voice Controls and Effects

3 Voice Controls and Effects

The Electone is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the sound of the voices:

Voice Controls and Effects.

Certain effects may have been applied to some of the voices, but can be modified as you like. All built-in effects

are digital.

The chart below shows the various voice controls and effects for the individual voice sections. Available

functions are indicated by circles. The controls and effects are differently applied depending on those types:

applied to each voice group, to each keyboard or to the entire system.

Upper Keyboard Voice

Lower Keyboard Voice

Lead Voice

Pedal Voice

*1 Turning tremolo/chorus on/off and switching between tremolo and chorus are common to all voice sections.

*2 The total reverb depth and length are controlled on the reverb page, though the different reverb settings can be done for each voice section.

Voice Condition Page 1

Voice Condition Page 2

Voice Condition Page 3

Voice Condition Page 4

Voice Condition Page 5

(Lead Voice only)

Effect Set Page

Reverb Page

Sustain Page

Tremolo Page

Inital

To uc h

Feet

Volume

Pan

Sym-

phonic/

Celeste

Delay

Flanger

Vibrato

Lead

Slide

Lead

Tune

Sustain

Distortion

Tremolo

/Chorus

Reverb

To change the settings and add the effects, display the appropriate page:

1. Selecting from Voice Condition Pages

2. Selecting from Effect Set Pages

3. Selecting from the Panel

Voice Controls and Effects

1 Selecting from Voice

Condition Pages

To call up the Voice Condition Pages:

Choose a voice on the panel, then press that voice’s panel button again. The

Voice Condition Choose a voice on page appears on the LCD display.

MAX

MIN

LEAD VOICE

VIOLIN FLUTE

OBOE TRUM-

PET

LOWER

Each voice group’s Voice Condition (except for Lead Voice) is configured with

four pages. Voice Condition of the Lead Voice consists of five pages.

Voice Condition [PAGE 1]

INIT.T: 8 Î ⁄

FEET:PRESET

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

The included items are different between Pedal Voice group and the others

(Only Feet setting is available with Pedal Voice group).

Pedalboard

∏1⁄

FEET:PRESET

1 Initial Touch

Controls volume and timbre according to the velocity at which you strike the

keys.

The harder you strike the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the

timbre will become. All voices are provided with this expressive function,

making it possible to perfectly reproduce the subtle dynamic and tonal changes

of actual instruments.

Higher settings make the change wider.

Range: 0 - 14

NOTE:

Minimum setting produces no effect at all.

2 Feet

Determines the octave setting of the voice group. You can use a certain voice in

the broader range.

PRESET is the original (factory) setting; 4' is the highest and 16' is the lowest.

2' setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections.

Voice Controls and Effects

Voice Condition [PAGE 2]

Press the Page buttons to select PAGE 2.

VOL.: 0 PAN:C Î ¤

REVERB:24

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

1 Volume

Fine adjustment of the voice volume. See page 20 for more information.

Range: 0 - 24

2 Panning

Determines the position of the voice in the stereo image.

Seven pan positions are available.

3 Reverb

Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice section. When the panel

REVERB control is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect.

See page 40 for the details.

Range: 0 - 24

Voice Controls and Effects

Voice Condition [PAGE 3]

Press the Page buttons to select PAGE 3.

EFFECT:PRESET Î ‹

PRESET

OFF

TREMOLO

SYMPHONIC

DELAY

FLANGER

DISTORTION

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

-7

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

1 Effect

Determines the effect type applied to each voice section.

Each press of top left F Data Control button selects Preset, Off, Tremolo,

Symphonic, Delay, Flanger and Distortion, in order. Each press of top left E

Data Control button selects in the reversed order.

NOTE:

Effect can also be selected in the Effect

Set page (page 34).

-1

Preset

Selects the original (factory) effect. When PRESET is selected, some

of the voices have already got a certain type of effects.

-2

Off

Cancels the effect.

-3

Tremolo

Selects Tremolo/ Chorus. See page 42 for the details of the Tremolo/

Chorus setting.

-4

Symphonic

Selects Symphonic/ Celeste. See page 35 for the details of the

Symphonic/ Celeste setting.

-5

Delay

Selects Delay. See page 36 for the details of the Delay setting.

-6

Flanger

Selects Flanger. See page 38 for the details of the Flanger setting.

-7

Distortion

Selects Distortion. See page 39 for the details of the Distortion setting.

Voice Controls and Effects

Voice Condition [PAGE 4]

Press the Page buttons to select PAGE 4.

VIB:PRESET Î ›

VIB:USER DEPTH: 0Î ›

DELAY: 0 SPEED: 0

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

1-1

1-3

1-2 1-4

1 Vibrato

Vibrato function vibrates the voices to create softer image. Applied to each

voice group.

-1

PRESET/USER

Selects the original (factory) effect. When PRESET is selected, some

of the voices have already got vibrato effect.

Selecting User allows you to access the Vibrato parameters to create

your own vibrato setting.

NOTE:

The User vibrato may not be effective for

some voices such as Harmonica2, Electric

Piano1 and Synth. Chime.

NOTE:

The Vibrato parameters, Delay, Depth and

Speed, are not displayed as long as Preset

is selected.

-2

Delay

Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a

key and the start of the vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher settings

increase the delay of the vibrato onset.

Range: 0 - 14

-3

Depth

Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher

settings result in a more pronounced vibrato.

Range: 0 - 14

-4

Speed

Determines the speed of the vibrato effect (see diagram).

Range: 0 - 14

Delay

Vibrato Control

Speed

Depth

Voice Controls and Effects

Voice Condition [PAGE 5]

Press the Page buttons to select PAGE 5.

TUNE: 0 Î ﬁ

SLIDE:OFF S.TIME: 0

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

2-1 2-2

1 Tune

Determines the pitch of the Lead voice. This control lets you detune the Lead

voice relative to the other voices of the Electone, for producing a richer sound.

The higher the value set, the higher the pitch.

Range: 0-24 (max. 28.88 cents; 1 step= Ca.1.2cents)

2 Slide

Slide applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. For example, if you

play one note, then play another before completely releasing the first note, the

pitch of the first note will ‘slide’ up or down to the second note. The Slide

function is effective within a one-octave range.

-1

On/Off

Determines on/off status of the Slide effect.

-2

Slide Time

Determines the speed of the slide or portamento effect. The higher the

value that is set, the slower the speed.

Range: 0 - 14

2 Selecting from Effect Set

Page

To call up the Effect Set page:

Pressing the EFFECT SET button in the DISPLAY SELECT section calls up the

Effect Set pages.

DISPLAY SELECT

VOICE EFFECT A.B.C.

DISPLAY SET M.O.C.

FOOT REGIST. PITCH TREMOLO

SW. SHIFT MIDI (FAST)

See page 32 for the information on Preset and Off.

The explanation on each effect is given here.

Voice Controls and Effects

EFFECT:PRESET ¨1

PRESET

OFF

TREMOLO

SYMPHONIC

DELAY

FLANGER

DISTORTION

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

Selecting Voice Group

You can select the voice section to which the effect should be applied, by

pressing the Page buttons. The acronyms indicate each voice group.

¨1

: Upper Keyboard Voice

¨2

: Upper Keyboard Voice 2

Ò1

:Lower Keyboard Voice

Ò2

:Lower Keyboard Voice 2

: Lead Voice

: Pedalboard Voice 2

: Pedalboard Voice

1 Tremolo/Chorus

See Tremolo section on page 42. Independently applied to each voice section.

2 Symphonic/Celeste

Determines the type of the Symphonic effect, SYMPHONIC (Sym.) or

CELESTE (Cele.).

Symphonic is a subtle echo effect that makes one voice sound like an ensemble.

For example, a solo violin voice played through Symphonic would sound like

many violins playing together.

SYMPHONIC simulates the effect of a large ensemble, while CELESTE creates

the effect of a gradually expanding sound.

Press the appropriate Data Control button to turn on the desired effect. The solid

(negative) box indicates the effect is turned on.

EFFECT:SYMPHONIC ¨1

”SYMPHONIC ’CELESTE

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

2-1 2-2

NOTE:

In the illustration at the left, Symphonic is

selected and effective.

-1

Symphonic

Selects the Symphonic effect to the designated voice section.

-2

Celeste

Selects the Celeste effect to the designated voice section.

Voice Controls and Effects

3 Delay

Delay is a pronounced echo effect, with distinct delayed repeats of the original

sound. Independently applied to each voice section.

Time

Adjusts the delay interval using TIME parameter

Adjust the number of repeated sounds using FEEDBACK parameter

Signal

Delayed Signal

Adjusts the level

balance using

BALANCE

parameter

Delay Effect

EFFECT:DELAY ¨1

ÚÆTIME----242mSec

TIME

F.B.

BAL.

MODE

-2

-3

-4

-5

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

3-1

-1

Parameter Settings

The bottom left Data Control buttons select available Delay parameters.

Available parameters are as follows:

-2

Time

Determines the time between delayed repeats.

EFFECT:DELAY ¨1

ÚÆTIME----242mSec

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Range: 5mSec – 956mSec

-3

Feedback

Determines the number of delayed repeats.

EFFECT:DELAY ¨1

ÚÆF.B.----28.5%

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Range: 0.2% - 46.9%

Voice Controls and Effects

-4

Balance

Determines the volume of the delay effect, relative to the original

sound. Higher settings produce a louder delay.

EFFECT:DELAY ¨1

ÚÆBAL.----60.6%

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Range: 0% - 100%

-5

Mode

Selects the delay type from Mono, ST (Stereo) 1, 2, 3.

Selecting one of the Stereo Delays produces more expanding image or

an image sounds move from right to left, or left to right.

EFFECT:DELAY ¨1

ÚÆMODE----MONO

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Range: Mono, ST1, ST2, ST3

Characteristics of Each Delay Type

Monaural

Normal monaural delay.

ST1

Multi delay with complicated reflections. Provides the most pronounced

effect.

ST2

Simple stereo delay. Feedback is 0 and the first reflection only. Special

effects can be obtained.

ST3

Adds thickness and brilliance to the monaural delay.

Voice Controls and Effects

4 Flanger

Flanger introduces a swirling, animated modulation effect to the sound.

Independently applied to each voice section.

Flanger Effect

Time

Signal

Changes the pitch using

SPEED parameter

Intensifies the pitch change

using FEEDBACK parameter

Sets the depth using

DEPTH parameter

EFFECT:FLANGER ¨1

ÚÆSPEED--- 4.5Hz

SPEED

F.B.

DEPTH

-2

-3

-4

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

-1

Parameter Settings

The bottom left Data Control buttons select available Flanger

parameters. Available parameters are as follows:

-2

Speed

Determines the speed of the modulation.

EFFECT:FLANGER ¨1

ÚÆSPEED--- 4.5Hz

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Range: 0Hz - 12.1Hz

-3

Feedback

Controls the brightness and the metallic sound of the effect.

EFFECT:FLANGER ¨1

ÚÆF.B.----35.2%

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Range: 0.6% - 94.0%

-4

Depth

Determines the intensity of the effect.

EFFECT:FLANGER ¨1

ÚÆDEPTH---52.3%

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Range: 37.8% - 87.8%

Voice Controls and Effects

5 Distortion

Distortion adds a distorted image to the sounds usually found in electric guitars.

Independently applied to each voice section.

Distortion Effect

Signal

Determines the depth

using LEVEL parameter

Changes the

timbre using

HIPASS

parameter

EFFECT:DISTORTION ¨1

ÚÆLEVEL---16.4dB

LEVEL

HI PASS

5-2

5-3

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

-1

Parameter Settings

The bottom left Data Control buttons select available Distortion

parameters. Available parameters are as follows:

-2

Level

Determines the depth of the distorted sounds.

EFFECT:DISTORTION ¨1

ÚÆLEVEL---16.4dB

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Range: 0dB – 21.8dB

-3

High Pass

Changes the timbre of the distorted sounds.

EFFECT:DISTORTION ¨1

ÚÆHI PASS- 476Hz

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Range: 20Hz - 1036Hz

Voice Controls and Effects

3 Selecting from the Panel

Reverb, Sustain and Tremolo/Chorus pages are called up by pressing the

respective panel buttons.

1 Reverb

Reverb adds an echo-like effect to the sound, giving the impression of a

performance in a large room or concert hall. Reverb effect can be applied to the

entire system or to each voice section (page 31) independently. Also, Reverb

can be applied to the rhythm and accompaniment independently.

Press one of the REVERB buttons, located to the left of the panel, to set the

Reverb effect. The following display appears.

REVERB

MAX

MIN

REVERB page

<REVERB> TYPE:HALL

LENGTH:3 DEPTH:16

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

-1

-2

-3

-1

Type

Determines the type of reverb effect: Room, Hall and Church. Each

type simulates a different acoustic environment; Room is the smallest

and Church the largest.

-2

Length

Determines the acoustic liveliness of the simulated room in the effect.

Higher settings make the room more reverberant.

Range: 0 - 6

-3

Depth

Fine adjustment of the depth of reverberation or the level of the

reflected sounds. Coarse reverb depth settings are made with the panel

REVERB buttons.

Range: 0 - 24

NOTE:

When this parameter or the panel

REVERB control is set to the minimum,

the settings in each voice condition page

(page 31) have no effect.

Voice Controls and Effects

2 Sustain

The Sustain effect, selectable for the Upper, Lower and Pedal voices, causes

voices to gradually fade out when the keys are released. The sustain on/off and

sustain length settings are independent for each keyboard, providing maximum

expressive control.

Press one of the SUSTAIN buttons, located to the left of the panel, to set the

Sustain effect. The following display appears.

The lamp of the button lights up to indicate that sustain is on. Press the button

again to turn sustain off.

SUSTAIN

UPPER

LOWER PEDAL

SUSTAIN Page

<SUSTAIN> UPPER:10

LOWER:10 PEDAL: 6

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Upper/Lower/Pedal

Determines the length of sustain applied to each keyboard. The display shows

the current sustain length values for each keyboard. The values here must be set

high enough for the sustain effect to be noticeable.

Range: 0 - 12

NOTE:

Sustain cannot be applied to the Lead

voices.

NOTE:

Remember that the SUSTAIN buttons are

on/off switches. If you use them to simply

check the sustain length values, you may

unintentionally change the on/off status of

the effect. Remember to check whether the

sustain button lamps are on or off before

you start to play.

Voice Controls and Effects

3 Tremolo/Chorus

Tremolo recreates the rich, swirling sound of the popular rotating speaker effect.

Just as with a conventional rotating speaker, you can switch between slow and

fast speeds. And like a motor-driven speaker, the characteristic tremolo effect

gradually changes speed after it is switched. You can also adjust the maximum

speed of the effect to suit your playing style. The Tremolo effect can be

switched in real time as you play with either the front panel button or the Left

Footswitch (when properly set for Footswitch operation).

■ Tremolo Operation

Select (turn on) Tremolo effect in each Voice Condition

page 3.

Adjust the Tremolo setting in Tremolo

Control (or Effect Set) page.

Assign footswitch for Tremolo Control, if desired.

Turn on Tremolo as you play,

with Tremolo button or Footswitch.

For Panel Voices (Voice Menu)

Voice Controls and Effects

1) Turning on the Tremolo effect (set to standby):

You cannot use the Tremolo effect only by turning on the TREMOLO (FAST)

button. First, you need to turn the effect on in the desired voice section(s).

Independently applied to each voice section.

Select (turn on) Tremolo

Press the desired voice button on the panel twice to display one of the

Voice Condition pages.

MAX

MIN

LEAD VOICE

VIOLIN FLUTE

OBOE TRUM-

PET

LOWER

The Voice Condition page appears.

Select page 3 of the Voice Display using PAGE buttons at the right side

of the LCD display.

EFFECT:PRESET Î ‹

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

Select Tremolo to turn it on.

EFFECT:TREMOLO Î ‹

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Voice Controls and Effects

2) Setting the Tremolo Effect

Tremolo setting made here are global; in other words, they are applied the same

to all voices for which Tremolo has been turned on (set to standby).

To turn on the Tremolo effect and call up the Tremolo Control page:

Press the TREMOLO (FAST) button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.

The following display appears.

DISPLAY SELECT

VOICE EFFECT A.B.C.

DISPLAY SET M.O.C.

FOOT REGIST. PITCH TREMOLO

SW. SHIFT MIDI (FAST)

SPEED:6.82 MODE:SLOW

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

The lamp of the button lights up to indicate that Tremolo is on. Press the button

again to turn Tremolo off and Chorus on (the LED turns off).

1 Tremolo Speed

Determines the speed of the Tremolo (rapid rotation) effect.

Range: 4.75Hz – 7.77Hz

2 Chorus Mode

Determines the effect applied when Tremolo is switched off: a slow chorus

effect (SLOW) or STOP. Use the SLOW setting when you want to have a

constant rotating speaker sound.

3) Realtime control of Tremolo effect

Once the Tremolo effect has been turned on and set, you can control the effect

in real time from the panel or from the Left Footswitch (page 97). Simply press

the TREMOLO (FAST) button in the DISPLAY SELECT section to turn the

Tremolo effects on and off while you’re playing. This button functions just like

the fast/slow switch on an actual rotating speaker cabinet. When Tremolo is on,

the rotation effect is fast; when off (Chorus), it is slow. The speed change is

gradual, effectively simulating the slowing down and speeding up of a rotating

speaker. You can also use the Left Footswitch to control the Tremolo effect in

the same way, if the Footswitch has been properly assigned.

Rhythm and Accompaniment

NOTE:

The chord/bass patterns matching with the

designated rhythm will be selected

automatically when the A.B.C. function is

turned on. (Refer to the Auto Bass Chord

section, page 52, for details on Auto Bass

Chord and Memory.)

NOTE:

In addition to 10 different rhythm styles,

four types of metronome sounds, simple

metronome, two four, three four and four

four, are assigned to the SEQ 1 – 4

buttons, respectively, as the defaults.

Designated Rhythm Menu page will be displayed.

8Beat1 8Beat2

DancePop1 DancePop2

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

The first letter of the currently selected rhythm will start blinking.

Press the Data Control button corresponding to the rhythm you wish to

play, as you do with the voices.

The first letter of the selected rhythm will start blinking. Dance Pop 1

is selected here, for example.

8Beat1 8Beat2

DancePop1 DancePop2

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Selecting Rhythms from the Panel

Ten different rhythm categories in various styles can be instantly selected

from the front panel. The Electone has many more ‘hidden’ rhythms,

however. A total of 66 rhythms are available, and can be selected by using

the display.

1) To select and play a rhythm:

Press any of the RHYTHM buttons once.

MAX

MIN

RHYTHM

SEQ.

LATIN

LATIN 8 BEAT 16 BEAT

SEQ. TANGO

SEQ. MARCH WALTZ SWING BOUNCE SLOW

2ROCK

4 Rhythm and Accompaniment

The Rhythm features of the Electone use actual drum and percussion sampled sounds to automatically play

various rhythms. Automatic Accompaniment functions are used with the rhythms, providing appropriate and

completely automatic accompaniment to match the style of the selected rhythm. Moreover, the Electone has a

Keyboard Percussion feature that allows you to play drum and percussion sounds from the Lower keyboard

and Pedalboard.

Rhythm and Accompaniment

Turn the rhythm on.

You can use one of three buttons to turn on the rhythm:

INTRO.

ENDING

RHYTHM

START

SYNCHRO

FILL IN

123

1 START

This button does as its name indicates; the rhythm begins as soon as

the button is pressed. To stop the rhythm, press this button again.

2 SYNCHRO START

This button puts the rhythm in ‘stand-by’ status. The rhythm will

start when you press a note on the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard.

3 INTRO. ENDING

Pressing this button automatically adds a short introduction (of up to

eight measures) before starting the actual rhythm.

First, press the INTRO. ENDING button, then the START or

SYNCHRO START button to actually start the rhythm.

While the introduction is playing, the display shows the countdown

to the first measure of the pattern. For example, if there is an eight-

measure lead-in for a pattern in 4/4 time, the following display

appears.

Pressing the INTRO. ENDING button again while the pattern is

being played will automatically add an ending phrase before

stopping the rhythm.

BAR/ BEAT

NOTE:

The Left Footswitch can also be used to

turn the rhythm on and off in the middle of

song. To assign the Footswitch for rhythm

control, see page 98.

NOTE:

ABOUT SYNCHRO START:

Synchro Start functions quite differently

when the Auto Bass Chord feature is

turned on and the Accompaniment

Memory is turned off. The rhythm starts

when a key on the Lower keyboard is

played, but then immediately stops when

the key is released. To keep this from

happening, turn the Memory function on.

(Refer to the Auto Bass Chord section,

page 52, for details on Auto Bass Chord

and Memory.)

LEAD IN

Pressing the START button while holding down the INTRO. ENDING

button automatically plays a special one-measure Lead In, with a click on

each beat, to cue you in to the beginning of the song.

Set the volume using the panel rhythm volume button.

The controls have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no

sound, to a maximum of full volume. Fine adjustments in the volume of

the rhythm can also be made from the Rhythm Condition page (page 48).

MAX

MIN

RHYTHM

SEQ.

LATIN

LATIN 8 BEAT 16 BEAT

SEQ. TANGO

SEQ. MARCH WALTZ SWING BOUNCE SLOW

2ROCK

NOTE:

When the Electone is turned on, the

Rhythm Volume is automatically set to 0.

Rhythm and Accompaniment

Set the rhythm tempo using the Tempo button in the rhythm section.

(TEMPO Display:

shows current tempo)

BAR/ BEAT

TEMPO

1 TEMPO Button

For adjusting the speed of the rhythm. Pressing the right button

increases the tempo and pressing the left button decreases it.

2 TEMPO Display (BAR/BEAT Indicator)

Shows the current tempo. (Displayed values are given in beats per

minute, just as on a conventional metronome.)

Range: 40 - 240

When the rhythm begins playing, the TEMPO display changes

function to a Bar/Beat indicator.

(BAR/BEAT Indicator: shows the

current position in the measures)

The number on the left indicates the current bar

or measure and the one on the right indicates

the number of the beat in each bar.

The beat indicator lamp below the TEMPO

buttons also indicates the beats.

BAR/ BEAT

NOTE:

When you press the TEMPO Button even

while the rhythm is playing, the display

momentarily changes to show the current

tempo.

2) To use the Fill In patterns:

Fill In patterns are designed to be used as temporary and regular rhythmic

breaks to spice up a repeating rhythm. Like the regular rhythms, all Fill In

patterns have been designed to perfectly match the bass and chord parts of the

Automatic Accompaniment feature.

Select and play a rhythm.

As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the

FILL IN button.

INTRO.

ENDING

RHYTHM

START

SYNCHRO

FILL IN

NOTE:

USING A FILL IN FOR THE START

OF A SONG:

Fill In patterns can also be used as

introductions; simply press the FILL IN

button before starting the rhythm with the

START or SYNCHRO START buttons.

NOTE:

PLAYING PARTIAL FILL IN

PATTERNS:

You can also start Fill In patterns within a

bar, in order to play only the final one or

two beats of the Fill In pattern and create

additional rhythmic interest. Since the Fill

In feature is very sensitive to bar/beat

boundaries, you should be very careful to

‘play’ the FILL IN button precisely on (or

just slightly before) the beat that you want

the Fill In pattern to begin.

Rhythm and Accompaniment

NOTE:

The Auto Variation function is not applied

to some of the rhythms.

2 Rhythm Condition Pages

The Rhythm Condition includes the following two pages: the Rhythm

Condition page used to adjust the rhythms and the Instrument page used to

make up each drum/percussion instrument, each of which comprises the

rhythms and is playable using the Keyboard Percussion function.

To select the Rhythm Condition page:

Choose a rhythm, and press that pattern’s panel button again (or again press the

Data Control button corresponding to the selected rhythm). (The button should

be pressed only once if the Rhythm display has already been called up;

otherwise press the button twice.)

MAX

MIN

RHYTHM

SEQ.

LATIN

LATIN 8 BEAT 16 BEAT

SEQ. TANGO

SEQ. MARCH WALTZ SWING BOUNCE SLOW

2ROCK

Rhythm Condition [PAGE 1]

VOL.: 0 BAL.: 0 ⁄

REV.:12 ’AUTO VARI.

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

1 Volume

Fine Adjustment of rhythm/keyboard percussion volume.

Range: 0 - 24

2 BAL. (Balance)

Determines the balance between two main sound types of the rhythms: the

drum sounds and the cymbal sounds. Positive settings emphasize the cymbal

sounds, while negative settings emphasize the drums.

Range: -6 - 0 - +6

NOTE:

Pressing this pair of Data Control buttons

at the same time restores the balance to the

center position.

3 Reverb

Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythms and percussion

sounds used in the rhythms. When the panel REVERB control is set to the

minimum, the setting here will have no effect.

Range: 0 - 24

4 Auto Variation

On/off switches of the Auto Variation function. Use the bottom right Data

Control button to turn on the Auto Variation function (Solid box indicates

the function is effective). The Auto Variation function lets you set pattern

variations to be played automatically. When set to ON, Auto Variation

automatically substitutes additional pattern variations to make the rhythm

more interesting and complex.

Rhythm and Accompaniment

Rhythm Condition [PAGE 2]

ACC.VOL.: 0 ”ON’OFF¤

ACC.REV.:24 TYPE:1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

The settings related to Accompaniment are available on this page. See page 54

for the details.

3 Dotted Buttons and User

Rhythms

The Rhythm section also has, like the voice sections, dotted buttons from

which rhythms can be selected. These dotted buttons function as ‘wild

card’ rhythm selectors; any of the rhythms available from the panel

buttons, the Rhythm Menus or User rhythms loaded from optional Pattern

Disk can be selected from these buttons.

1) To select a rhythm from a dotted button:

Press one of the dotted buttons on the right side of the Rhythm section.

MAX

MIN

RHYTHM

SEQ.

LATIN

LATIN 8 BEAT 16 BEAT

SEQ. TANGO

SEQ. MARCH WALTZ SWING BOUNCE SLOW

2ROCK

MARCH, Rhythm Menu 1, appears.

<MARCH> ‚⁄

01:March1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Select one of the pages with the Page buttons, and choose a Rhythm

Menu.

<SWING> ‚‹

01:Swing1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

Rhythm and Accompaniment

Select the desired rhythm using the Data Control buttons.

<SWING> ‚‹

07:JazzBallad

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

2) To call up the User rhythms:

You can call up the rhythms created by the other Electone that has Rhythm

Pattern Programming function and those on optional Pattern Disks.

Press Page buttons to select the User page.

<USER RHYTHM> ⁄⁄

01:USER1-A

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

Press to select the User rhythm number and its Type.

<USER RHYTHM> ⁄⁄

04:USER1-D

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Rhythm and Accompaniment

March1 Polka1

Country1 Broadway

Waltz1 Waltz2

J.Waltz1 Bolero

Swing1 Swing2

J.Ballad Dixieland1

Bounce1 Bounce2

Reggae1 Reggae2

SlowRock1 SlowRock2

SlowRock3

Tango1 Tango2

Tango3

ChaCha Rhumba

Beguine Mambo

Samba1 Samba2

Bossa.1 Bossa.2

8Beat1 8Beat2

DancePop1 DancePop2

MARCH

SWING

SLOW ROCK

8 BEAT

WALTZ

BOUNCE

TANGO

LATIN1

LATAN2

16Beat1 16Beat2

Funk1 Funk2

16 BEAT

USER RHYTHM

01:USER1-A

Page Category LCD

01 MARCH

●

01:March1

02:March2

03:March3

●

04:Polka1

05:Polka2

●

06:Country1

07:Country2

●

08:Broadway

09:Baroque

02 WALTZ

●

01:Waltz1

●

02:Waltz2

03:Waltz3

04:Waltz4

05:Waltz5

●

06:JazzWaltz1

07:JazzWaltz2

08:JazzWaltz3

●

09:Bolero

03 SWING

●

01:Swing1

●

02:Swing2

03:Swing3

04:Swing4

05:Swing5

06:Swing6

●

07:JazzBallad

●

08:Dixieland1

09:Dixieland2

04 BOUNCE

●

01:Bounce1

●

02:Bounce2

03:Bounce3

●

04:Reggae1

●

05:Reggae2

Page Category LCD

05 SLOW ROCK

●

01:SlowRock1

●

02:SlowRock2

●

03:SlowRock3

06 TANGO

●

01:Tango1

●

02:Tango2

●

03:Tango3

07 LATIN1

●

01:ChaCha

●

02:Rhumba

●

03:Beguine

●

04:Mambo

05:Salsa

08 LATIN2

●

01:Samba1

●

02:Samba2

03:Samba3

●

04:Bossanova1

●

05:Bossanova2

06:Bossanova3

09 8 BEAT

●

01:8Beat1

●

02:8Beat2

03:8Beat3

04:8Beat4

05:8Beat5

●

06:DancePop1

●

07:DancePop2

08:DancePop3

09:DancePop4

10 16 BEAT

●

01:16Beat1

●

02:16Beat2

03:16Beat3

04:16Beat4

05:16Beat5

●

06:Funk1

●

07:Funk2

08:Funk3

Page Category LCD

USER RHYTHM

01:USER1-A

02:USER1-B

03:USER1-C

04:USER1-D

05:USER2-A

06:USER2-B

07:USER2-C

08:USER2-D

09:USER3-A

10:USER3-B

11:USER3-C

12:USER3-D

13:USER4-A

14:USER4-B

15:USER4-C

16:USER4-D

17:USER5-A

18:USER5-B

19:USER5-C

20:USER5-D

21:USER6-A

22:USER6-B

23:USER6-C

24:USER6-D

25:USER7-A

26:USER7-B

27:USER7-C

28:USER7-D

29:USER8-A

30:USER8-B

31:USER8-C

32:USER8-D

The rhythms not lead by a bullet can be selectable only through the Dotted buttons.

NOTE:

The Baroque on the March page is

configured with accompaniment only; it

does not contain any drum or percussion.

4 Rhythm Menus

This chart lists all 66 of the rhythms available on the Electone.

Rhythm and Accompaniment

5 Automatic Accompaniment -

Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.)

The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the Rhythm section of the

Electone to automatically produce chord and bass accompaniment as you play.

There are three modes to obtain Automatic Accompaniment patterns.

To select the A.B.C. function:

Press the A.B.C./M.O.C. button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.

DISPLAY SELECT

VOICE EFFECT A.B.C.

DISPLAY SET M.O.C.

FOOT REGIST. PITCH TREMOLO

SW. SHIFT MIDI (FAST)

The following display appears.

A.B.C. [PAGE 1]

<ABC> <MEMORY> ⁄

OFF ’L ’P

OFF

SINGLE

FINGERED

CUSTOM

1-1

1-2

1-3

1-4

2-1

2-2

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

1 A.B.C. Type

You can select one of three automatic accompaniment functions here.

Each press of bottom left F Data Control button selects Off, Single

Finger, Fingered Chord and Custom A.B.C., in order. Each press of bottom

left E Data Control button selects in the reversed order.

-1

Off

Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function.

-2

Single Finger

Provides the fastest and easiest means to obtain many different

chord/bass combinations, by simply using one, or at most, two or

three fingers to play the chords.

-3

Fingered Chord

Automatically produces bass and chord accompaniment for chords

played in the Lower keyboard. It allows you to use a wider range of

chord types than in the Single Finger mode. In the Fingered Chord

mode, you play all the notes of the chord while the Auto Bass Chord

function automatically selects the appropriate bass pattern.

-4

Custom A.B.C.

A slight variation on the Fingered Chord mode. It allows you to

determine what bass notes will be played in the accompaniment by

playing a note on the Pedalboard along with the chords you play in

the Lower keyboard.

Rhythm and Accompaniment

2 Memory

When you start a rhythm with this memory function on, A.B.C. automatic

accompaniment keeps playing even after you release your fingers from the

Lower keyboard.

-1

Lower

Use the bottom right E Data Control button to turn on the Lower

keyboard Memory function (Solid box indicates the function is

effective). Selecting this keeps the chord accompaniment of the

Lower Keyboard voices playing even after you release your fingers

from the Lower keyboard.

-2

PEDAL

Use the bottom right F Data Control button to turns on the

Pedalboard Memory function (Solid box indicates the function is

effective). Selecting this keeps the chord accompaniment of the

Pedalboard voices playing even after you release your fingers from

the Lower keyboard.

2) Chords Recognized in the Single Finger Mode

Major, minor, 7th and minor 7th chords can all be played in the Single Finger

mode.

FGABCDE

GAB D E

NOTE:

With Single Finger, the chord produced

will sound in the same octave regardless of

where it is played on the Lower keyboard.

NOTE:

PLAYING SINGLE FINGER CHORDS

WITHOUT RHYTHM:

Auto Bass Chord is generally used with

rhythms to create full rhythmic accompa-

niment, but it can also be used in the

Single Finger mode to add full continuous

chords to your performance without the

use of the rhythm. Simply leave the

rhythm off in Single Finger mode, and

play Single Finger chords from the Lower

keyboard.

NOTE:

If you forget to cancel the Single Finger or

Fingered Chord accompaniment functions,

single notes that you play will be sounded

as continuous chords.

NOTE:

Minor, 7th and minor 7th chords with

black key roots (such as B



or G



) are

played in the same way as those with

white key roots.

(Key of C)

Major chords:

Press the root of the chord (the note that corresponds to the

chord’s name).

Minor chords:

Simultaneously press the root and any one black key to the left

of it.

7th chords:

Simultaneously press the root and any one white key to the left

of it.

Cm7

Minor 7th chords:

Simultaneously press the root as well as any black key and any

white key to the left of it.

Rhythm and Accompaniment

3) Chords Recognized in the Fingered Chord Mode

(Key of C)

C Cm C7 Cm7 Cmaj7

C+5Cm maj7 C7+5 Cdim C7sus4

C-5Cm7-5 C7-5 C6 Cm6

6 Accompaniment Controls

The Accompaniment function described in this section is independent of the

A.B.C. accompaniment. When rhythms are used, A.B.C. provides

rhythmical chords and bass, while the Accompaniment of this section

provides arpeggiated chords and other instrumental embellishments.

This control is selected from the Rhythm Menu and Rhythm Condition

pages.

Press any of the RHYTHM buttons twice.

MAX

MIN

RHYTHM

SEQ.

LATIN

LATIN 8 BEAT 16 BEAT

SEQ. TANGO

SEQ. MARCH WALTZ SWING BOUNCE SLOW

2ROCK

Rhythm Condition page 1 appears.

VOL.: 0 BAL.: 0 ⁄

REV.:12 ’AUTO VARI.

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Rhythm and Accompaniment

Press the Page buttons to select PAGE 2.

ACC.VOL.: 0 ”ON’OFF¤

ACC.REV.:24 TYPE:1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

Rhythm Condition [PAGE 2]

ACC.VOL.: 0 ”ON’OFF¤

ACC.REV.:24 TYPE:1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

1 ACCOMPANIMENT

Determines the volume of the Accompaniment.

Range: 0 - 24

2 On/Off

On/off switches of the Accompaniment function. Use the top right

Data Control buttons to turn on/off the Accompaniment function.

3 ACC. Reverb

Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Accompaniment.

When the panel REVERB control is set to the minimum, the setting

here will have no effect.

Range: 0 - 24

4 Type

Four types of accompaniment are available.

These settings provide various types of rhythmic and melodic

accompaniment, and generally become more complex according to

the type number.

Start the rhythm by pressing START button and play the Lower

keyboard.

An appropriate accompaniment pattern, suited to the current rhythm

and the chord played on the Lower keyboard, will be played

automatically.

NOTE:

Even if the Accompaniment Type is

changed, the Intro/Ending and Fill In

patterns remain the same.

NOTE:

When the Electone is turned on, the

Accompaniment Volume is automatically

set to 0 (factory setting). Be sure to set the

Accompaniment Volume to the appropri-

ate value when using the Accompaniment

function.

Rhythm and Accompaniment

NOTE:

Pressing the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION

button call up the Menu display. You can

select from Preset (LK/PK preset) or User

(one of the eight Users you created). LK

Preset/PK Preset is selected as the

defaults. If not, select the Preset.

7 Preset/User Keyboard

Percussion

The keyboard Percussion function features a total of 120 different drum

and percussion sounds, playable from the keyboards and pedalboard.

The Keyboard Percussion has two different modes, Preset and User. Preset

Keyboard Percussion lets you play 43 different sounds from the Lower

keyboard and Pedalboard, while the User Keyboard Percussion lets you

freely assign the 120 available sounds to any key or pedal you wish.

1) To use the Preset Keyboard Percussion:

Turn off the Lower and/or Pedal voices by setting each voice’s volume

to MIN.

Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the LOWER/1

and/or PEDAL/2 buttons in the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION section

on the left side of the panel.

KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION

LOWER

PEDAL

<KBP1>

”LK PRESET ’USER1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Set the volume.

The volume of the percussion sounds is set together with that of the

rhythm volume.

MAX

MIN

RHYTHM

SEQ.

LATIN

LATIN 8 BEAT 16 BEAT

SEQ. TANGO

SEQ. MARCH WALTZ SWING BOUNCE SLOW

2ROCK

Play some notes on the Lower keyboard and/or Pedalboard. The 43

percussion sounds have been assigned to the keyboards as shown in the

chart below.

Rhythm and Accompaniment

Preset Keyboard Percussion

Preset Percussion Assignments for the Lower Keyboard (43)

Preset Percussion Assignments for the Pedalboard (18)

NOTE:

You can rearrange the key assignments of

the drum and percussion sounds using the

following User Keyboard Percussion

function.

Hand Clap

Agogo High

Agogo Low

Wood Block High

Wood Block Low

Cowbell 1

Triangle Open

Triangle Closed

Snare Drum Roll

Orchestra Snare Drum

Tom 1

Tom 2

Tom 3

Snare Brush Shot 1

Snare Brush Roll

Synth. Tom 1

Synth. Tom 2

Synth. Tom 3

Claves

Shaker

Cuica High

Cuica Low

Bongo High

Bongo Low

Conga High

Conga Low

Timbale 1 High

Timbale 1 Low

Castanet

Tambourine

Orchestra Cymbal 2

Orchestra Cymbal 1

Crash Cymbal 1

Ride Cymbal 1

Hi-hat Open

Hi-hat Closed

Snare Drum Rim 1

Snare Drum Light

Snare Drum Reverb 1

Snare Drum Heavy

Bass Drum Light

Bass Drum Heavy

Concert Bass Drum

Synth. Tom 1

Synth. Tom 2

Synth. Tom 3

Tom 1

Tom 2

Tom 3

Snare Brush Shot 1

Snare Brush Roll

Orchestra Cymbal 1

Crash Cymbal 1

Ride Cymbal 1

Hi-hat Open

Hi-hat Closed

Snare Drum Rim 1

Snare Drum Light

Snare Drum Reverb 1

Snare Drum Heavy

Bass Drum Heavy

Rhythm and Accompaniment

2) To use the User Keyboard Percussion:

A total of 120 different drum and percussion sounds can be assigned to any key

or pedal, and your original setups can be saved to eight memory locations: User

1 through User 8. (For this example, use User1)

Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the LOWER/1

button in the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION section.

<KBP1>

”LK PRESET ’USER1

KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION

LOWER

PEDAL

The Menu display appears on the LCD, and indicates that the LK

(Lower Keyboard) PRESET is currently selected.

The Menu can be selected from LK PRESET and eight Users, USER 1

through USER 8.

When the PEDAL/2 button is used to call up the Menu display:

<KBP2>

”PK PRESET ’USER1

KEYBOARD

PERCUSSION

LOWER

PEDAL

The Menu can be selected from PK (Pedalboard) PRESET and eight

Users, USER 1 through USER 8.

Select User 1 using the bottom right Data Control buttons. This means

that you change the function of the Keyboard Percussion button from

Preset to User. You have selected User 1 for the LOWER/1 button.

When you select one of the Users, a Page number will be added to the

top right side of the display.

<KBP1> [COPY] ⁄

’LK PRESET ”USER1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

NOTE:

User 1 and User 2 contain the LK Preset

data and PK Preset data, respectively, as

the defaults.

Rhythm and Accompaniment

Press the Page buttons to select PAGE 2.

The page 2 allows you to assign the instruments to each key/

pedalboard.

‚⁄CYMBAL [SET] ¤

01:Crash Cym1[CLEAR]

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

1 Group

Lets you select the percussion group you want using the top left

Data Control buttons. The percussion groups are 12, 01 – 12. (Refer

to the User Keyboard Percussion Categories list below.)

2 Instrument Names

The individual instruments are shown in the display and can be

selected with the appropriate Data Control buttons. (Refer to the

User Keyboard Percussion Categories list below.)

3 Set

Assigns the selected instrument to the key you wish. (See the

following explanation in the step #4.)

4 Clear

This function is used to erase User assignment for User 1.

CLEAR works in two ways: either to erase a single instrument, or to

erase all instruments. (See step #5 below.)

NOTE:

Playing back EL-100’s MDR reproduces

the instrument condition set by EL-900/

700/500.

Rhythm and Accompaniment

Category LCD

01 CYMBAL 01:Crash Cym1

02:Crash Cym2

03:CrashCym M

04:Ride Cym1

05:Ride Cym2

06:RideCymCup

07:Orch.Cym1

08:Orch.Cym2

09:Orch.Cym M

10:Cym March

11:Cym BrShot

12:Tam-Tam

02 HI-HAT 01:HH Open

02:HH Close

03:HH Pedal1

04:HH Pedal2

05:AnalogHH O

06:AnalogHH C

03 SNARE DRUM 01:SD Light

02:SD Heavy

03:SD Rim1

04:SD Rim2

05:SD Accent1

06:SD Accent2

07:SD Reverb1

08:SD Reverb2

09:Synth.SD

10:Orch.SD

11:SD Roll

12:Analog SD

04 SNARE BRUSH 01:SD BrShot1

02:SD BrShot2

03:SD BrRoll

05 TOM 01:Tom1

02:Tom2

03:Tom3

04:Tom4

05:TomBrShot1

06:TomBrShot2

07:TomBrShot3

08:TomBrShot4

09:Synth.Tom1

10:Synth.Tom2

11:Synth.Tom3

06 BASS DRUM 01:BD Light

02:BD Heavy

03:BD Attack

04:Synth.BD

05:BD March

06:Concert BD

07:Analog BD1

08:Analog BD2

07 CONGA/BONGO 01:Conga High

02:Conga Low

03:Conga Slap

04:Conga Muff

05:CongaSlide

06:Bongo High

07:Bongo Low

08:Bongo Slap

09:Bongo Mute

Category LCD

08 CUICA/SURDO 01:Cuica High

02:Cuica Med.

03:Cuica Low

04:Tamborim O

05:Tamborim M

06:Surdo Open

07:Surdo Mute

08:Surdo Rim

09:Surdo Muff

09 TIMBALE/COW 01:Timbale1 H

02:Timbale1 L

03:Timbale2 H

04:Timbale2 L

05:Timbale3 H

06:Timbale3 L

07:Timbale4 H

08:Timbale 4 L

09:Cowbell1

10:Cowbell2

11:Cowbell3

12:Cowbell4

10 PERCUSSION1 01:Cabasa

02:Shaker

03:Maracas H

04:Maracas L

05:GuiroShort

06:Guiro Long

07:Wood High

08:Wood Med.

09:Wood Low

10:Claves

11:Castanet

12:Vibraslap

11 PERCUSSION2 01:Agogo High

02:Agogo Low

03:Triangle O

04:Triangle C

05:Windbell1

06:Windbell2

07:Tambourine

08:Pandeiro

09:Bell

10:Hand Claps

11:Fingersnap

12:Scratch

13:Noise Per.

12 PERCUSSION3 01:Kotsuzumi1

02:Kotsuzumi2

03:Kotsuzumi3

04:Kotsuzumi4

05:Ohtsuzumi1

06:Ohtsuzumi2

07:Taiko1

08:Taiko2

09:Ohdaiko1

10:Ohdaiko2

11:Kakegoe1

12:Kakegoe2

13:Kakegoe3

User Keyboard Percussion Categories

Rhythm and Accompaniment

To assign an instrument to a particular key or pedal:

Simultaneously hold down the Data Control button corresponding to

[Set] and press the key (or pedal) to which the instrument is to be

assigned. The currently displayed instrument will be assigned to the

key you press down as a part of User 1.

‚ﬂBASS DRUM [SET] ¤

02:BD Heavy [CLEAR]

Upper Keyboard

Lower Keyboard

Pedalboard

DATA CONTROL

Continue the operation above to build up your own User Keyboard

Percussion set.

If you want, you can erase the instrument assignment.

To erase one instrument:

Simultaneously hold down the Data Control button corresponding to

CLEAR and press the key (or pedal) corresponding to the instrument

you wish to erase.

(A short ‘beep’ sound indicates that the instrument has been erased.)

To erase all instruments:

1. Press, then release the Data Control button corresponding to

CLEAR. The following display appears, prompting confirmation of

the operation.

≥ Assign All Clear?≥

≥ [CLEAR] [CANCEL]≥

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

2. Press any of the bottom left Data Control buttons (corresponding to

[Clear] in the display) to erase all data. When [Clear] is selected, a

‘Completed’ message momentarily appears on the display.

Press any of the bottom right Data Control buttons (corresponding

to [Cancel] in the display) to abort the operation.

NOTE:

Though eight User Keyboard Percussion

setups can be created, they cannot be

memorized to Registration Memory. Only

on/off data and the Keyboard Percussion

Menu are memorized to Registration

Memory.

NOTE:

Two User Keyboard Percussions currently

selected by LOWER/1 and PEDAL/2 are

playable if both buttons are on.

Rhythm and Accompaniment

3) Other User Keyboard Percussion Functions

Additional operations in the User mode include copying of Lower/Pedal Preset

Keyboard Percussion to one of the Users, and copying from one User location to

another.

To copy the Lower Preset Keyboard Percussion to one

of the Users:

The following operation allows you to copy the Lower Preset Keyboard

Percussion to one of the Users. The copy operation is convenient for

creating a slight modification from the Preset.

1. Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the LOWER/

1 button in the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION section.

2. Select the User number to which you want to copy using the bottom

right Data Control buttons.

<KBP1> [COPY] ⁄

’LK PRESET ”USER1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

3. Press the top right Data Control buttons to select Copy function.

<KBP1> [COPY] ⁄

’LK PRESET ”USER1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

The following display appears:

≥ ÚÆPRESET Copy? ≥

≥ [COPY] [CANCEL]≥

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

4. Press top left Data Control buttons to select the copy source (in this

case, Lower Preset Keyboard Percussion).

≥ ÚÆPRESET Copy? ≥

≥ [COPY] [CANCEL]≥

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Rhythm and Accompaniment

5. Press any of the bottom left Data Control buttons (corresponding to

[Copy] in the display) to copy the data. When [Copy] is selected, a

‘Completed’ message momentarily appears on the display.

Press any of the bottom right Data Control buttons (corresponding

to [Cancel] in the display) to abort the operation.

≥ PRESET Copy ≥

≥ Completed!! ≥

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

The Pedal Preset Keyboard Percussion (PK PRESET) can be copied

in the same way.

<KBP2>

”PK PRESET ’USER1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

To copy from one User location to another:

1. Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the LOWER/

1 (or PEDAL/2) button in the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION section.

2. Select the User number to which you want to copy using the bottom

right Data Control buttons.

<KBP1> [COPY] ⁄

’LK PRESET ”USER3

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

3. Press the top right Data Control buttons to select Copy function.

<KBP1> [COPY] ⁄

’LK PRESET ”USER3

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

The following display appears:

≥ ÚÆUSER1 Copy? ≥

≥ [COPY] [CANCEL]≥

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Rhythm and Accompaniment

4. Select the User number from which you want to copy using the top

left Data Control buttons.

≥ ÚÆUSER1 Copy? ≥

≥ [COPY] [CANCEL]≥

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

In this case, the destination User number will not be displayed as

the source number, or selectable on the display.

5. Press any of the bottom left Data Control buttons (corresponding to

[Copy] in the display) to copy the data. When [Copy] is selected, a

‘Completed’ message momentarily appears on the display.

Press any of the bottom right Data Control buttons (corresponding

to [Cancel] in the display) to abort the operation.

≥ USER1 Copy ≥

≥ Completed!! ≥

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

8 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.)

The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically adds a harmony

part to the melodies you play on the Upper keyboard. The harmony is

derived from the chords you play on the Lower keyboard – or from the

chords that are played for you, if you use Automatic Accompaniment.

Melody On Chord has three different modes, each providing a different set

of harmonies to accompany the melody played.

To display the M.O.C. function, press A.B.C./M.O.C. button in the DISPLAY

SELECT and then select the Page 2.

DISPLAY SELECT

VOICE EFFECT A.B.C.

DISPLAY SET M.O.C.

FOOT REGIST. PITCH TREMOLO

SW. SHIFT MIDI (FAST)

Rhythm and Accompaniment

M.O.C. [PAGE 2]

<MOC> ¤

MODE:OFF

OFF

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

1 Mode

You can select one of three automatic accompaniment functions here.

Each press of bottom left F Data Control button selects Off, 1, 2 and 3, in

order. Each press of bottom left E Data Control button selects in the

reversed order.

2 Off

Cancels the Melody On Chord function.

3 1

Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range close to the melody

played.

4 2

Produces harmonies of up to three notes in a range close to the melody

played.

5 3

Produces harmonies of up to four notes in a range relatively distant from the

melody played.

NOTE:

Melody On Chord applies only when the

Upper keyboard voice section’s volume is

set to the appropriate value.

Rhythm and Accompaniment

About the Rhythm Sequence

Rhythm Sequence is built up with various different rhythm patterns, and

can be programmed by the other Electone such as EL-900.

The EL-100 doesn’t have Rhythm Sequence function, but it can read and

load the rhythm sequence data recorded on the MDR (a floppy disk) to its

four SEQ buttons in the Rhythm section and play back them, as follows:

1. Insert the floppy disk containing rhythm sequence data into the EL-100’

s MDR slot. The rhythm sequence data is recorded as a part of

registration data (explained on page 78).

2. Select the song number containing the registration data and press PLAY

button on the MDR to load the data. The rhythm sequence data has been

loaded to the Electone, or SEQ button(s).

3. Press the desired SEQ button. The SEQ button’s lamp will be lit.

MAX

MIN

RHYTHM

SEQ.

LATIN

LATIN 8 BEAT 16 BEAT

SEQ. TANGO

SEQ. MARCH WALTZ SWING BOUNCE SLOW

2ROCK

NOTE:

You can have up to all four rhythm

sequences play back automatically by

pressing the SEQ buttons.

4. Turn the START button on and play the rhythm sequence(s).

INTRO.

ENDING

RHYTHM

START

SYNCHRO

FILL IN

During the rhythm sequence playback, the rhythm name currently

played back is displayed on the LCD.

NOTE:

Four types of metronome sounds,

simple metronome, two four, three four

and four four, are assigned to the SEQ 1

– 4 buttons, respectively, as the

defaults.

NOTE:

As soon as you load the sequence data

using MDR, the default settings on each

SEQ button, four types of metronome

sounds, will be overwritten, or lost.

Turning the power off resets the

Electone to the defaults.

Also, pressing any of the BASIC

REGIST. buttons generates a short beep

sound and retrieves the metronome

sounds.

Registration Memory

5 Registration Memory

Registration Memory allows you to store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and LCD, providing a

convenient way to instantly change all voice settings and rhythms while you’re playing, with the simple touch of

a single button on the Registration Memory panel.

REGISTRATION MEMORY

12345678 D.

/TO DISK

Functions and settings that cannot be memorized are:

● Reverb type

● Pan, Reverb, Tune and Volume settings for the

instruments (Drum and percussion sounds)

●

User Keyboard Percussion settings (except for User

numbers currently assigned to the Lower/Pedal buttons)

● Registration Shift settings

● Pitch/Transpose settings

● User rhythm patterns in a Pattern Disk (except for

User rhythm numbers currently assigned to the

Dotted buttons)

● Rhythm Sequence

● MIDI settings

1 Storing Registrations

Newly created registrations you make can be stored to the Registration

Memory panel buttons. All registrations in Registration Memory can also

be saved to floppy disk for future recall.

After creating your original registration, decide which numbered button

you wish to store.

While holding down the M (Memory) button in the Registration

Memory section, press the numbered button to which you wish to save

your registration.

REGISTRATION MEMORY

12345678 D.

/TO DISK

1. While holding down M button.. 2. ...Press desired numbered button.

When the registration is stored, the lamp above the numbered button

flashes momentarily.

NOTE:

Although the number of the Registration

Memory buttons of EL-100 are limited to

eight, from Registration Memory 1

through Registration Memory 8, the

Registration Memory 9 through Registra-

tion Memory 16 can be accessible when

using MDR playback and Registration

Shift functions.

Be careful when turning off the power,

since it erases all your existing data.

Always save your important data to a

floppy disk using M.D.R. (page 68) in

advance.

When turned on, various types of basic registrations are preset on the

numbered buttons from 1 through 8.

No. Name

1Marching Band

2 Polka

38 Beat Ballad

4 Strings Waltz

No. Name

5 Latin

62 Beat

7Organ Ballad

8Dance Pop

When you record your registration setting to one of the numbered buttons, the

preset registration on that button will be overwritten and erased as a result.

NOTE:

When you turn off the Electone, your own

registration setting(s) will be reset to the

default, or erased. Turning the Electone

back to on restores the preset registration

settings (the defaults).

If you want to keep your own registration

settings, you need to record them onto a

floppy disk before turning the Electone

off. Refer to page 68 for details on saving

registration data to disk.

Registration Memory

<SONG NAME> ⁄

01:

2 Selecting Registrations

Simply press the numbered button that corresponds to the registration you

wish to select.

NOTE:

The settings, can be disabled, are:

■ Current rhythm pattern

■ Rhythm Condition

■ Tempo

■ A.B.C./M.O.C. settings

3 Saving the Registration Data

to Disk

Insert a formatted disk into the disk slot under the Music Disk Recorder

(M.D.R.). Make certain that the disk is either blank or has data you can

erase. If the disk is new and unformatted, you will have to format it.

Refer to the instructions how to format a disk (page 75).

NOTE:

See pages 82 and 83 for the details on

saving/recalling registrations to/from the

M.D.R.

Select a song number on the M.D.R. using the SONG SELECT buttons.

You can also select a song number shown on the display using the

appropriate Data Control button and (if necessary) using Page buttons

to display the appropriate page. A song name is displayed next to the

song number that already contains data.

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM

SONG DEL.

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

NOTE:

Song name may not be displayed

depending on the Electone model created

the data.

There are 40 songs (ten song numbers on the four pages), or memory

locations, available on a single disk.

NOTE:

Although the number of registration memory

locations is limited to eight, from 1 through

8, the registrations assigned in the memory

locations from 9 through 16 of an upper

model are accessible using the following

method. To select the number between the

registration memory 9 and 16, press one of

the eight registration memory buttons while

holding down the VOICE DISPLAY button

in the DISPLAY SELECT section (in this

case, the buttons 1 through 8 correspond to

the buttons 9 through 16, respectively). Any

of the numbered button lamps is not lit while

the registration between 9 and 16 is selected.

Using the D (Disable) button:

Rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns also change when you

select different Registration Memory buttons. Pressing the D (Disable)

button allows you to keep the same rhythm and accompaniment patterns

throughout all your registration changes, or make your own rhythm

selections if you want to.

REGISTRATION MEMORY

12345678 D.

/TO DISK

Registration Memory

While holding down the RECORD button on the M.D.R., press the M

(Memory) button in Registration Memory.

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM

SONG DEL.

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

REGISTRATION MEMORY

12345678 D.

/TO DISK

This operation saves all eight registrations in Registration Memory to one song.

The other 39 available songs on the disk can be used for saving additional

batches of 8 registrations.

4 Registration Shift

The Registration Shift function allows you to change registrations, all the

settings you make on the panel and LCD, without taking your hands from

the keyboards. Using the Right Footswitch on the Expression Pedal, you

can “jump” to a specified registration or step through the panel

registrations in sequence, either in numeric order or in any order you

specify.

Press the REGIST. SHIFT button in the DISPLAY SELECT section. REGIST.

SHIFT page will be displayed.

DISPLAY SELECT

VOICE EFFECT A.B.C.

DISPLAY SET M.O.C.

FOOT REGIST. PITCH TREMOLO

SW. SHIFT MIDI (FAST)

REGIST SHIFT Page

Select one of the modes using the bottom left Data Control buttons.

Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User.

<R.SHIFT>

MODE:OFF

OFF

SHIFT

JUMP

USER

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Registration Memory

1 Off

Turns off the Registration Shift assignment.

<R.SHIFT>

MODE:OFF

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

2 Shift

Selects the Shift mode. In the Shift mode, each press of the Right Footswitch

selects the Registration Memory presets in their numerical order. The

numbered buttons light up as they are selected.

<R.SHIFT>

MODE:SHIFT 1˘ 2

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

NOTE:

• Although the number of the Registration

Memory buttons of EL-100 is limited to

eight, from Registration Memory 1

through Registration Memory 8, you can

select the other eight Registration

Memory numbers, the Registration

Memory 9 through Registration Memory

16.

• After the last preset is reached, the

function “wraps around” to select the

first preset again.

• The current registration number and the

number next to it will be displayed.

3 Jump

Selects the Jump mode. In the Jump mode, each press of the Right

Footswitch selects a specified panel registration.

■ To set the Jump mode:

1. When you select the Jump mode, one of the registration numbers

will be displayed at the right side of the display.

<R.SHIFT>

MODE:JUMP REGIST: 1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

2. Select the registration number to which you want to jump using the

bottom right Data Control buttons. Each press of the bottom right

Data Control buttons selects next number.

3. Pressing the Right Footswitch jumps to select the designated panel

registration.

NOTE:

Although the number of the Registration

Memory buttons of EL-100 are limited to

eight, from Registration Memory 1

through Registration Memory 8, you can

select the other eight Registration Memory

numbers, the Registration Memory 9

through Registration Memory 16.

Registration Memory

4 User

Selects the User mode. In the User mode, each press of the Right Footswitch

selects registrations according to the order you specify.

1. When you select the User mode, the Shift End selector function,

how the Registration Shift function acts when it reaches to the end,

will be added to the right side of the display. Also, page number

will be shown at the top right side.

<R.SHIFT> <S.END> ⁄

MODE:USER STOP

STOP

TOP

NEXT SONG

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

2. Select the Shift End type using the bottom right Data Control

buttons. The following three types are available:

Stop: Selects the last registration and quits the operation.

Top: After reaching the last preset, then selects the first preset again

and repeats the operation.

Next Song: After reaching the last preset, then automatically calls

up the registration data of the next song. This function is handy for

you to play a song containing more than 16 registrations.

Recording the songs onto the M.D.R. using this function allows you

to play back them successively.

NOTE:

Always press the PLAY button to start the

songs and activate the Next Song function

on the M.D.R. The CUSTOM PLAY

button will not cause to activate the Next

Song function.

NOTE:

Using the Next Song function will not read

the User rhythm patterns/sequences while

playing back a rhythm.

3. Press the Page buttons to select Page 2. The following display

appears. You can edit the registration shift settings of your own

here.

<R.SHIFT>[INS][DEL]¤

1¯?????????????????

Cursor

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

1-1 1-4 2-1 2-2

1-2 1-3 1-2 1-3

1 POSITION (Cursor Controls)

-1

Moves the cursor to the first position.

-2

Moves the cursor one step to the left.

-3

Moves the cursor one step to the right.

-4

Moves the cursor to the last position.

NOTE:

The cursor cannot be moved unless

registration numbers have been entered.

NOTE:

The registration to which the cursor is

currently positioned is set on the Electone.

However, moving the cursor cannot

activate the Shift End function.

NOTE:

Up to 80 steps can be memorized.

Although the number of registrations

shown in the display at a time is limited,

the display scrolls to the right to show the

currently entered registration number as

you enter them.

NOTE:

The Shift End mark will automatically be

put at the end of the registrations you

entered.

NEXT SONG

TOP

Registration Memory

2 Data (Data Controls)

The pair of the top right Data Control buttons is used to enter or

delete registration numbers in the registration row. Move the cursor

to the desired position and edit the registration data.

-1

[INS] Insert

For initially entering a registration or inserting a registration

number just before the current cursor position.

First, move the cursor to the position at which you want to

insert. Then press the desired Registration Memory button

(the lamp above the selected button will light), and press the

Data Control button corresponding to INS. The new

registration number is inserted at the cursor position and all

other numbers to the right of the cursor are moved to

accommodate the new number.

-2

[DEL] Delete

For deleting a registration number at the current cursor

position. To delete the unnecessary number, move the cursor

to a numbered position and press the Data Control button

corresponding to DEL.

Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the

Registration Shift function’s capacity of 80. END will

automatically be placed at the end of the registration shift

setting. The following message momentarily appears when

the 80 spaces have been filled: First delete unnecessary

registrations, then perform the operation again.

≥ Data Full! ≥

≥ ≥

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Music Disk Recorder

6 Music Disk Recorder (M.D.R.)

The Music Disk Recorder (M.D.R.) lets you store the registration data and load back to the Electone as well as

record your performance and play back the data. Moreover, the M.D.R. allows you to execute song copy

operation and play back commercially available XG song data.

1 Precautions on M.D.R.

Follow the important precautions below.

Compatible Disk Type

3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used.

Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks

■ To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive:

Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing

upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward,

towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the

slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into

place and the eject button pops out.

Floppy disk slot

LED (Lamp in-use) Eject button

NOTE:

When the EL-100 is turned on, the LED below the floppy disk

slot will be lit indicating that the M.D.R. is ready to use.

To eject a floppy disk:

Be sure to confirm that the lamp of STOP

button on M.D.R. is turned off before ejecting a

floppy disk from the slot. Never eject the

floppy disk before the STOP lamp lights up.

Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go;

the disk will automatically pop out. When the

disk is fully ejected, carefully remove it by

hand.

Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the

power off during recording, reading and

playing back. Doing so can damage the disk

and possibly the disk drive.

If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it

is not pressed in as far as it will go, the disk

may not eject properly. The eject button may

become stuck in a half-pressed position with the

disk extending from the drive slot by only a few

millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to

pull out the partially ejected disk, since using

force in this situation can damage the disk drive

mechanism or the floppy disk.

To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing

the eject button once again, or push the disk

back into the slot and then repeat the eject

procedure.

Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the

disk drive before turning off the power. A

floppy disk left in the drive for extended

periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that

can cause data read and write errors.

Music Disk Recorder

Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head

● This instrument employs a precision read/write

magnetic head. The magnetic head will pick up a

layer of magnetic particles from the disks for an

extended period of time. The stained magnetic head

will eventually cause read and write errors.

● To maintain the disk drive in optimum working

order Yamaha recommends that you use a commer-

cially available dry-type head-cleaning disk to clean

the head about once a month.

NOTE:

Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper head-

cleaning disk.

About the Floppy Disks

■ To handle floppy disks with care:

Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or

apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always

keep floppy disks in their protective cases when

they are not in use.

Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight,

extremely high or low temperatures, or exces-

sive humidity, dust or liquids.

Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the

exposed surface of the floppy disk inside.

Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such

as those produced by televisions, speakers,

motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially

or completely erase data on the disk, rendering

it unreadable.

Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter

or housing.

Do not attach anything other than the provided

labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that

labels are attached in the proper location.

■ To protect your data (Write-protect Tab):

To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide

the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position

(tab open).If you attempt to modify the disk when

the write-protect tab is set to “on” position, “Prot

(Protected)” will appear on the LED display in the

M.D.R. section indicating that the operation is not

possible.

Also please check if the write-protect tab is set to

“off” position when you record data.

Protect Off

(tab closed: unlocked)

Protect On

(tab open: locked)

Rear side

Shutter

Write-protect tab

■ Data backup

Yamaha recommends that you keep two copies of

important data on separate floppy disks by using this

function. To make a backup disk use the Disk Copy

function on page 92.

Improved Potentiality of the M.D.R.

The M.D.R. of the EL-100 begins reading all data

as soon as you insert a disk into the floppy disk slot.

Thus, inserting a disk causes to produce a sound

(reading sound) indicating that the M.D.R. is in the

reading process.

The improvement of the M.D.R. allows you to start

song playback immediately, to be free from the

reading sound during playback and to record the

song playback using the several song numbers with

the Next Song function.

NOTE:

Ejecting the disk will lose the data loaded from the disk except

for the currently selected and played back song.

NOTE:

The time reading sound is produced is in proportion to the

amount of data recorded in the disk. You can eject the disk

whenever you are not using the M.D.R. and don’t want to be

bothered with the reading sound.

Music Disk Recorder

DEL.

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONGTO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

2 Formatting a Disk

Before recording, the disk must first be formatted.

Put the disk, label facing up, into the disk drive (floppy disk slot).

“Fort” will appear on the LED display indicating that the

inserted disk requires to be formatted.

While holding down the SHIFT button, press the FORMAT

button.

This step puts the format operation on stand-by, indicated by the

dashes on the LED display and the flashing LED (lamp) above

the FORMAT button.

Press the FORMAT button again to begin formatting.

Formatting is engaged and the LED above the FORMAT button

stays lit.

The number “160” appears on the LED display and counts down

to “001” as the disk is being formatted. When formatting is

completed, operation returns to the original STOP status.

The following Song Name display appears after the operation.

<SONG NAME> ⁄

01:

The song number can be selected using SONG SELECT button

or the Data Control buttons on the bottom row. Up to 10 song

numbers can be selectable in a single page. The page numbers,

from 1 through 4, are also shown at the top right side of the

display. A total of 40 song locations are created. The song

names next to each song number are left blank and indicate that

each song number doesn’t contain any data.

Formatting a disk erases all the data in the disk and

makes it ready to record. The erased data by

formatting will be lost permanently. Check if the

disk contains your important data, or not, before

executing the operation.

About SHIFT Button

You will find the SHIFT button (printed in green) at the top right

side of the M.D.R. section. Some buttons in the M.D.R. section have

dual functions: the first function is printed in white above each

button; the second function is printed in green below each button.

The SHIFT button is used to select the second functions by pressing

each function button while holding down the SHIFT.

Music Disk Recorder

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

NOTE:

The song numbers 01 through 40 are available and

up to 40 songs can be stored on a disk. However,

available song numbers may be reduced depending

on the amount of the song data you have recorded.

See page 94 for the information about the total

amount of memory left on a floppy disk.

Press the RECORD button.

The RECORD lamp lights up and the PLAY and CUSTOM

PLAY lamps begins blinking, indicating that the Music Disk

Recorder is ready to record.

NOTE:

If the selected song number already contains

recorded data, small bars (“--”) appear at the left

part of LED display and flash along with the song

number, warning you that the selected song number

already contains recorded data. If you want to

execute recording operation over the song number,

press the RECORD button again. If you don’t

want, select another song number for recording or

press the STOP button to cancel recording.

Press the PLAY button.

The PLAY lamp lights up and small bars flash across the LED

display from left to right. This indicates M.D.R. is reading the

registrations and other settings.

3 Recording

1) To record a song:

Set the desired registrations on the Electone. Make all the

Electone settings necessary for the song you will record. This

means entering the all registrations you will need for the entire

performance in the Registration Memory. Make sure also to

select the registration that you will use at the beginning of the

song.

Put a formatted disk into the disk slot.

Use the SONG SELECT (G, H) buttons to select the song

number for recording. You can also select the song number by

pressing the Data Control buttons.

<SONG NAME> ⁄

01:

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Music Disk Recorder

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

After numbers appear on the LED display of the M.D.R., begin

playing.

Once the setup operation in step #5 is complete, a number will

appear on the LED display indicating that you can begin

recording your performance. The number also indicates the

amount of memory left on the disk.

NOTE:

The short time it takes to set up for recording is

recorded as well, causing a short pause before

playback of the song.

If you make a mistake during recording:

1. Press the PLAY button while the M.D.R. is still running.

This stops the recording and returns you to the starting point of

the song.

The letters “rE” (retry) appear on the left side of the LED display

and the PLAY and CUSTOM PLAY LEDs start flashing,

indicating that you can re-record the song.

2. Press PLAY again to begin re-recording the song.

Re-recording starts from the beginning of the song and replaces

the previously recorded performance with the newly recorded

performance.

When you finish playing, press the STOP button.

After the small bars flash to draw a square on the LED to

indicate the processing for stop, the STOP lamp lights up,

indicating the recording process is finished.

The song number will be displayed on the LCD display,

indicating that the number contains recorded data.

<SONG NAME> ⁄

01:SONG 1

Never eject the floppy disk before the STOP lamp

lights up.

NOTE:

When the available memory reaches “008” or less,

the numbers begin flashing to warn you. If this

happens, stop recording before the display reaches

“000.”

To hear your newly recorded performance, press the PLAY

button.

Play back will begin after a couple of seconds. For more

information on playback and other playback-related functions,

see page 84.

Never attempt to press the eject button or turn

the power off during recording, reading and

playing back. Doing so can damage the disk

and possibly the disk drive. Be sure to

remove the floppy disk from the disk drive

before turning off the power.

Indicates the M.D.R. is in the stop process.

Music Disk Recorder

Outline of M.D.R. Operation

Though the M.D.R. is as easy to operate as a cassette tape recorder, it is far move versatile. Since it records all

Electone settings and control movements as well as the notes you play as digital data, it allows you much more

flexibility and control than even the most sophisticated tape recorder. Basically, the M.D.R. independently

records the following three types of data:

Registration data (including Bulk data)

All registrations stored to the Registration Memory numbered buttons as well as the registration currently set to

the panel, are recorded at the beginning of a song, before the actual recording of your performance. Bulk data is

also saved to the song with the Registration data. Bulk data includes: Registration Shift settings, and Rhythm

Pattern (User rhythms) and Rhythm Sequence data.

Performance data

The M.D.R. records your performance on the keyboards and pedalboard of the Electone exactly as you play it,

even recording the strength at which you play the keys and how hard you press them down while playing. The

various types of performance data – Upper, Lower, Pedal and Lead – are recorded to independent “tracks,” so that

you can change any one of them without affecting the others.

Control data

All changes you make on the Electone during your performance are recorded in real time. These include

registration changes, the use of the expression pedals and footswitches.

Music Disk Recorder

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

2) To record each part separately:

You can also record the parts of your performance independently; for

example, first recording the chords and bass to the song (using the Lower

and Pedalboard), and after that recording the melody (using the Upper

Keyboard). This function also lets you record the lead voice, keyboard

percussion and performance control data, such as registration changes

and expression pedal operation, separately from the other parts of the

song.

Set up the M.D.R. for recording, as you did in the section above.

The first steps in recording parts separately are the same as for

normal recording on page 76:

1. Memorize all the registrations needed for your performance

to the Registration Memory numbered buttons, and set the

registration that will be used at the beginning of the song.

2. Insert a formatted disk.

3. Select the song number to which you will record your

performance.

4. Press the RECORD button to make the Music Disk Recorder

ready to record.

Select the parts for recording.

Pressing the RECORD in the procedure 1-4. above turns on the

all parts’ LEDs in the upper left row indicating that each part is

ready to record.

Press the RECORD buttons for each part in the upper left row to

turn off the parts you don’t want to record. For this example,

press RECORD/UPPER, the PLAY/UPPER lamp in the upper

right row lights up.

■ RECORD/UPPER

Records the performance data of the Upper keyboard when

turned on. Recording is cancelled when turned off.

■ RECORD/LOWER

Records the performance data of the Lower keyboard when

turned on. Recording is cancelled when turned off.

■ RECORD/PEDAL

Records the performance data of the Pedalboard when turned

on. Recording is cancelled when turned off.

■ RECORD/CONTROL

Records the control data when turned on. Recording is

cancelled when turned off.

(See Outline of M.D.R. Operation on the previous page.)

This example operation disables recording of the Upper part.

Music Disk Recorder

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

(

LEAD

)

REM.MEM.

(

K.PERC.

) (

LEAD

) (

K.PERC.

)

RECORD PLAY

SHIFT

PA USE

Separate recording for Lead Voice and/or Keyboard Percussion parts:

The Lead voice and the Keyboard Percussion can be recorded/played

back separately although they are not shown on the M.D.R. panel.

Separate recording for Lead Voice and/or Keyboard

Percussion parts:

Hold down the SHIFT button and simultaneously press the

appropriate button in the top row in the procedure #2 above. The

two buttons (indicated in the illustration at the right) function as

Lead Voice and Keyboard Percussion selectors in the record mode.

■ RECORD/LEAD

Records the performance data of the Lead voice when turned on.

Recording is cancelled when turned off.

■ RECORD/K.PERC.

Records the performance data of the Keyboard Percussion when

turned on. Recording is cancelled when turned off. Keyboard

percussion can be recorded/played back independently from

rhythm section.

NOTE:

If you don’t record the Lead Voice and Keyboard

Percussion parts separately, the Lead part will be

recorded as the Upper data and the Keyboard

Percussion part will be recorded as the Lower/

Pedal data.

Press the PLAY button, and start playing after numbers appear

in the display. For this example, play the lower keyboard and

pedalboard.

Press the STOP button when you are finished with your per-

formance to stop recording.

Now that you’ve recorded the first parts of your performance.

Press the RECORD button to set up recording of the next part,

Upper part in this case.

Press the RECORD button.

In this case, the song (number) contains the performance data of

the Lower and Pedal in addition to the registration and setup

data. The small bars (“--”) appear at the left part of LED display

and flash along with the song number, warning you that the

selected song number already contains recorded data.

Press the RECORD button again to record another part (Upper

part).

The RECORD lamp lights up and the PLAY and CUSTOM

PLAY lamps begins blinking, indicating that the Music Disk

Recorder is ready to record.

Press the RECORD buttons for each part in the upper left row to

turn off the parts you have already recorded.

In this case, press RECORD/LOWER, RECORD/PEDAL and

RECORD/CONTROL to turn them off.

Music Disk Recorder

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

Press the CUSTOM PLAY button to start recording of the new

part or parts (Upper part).

Playback of the previously recorded parts starts immediately.

The CUSTOM PLAY button is used here to record only the

parts that have been selected for recording, and play back only

those parts that have been selected for playback. While you

listen to the parts being played back, start playing the melody on

the Upper keyboard.

Since registration data has already been recorded with the first

parts of the song, recording begins immediately.

When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback

is automatically stopped and the STOP status is resumed.

NOTE:

The CUSTOM PLAY button is used to record or

play back the parts and data other than the

registration data.

NOTE:

The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot

exceed the length of the previously recorded parts.

If you want to change the song length, first delete

the existing song (see Song Delete on page 92) and

record again.

Punch-in Recording

You can retry to change specified measure(s) or a specific part you

don’t want to use.

1. Press the PLAY button to start playback of the song containing

the part you want to change.

2. Press the PAUSE button at the point you want to execute punch-

in recording. The current song is stopped momentarily.

3. Press the RECORD button. The PLAY and CUSTOM PLAY

lamps begins blinking, indicating that the Music Disk Recorder is

ready to record.

4. Press the RECORD buttons for each part in the upper left row to

turn off the parts you want to keep as they are. (Only the part you

want to do punch-in recording should be turned on.)

5. Press the PLAY button to start punch-in recording. Play the

specified range you want to change.

6. Press the STOP button to quit the Punch-in recording function as

soon as you reach the end of the range.

Music Disk Recorder

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM

SONG DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

REGISTRATION MEMORY

123456

/TO DISK

1. While holding down the RECORD button...

2. Press the M./TO DISK (Memory) button.

4 Recording Registrations

(and Bulk Data)

You can also record registrations by themselves, without recording a

performance. Bulk data, including Registration Memory,

Registration Shift settings, Rhythm Pattern (User rhythms), and

Rhythm Sequence data, are also saved in the operation. There are

two ways to record the registrations and bulk data:

[1]

On the Electone, set the registrations and all other data you want

to record.

Select the song number to which you wish to record the registra-

tions.

While holding down the RECORD button, press the M./TO

DISK (Memory) button on the Registration Memory panel.

Small bars flash across the LED display from left to right,

indicating that the M.D.R. is reading the registrations and other

settings. After recording, the M.D.R. is automatically stopped

and returns to STOP status.

[2]

Set up the registrations and select the song number as you did in

steps #1 and #2 above.

Press the RECORD button to make the M.D.R. ready to record.

Press the PLAY button to record the registrations, then press the

STOP button as soon as you see the small bars flash across the

LED display from left to right.

This is the same procedure as the one when you start recording.

The small bars that flash across the display indicate that the

M.D.R. is recording the registrations and being set up for normal

recording; pressing the STOP button interrupts this process.

Music Disk Recorder

5 Recalling Recorded

Registrations (and Bulk Data)

The registrations (and bulk data) recorded to song numbers in the

above operation can be loaded back to the Electone by simply

selecting the appropriate song number and pressing the PLAY

button. When the operation has been completed, the M.D.R. returns

to STOP status.

Insert the disk and select the song number you want to load back

to the Eelectone.

Press the PLAY button.

Using More Than 8 Registrations

The M.D.R. makes it possible to use more than 8 registrations (8

Registration Memory locations) in a performance, — without having

to alter the current panel settings. A disk can accommodate 40 song

numbers and each song number can contain 8 registrations.

To play a performance using more than 16 different

registrations:

1. First record the registrations you need into several song numbers

on the M.D.R. before the performance. (You should also try to

record them in the order that you’ll use them, if possible.)

2. During the performance, after all 8 registrations from a certain

song number have been used, select the next song number and

press the PLAY button on the M.D.R. This replaces all 8

registrations in Registration Memory with the new ones from the

selected song number.

3. By repeating the above steps, you can run through an entire

performance without having to change the panel settings.

NOTE:

Selecting the Next Song in the User Registration

Shift settings makes it possible to have the M.D.R.

automatically read the 8 registrations in the next

song number. See page 71 for more information.

6 Replacing Registrations

The M.D.R. also lets you change the registrations of an existing song

without changing the performance data. The procedure is the same

as that of Recording Registrations mentioned in the previous page.

Music Disk Recorder

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

If you have recorded the Lead Voice/Keyboard

Percussion part separately:

On the EL-100 the Lead/Keyboard Percussion part(s) you have

recorded separately will automatically set to on when you start

playback.

NOTE:

When you play back the data made with other

Electone models such as EL-90/87 and which

includes the separately recorded Lead/Keyboard

Percussion part(s), Lead part will be off and

Keyboard Percussion will be on as the defaults.

(To turn on the Lead part, press PLAY/UPPER

while holding down the SHIFT.)

2) To play back the selected part(s):

You can also play back the selected parts of your recorded performance,

while other parts are temporarily turned off. This function is especially

useful for playing a single part, such as the melody, over previously

recorded accompaniment parts.

Select the number of the song to be played back.

Set the parts you wish to mute to off, by pressing the appropriate

PLAY button in the upper right row. The LED of the selected

part should be off.

Make sure to turn on the parts you wish to play back.

7 Playback

You can play back your recorded performance by simply pressing

the PLAY button. Registrations and other data will be recalled to the

Electone.

1) To play back a song:

Select the number of the song you want to play back by using

the SONG SELECT buttons. You can also select the song

number by pressing the appropriate Data Control buttons.

<SONG NAME> ⁄

03:SONG 3

Press the PLAY button to begin playback of the song.

The PLAY lamp lights up and small bars move across the

display, indicating that the M.D.R. is resetting registrations on

the Electone.

Playback starts automatically after reading the song data. The

elapsed time will be displayed on the LED.

Playback automatically stops at the end of a song. You can,

however, stop playback in the middle of a song by pressing the

STOP button.

Music Disk Recorder

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

Press the PLAY button to begin playback of the song.

First the registration and other data are read, then playback of

the performance starts (excepting the parts that were turned off

in step #2).

Now perform your new part or parts over the playback parts.

When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback

is automatically stopped and the STOP status is resumed.

3) To repeat playback of a song or songs:

This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all songs on a disk

or only one specific song.

Select the song number you wish to play back.

If you wish to play back all songs on a disk, select the first song

that will be played back. The others will follow in order.

Hold down the SHIFT button and simultaneously press the

SONG REPEAT button.

The lamps above SHIFT and SONG REPEAT light up, and

“ALL” appears on the LED display.

To repeatedly playback all songs starting with the

selected song:

Press the PLAY button to begin playback of the song.

Playback will begin from the song selected and repeat

indefinitely.

To repeatedly play back only the selected song:

1. Again hold down the SHIFT button and simultaneously press

the SONG REPEAT button.

“SinG” appears on the LED display to indicate that a single

song will be repeatedly played back.

2. Press the PLAY button to begin playback of the song.

Playback of the selected song will begin and repeat

indefinitely.

To stop playback, press the STOP button.

Music Disk Recorder

About XG

The EL-100 allows you to play back the commercially available XG

song data using the M.D.R. Also, the XG Easy Converter function of

the EL-100 lets you convert the data to the XG compatible data.

NOTE:

The XG song data created with EL-100 conforms

to the SMF format 0 or 1.

Playing back the XG Song Data

This function is for playback only. You can practice a specific part

of the XG song data by muting that part.

1. Insert the XG song disk into the floppy disk slot.

The following display appears.

Song Name Display

<SONG NAME> [PART]˛˝

01:AMBIENT.MID

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

1 Selects a song.

2 Change the LCD to Part

Display.

[XG] page will be added to

the upper right side of the

display.

The XG song data will be displayed on the XG page. You can

store both the XG songs (on the XG page) and Electone songs

(on pages 1 - 4) in a single disk.

2. Use the bottom left Data Control buttons 1 to select a song you

want to play back.

3. Press the PLAY button in the M.D.R. section to start song

playback.

4. Use the top right Data Control buttons 2 to change the LCD to

part display.

Part Display

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

PART:ALL [NAME]˛˝

’SOLO ’MUTE VOL.:24

-2 3-1

3 Selects a part. Range: 1 -

16, ALL (all parts)

-1

Select next part.

-2

Select previous part.

4 Change the LCD to Song

Name Display.

5 Solo: Use the

corresponding Data

Control button to turn on/

off the solo function.

When solo is turned on all

other parts will be muted

automatically.

6 Mute: Use the

corresponding Data

Control button to turn on/

off the mute function.

7 VOL. (VOLUME):

Adjusts the volume of

each part within the range,

0 - 24. If you have

selected ALL, you can

adjust overall volume.

Use 3 button to select a part, and press 5 to engage the solo

playback of the selected part, press 6 to mute some parts or

press 7 buttons to adjust the volume of a specific part.

NOTE:

Total amount of reverb value may be changed

inadvertently while playing back XG Song Data.

Music Disk Recorder

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

XG Easy Converter

This function allows you to convert the EL-100 song data to the XG

format data. You can then play back the data using XG devices and/

or personal computer. Depending on the type of XG devices, sound

may be different from the original data you created.

The contents to be converted:

Voice (Program) number, Volume, Feet (octave settings), Pan, Vibrato, Slide (for the

Lead voices), Initial Touch, Effects (Tremolo and Delay), Reverb (except for

Length), Sustain, Rhythm Patterns (except for Accompaniment), Expression,

Registration, Registration Shift (except for Next Song)

To convert the EL-100 data to the XG song data:

1. Insert the disk containing the Electone data into the floppy disk

slot.

NOTE:

Confirm that the disk should contain enough

amount of available memory before the

conversion.

2. Select the song to be converted to the XG data.

3. While holding down the top right Data Control buttons press the

RECORD button in the M.D.R. section.

The following message appears to confirm the operation.

≥Confirm Conv.Data ≥

≥ [CONFIRM][CANCEL]≥

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

4. Press the Data Control buttons corresponding to [Confirm].

The M.D.R. starts playback of the selected song for you to decide

whether you convert it to the XG data, or not. After finishing

playback the following message appears.

≥Conv.to XGSONG01? ≥

≥ [CONV.] [CANCEL]≥

NOTE:

In this case the M.D.R. uses the XG tone generator

built in the EL-100 to play back the data.

5. Press the Data Control buttons corresponding to [Convert].

After the process of the conversion the LCD returns to the

original display.

<SONG NAME> [PART]˛˝

01:XGSONG01.MID

When the XG song data is newly created in the disk, XG page

will be added to the top right side of the display. The converted

song (XG data) will be stored on the XG page and the original

song (Electone data) is left as is.

NOTE:

Select [Cancel] to abort the operation and return

to the original display.

NOTE:

The converted XG song data may sound

differently from the original data.

NOTE:

The converted data cannot be deleted.

Music Disk Recorder

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

NOTE:

If you hold down the SHIFT and press CUSTOM

PLAY or if you execute the following Read and

Auto Increment function, all data, except for that of

Rhythm Pattern Program, Rhythm Sequence and

Keyboard Percussion assignment, will be loaded

and played back. It is handy when you want to call

up the registrations only.

2) Read and Auto Increment

Another method for calling up only registration data, besides that

mentioned in the NOTE above.

Pressing the UPPER button in the RECORD section while M.D.R. is in

the stop status calls up the registration data and automatically selects the

next song number.

This method is more convenient than the one mentioned above since the

M.D.R. automatically selects the next song number.

NOTE:

This function is not possible if the next song

contains no registration data.

3) Pause

If you want to temporarily stop playback of the song or songs, press the

PAUSE button.

To resume playback from the point at which the song was paused, press

the PAUSE button again.

4) Fast Forward and Fast Reverse

During playback, these buttons function as fast forward and fast reverse

buttons, much like those of a tape recorder.

Press SONG SELECT H button to advance to a later point in the song

or press SONG SELECT G button to return to an earlier position.

While either of these buttons is held down, playback stops and the song

time is advanced or reversed accordingly.

Even when the button is released, playback is paused. To resume

playback from the point you’ve advanced or reversed to, press the PLAY

button.

NOTE:

It may take some time to search the point at which

you want to resume playback when you return to an

earlier position using the fast reverse function.

NOTE:

Fast Forward and Fast Reverse operate at five

times the normal playback speed.

8 Other Functions

1) Custom Play

If you want to play back the song without resetting the registrations and

other data, press the CUSTOM PLAY button.

This displays the song time and starts playback immediately.

Music Disk Recorder

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

5) Changing the Tempo

You can change the tempo of the song as the song is playing back.

While holding down the SHIFT button, press the TEMPO + or TEMPO -

button.

Each press of the button slows down or speeds up the tempo by a small

amount (not affecting the pitch).

Pressing TEMPO + causes the song faster and TEMPO – slower.

(The Tempo button on the Electone panel cannot be used to change the

tempo on the Music Disk Recorder.)

To restore the original recording tempo of a song, hold down the SHIFT

button and simultaneously press both TEMPO buttons.

Indicates faster tempo

Indicates original tempo

Indicates slower tempo

NOTE:

When tempo is changed, the LED display indicates

the change as a percentage of the original recorded

tempo (100). Values less than 100 indicate a

slower tempo; values greater than 100 indicate a

faster tempo.

NOTE:

Tempo change remains in effect even when you

change songs. If you have changed the tempo in

one song, you should perform above step to restore

the original tempo before playing another song.

Turning the power switch off and on again also

restores the original tempo.

Music Disk Recorder

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

6) Song Copy

This function lets you copy the data recorded at one song number to

another song number. You can copy and exchange the data even between

two different disks.

NOTE:

This function is available with the Electone data

only, not with the XG data.

To use the Song Copy function within a disk:

Select the song number to be copied (source) with the SONG

SELECT buttons.

While holding down the SHIFT button, press the SONG COPY

FROM button.

The song number to be copied from appears at the left of the

LED display.

NOTE:

If the specified song number has no recorded data,

the M.D.R. automatically searches for and selects

the next song that contains recorded data.

Next, designate the destination song number. While holding

down the SHIFT button, press the SONG COPY TO button.

The M.D.R. automatically searches for an empty song number to

copy the data to, and displays that number at the right side of the

display. The RECORD lamp will start flashing indicating that

the M.D.R. is ready to copy. If all songs numbers contain

recorded data, “FULL” appears on the LED display. In this

case, you should erase one of the songs on the disk by using the

Song Delete function (page 92).

NOTE:

The message “FULL” may appear when the

available memory is short.

NOTE:

If you want to abort the operation, press STOP

button.

Use the SONG SELECT buttons to select a destination song

number for copying. Follow this step if you wish to select a

different destination song number than the one displayed.

The M.D.R. will display only those song numbers that have no

data.

Press the RECORD button to execute the Song Copy function.

The RECORD lamp stops flashing and remains lit, indicating

that the Song Copy function is in process. The LED display

shows the “size” of the song in numbers, and counts down as the

data is being copied. When the display shows “000,” the song

has been completely copied.

Music Disk Recorder

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

To use the Song Copy function between two different disks:

Insert the source disk that contains the song you want to copy

from.

While holding down the SHIFT button, press the SONG COPY

FROM button.

The song number to be copied from appears at the left of the

LED display.

Use the SONG SELECT buttons to select a destination song

number for copying.

NOTE:

You can also use the Data Control buttons to select

the song number.

Press the RECORD button.

The RECORD lamp lights up and the LED continues to indicate

“00.--” as shown at the right.

NOTE:

The RECORD lamp remains lit. Although ejecting

the disk while the RECORD lamp is lit is prohib-

ited, you are allowed to eject the disk in this case.

Press the Eject button to take out the source disk.

Insert the destination disk to which you want to copy .

While holding down the SHIFT button, press the SONG COPY

TO button.

The song number to be copied to appears at the right side of the

LED display. The M.D.R. automatically searches for an empty

song number to copy the data to.

Use the SONG SELECT buttons to select a destination song

number for copying.

Press the RECORD button to execute the Song Copy function.

The LED display shows the “size” of the song in numbers, and

counts down as the data is being copied. When the display

shows “0000,” the song has been completely copied.

NOTE:

An asterisk (*) is added to the end of the (destina-

tion) song’s name to differentiate from the original

(source) song.

Music Disk Recorder

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

7) Song Delete

You can delete a song on disk by performing this function.

Use the SONG SELECT buttons to select the number of the

song you wish to delete.

While holding down the SHIFT button, press the SONG DEL.

button.

The letters “dL” appear on the left side of the LED display, next

to the selected song number. RECORD lamp flashes to indicate

that the M.D.R. is ready to delete the song.

If you wish to, you can still select a different song number in

this step by using the SONG SELECT buttons.

NOTE:

If you want to abort the operation, press STOP

button.

NOTE:

XG song data cannot be deleted.

Press the RECORD button to execute the Song Delete function.

The RECORD lamp stops flashing and remains lit, indicating

that the Song Delete function has begun. When the Song Delete

function is completed, the STOP status is automatically

resumed.

8) Disk Copy

You can duplicate a floppy disk by copying the contents. Yamaha

recommends that you keep two copies of important data on separate

floppy disks by using this function.

Prepare the source disk and the formatted blank disk to be

copied.

The disk type of both source disk and destination

disk must be the same. For example, use 2HD for

the disk to be copied (destination) if the source disk

is 2HD type.

Be sure to set the Write-protect tab (page 74) on

the source disk to on. The message “Prot” may

appear if you insert the source disk with the Write-

protect tab “off.” On the contrary, set the Write-

protect tab on the destination disk to off. The

message “Prot” may appear if you insert the

destination disk with the Write-protect tab “on.”

In this case, the Disk Copy function cannot be

executed.

While holding down the SHIFT button, press the LOWER

button in the RECORD part.

“In 1” appears on the LED display to indicate that the M.D.R. is

ready to execute the Disk Copy.

Music Disk Recorder

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

CUSTOM PLAY

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

RECORD PLAY

UPPER UPPERLOWER PEDAL CONTROL LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT

PA USE STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD

SONG FROM SONG

DEL.TO

REPEAT SONG COPY

TEMPO FORMAT

Insert the source disk into the disk slot.

The M.D.R. starts reading the data in the source disk.

“out 1” appears on the LED display.

Press the eject button to take out the source disk.

“In 2” appears on the LED display to urge you to insert the

destination disk.

Insert the destination disk.

The number “160” appears on the LED display and counting

down is initiated as the disk is being copied.

When finished, “End” will appear on the LED display for few

seconds.

NOTE:

“Fort” or “bAd” may appear if an error occurs in

the middle of the operation. If this happens, please

retry formatting the destination disk and copying

disk.

Follow the M.D.R. direction to eject/insert the

disks during the operation. Do not eject/insert the

disks frivolously ignoring the M.D.R. direction.

Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk

drive.

Music Disk Recorder

(

LEAD

)

REM.MEM.

(

K.PERC.

) (

LEAD

) (

K.PERC.

)

RECORD PLAY

SHIFT

PA USE

9) Checking the Remaining Memory

You can check the amount of memory available for additional recording

in a disk by pressing PAUSE button while holding down SHIFT button.

The amount of available memory will be displayed on the LED.

The maximum amount of memory is ca.700 for 2DD disks and ca.1400

for 2HD disks.

10) Pattern Disks

The M.D.R. also allows you to select rhythms from optional disks.

To load the patterns from a Pattern disk:

Insert the Pattern Disk into the disk slot under the Music Disk

Recorder.

The pattern number and name from the Pattern Disk appears.

Select the rhythm you want to use using the appropriate Data

Control buttons.

<PATTERN DISK>[SAVE]

01:Pop.R-1

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Save

Jumps

ahead

10 numbers

Jumps

back

10 numbers

Selects

number

Selects

number

Pattern Number Pattern Name

Selects

number

Selects

number

NOTE:

Refer to the pattern list included in the Pattern Disk

for the information on each rhythm.

Start the rhythm to check the pattern to be called up.

Music Disk Recorder

If you want to save the current pattern to a User Rhythm space,

select the “SAVE” with the corresponding Data Control buttons.

The following display appears.

≥ ÚÆSave to USER1-A≥

≥ [SAVE] [CANCEL]≥

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Selects the destination (User Rhythm) number

Execute save

Select the User number to which you want to save using the top

left Data Control buttons.

Press the Data Control buttons corresponding to [Save].

The rhythm is saved and loaded to the designated User Rhythm

number.

NOTE:

Select [Cancel] to abort the operation and return to

the original display.

NOTE:

See page 50 for the details to use the loaded User

pattern.

11) Copy Protect

Some of the Disks available for the Electone are purposely protected

from being copied or erased. You cannot save the data to another floppy

disk.

If you try to load data from such a “copy-protected” disk to the Electone,

a “Protected Disk” (PrXX*) message will appear on the LED display.

The data cannot be saved to the disk.

*XX: song number

Music Disk Recorder

Messages on the M.D.R. LED Display

Display Description of the Messages

No disk is installed. Install a disk.

1) The installed disk is write-protected, so the Record, Song Copy, and Song Delete jobs cannot be

performed. Set the disk’s Write-protect tab (page 74) to OFF.

2) If you are using a copy-protected playback-only disk, this message may appear when you attempt

the Record, Song Copy, or Song Delete operations. Cancel the operation.

3) When executing Disk Copy, set the Write-protect tab on the source disk to ON.

The installed disk is not formatted. Format the disk. (page 75)

1) The disk’s memory capacity is full, so the Record or Song Copy operation cannot be performed.

Use another formatted disk or delete unnecessary data.

2) All of the song numbers contain recorded data, so the Song Copy operation cannot be performed.

Press the STOP button, then delete any unnecessary data.

None of the song numbers contain recorded data, so the Song Copy operation cannot be performed.

Press the STOP button and abort the operation.

An error occurred because the disk was removed during recording or playback. Press the STOP

button, and replace the disk, then start the operation over again.

Incompatible disk has been inserted. Insert the appropriate disk.

Recording cannot be performed because too much data was received at one time. Press the STOP

button and retry recording.

The disk is defective and cannot be formatted. Use another disk.

An error occurred during the transmission or reception of data. Press the STOP button and retry the

operation over again.

You are trying to record to the song number that already contains recorded data. Stop the recording

and select the other blank song number by pressing the SONG SELECT buttons.

XX: song number

When you insert the “copy-protected” disk to the Electone, this message will appear on the LED

display. You cannot overwrite or save the changes.

XX: song number

oooo This message indicates that an incompatible disk is inserted in the Pattern Disk or Registration

Menu Disk operation. Insert the appropriate disk.

_XX An under line (_) before the song number indicates that it is XG song data.

XX: song number

You have inserted a wrong type disk as the destination disk in the Disk Copy operation. Use the

same disk type as the source disk.

Footswitches and Expression Pedal

1 Footswitch

The Electone has two Footswitches on the expression pedal that can be used

to control various functions.

The Right Footswitch is used for the Registration Shift function. (See page

69 for the details of the Registration Shift function.)

The Left Footswitch can be set to control one of the following functions:

Glide, Tremolo, rhythm controls.

Assignments of the functions to the Left Footswitch are made in the

FOOTSWITCH pages.

Press the FOOT SW. button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.

DISPLAY SELECT

VOICE EFFECT A.B.C.

DISPLAY SET M.O.C.

FOOT REGIST. PITCH TREMOLO

SW. SHIFT MIDI (FAST)

The following display appears.

Footswitch-Left Page

<FOOT.SW>MODE:OFF

OFF

RHYTHM

GLIDE

TREM.

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

1 Off

Cancels Left Footswitch control.

These foot-operated controls allow you to turn on and execute various performance functions without taking

your hands from the keyboards.

Footswitches and Expression Pedal

2 Rhythms

Selection of Left Footswitch control over rhythm functions. When this is

chosen, the following items appear at the bottom of the display:

<FOOT.SW>MODE:RHYTHM

”STOP ’ENDING ’FILL

2-1 2-2 2-3

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

-1

Stop

Functions as an on/off switch for the rhythm or the rhythm

sequence.

-2

Ending

Switches the rhythm to the Ending pattern, after which the rhythm is

stopped.

-3

Fill In

Switches the rhythm to the Fill In pattern.

3 Glide

Selection of Footswitch control over Glide.

Pressing the Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of the selected voice

or voices by a half step. And releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the

original. When the Glide setting is chosen, the following display appears:

Also, page number will be shown at the top right side. The Glide function is

configured with three pages.

Footswitch – Glide Page 1

<FOOT.SW>MODE:GLIDE⁄

”UPPER1 ”UPPER2

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

3-1 3-1

Footswitch – Glide Page 2

<FOOT.SW>MODE:GLIDE¤

’LOWER1 ’LOWER2

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

3-1 3-1

Footswitch – Glide Page 3

<FOOT.SW>MODE:GLIDE‹

”LEAD TIME:2

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

3-1 3-2

Footswitches and Expression Pedal

-1

Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead

The Glide function can be applied to any or all of the voice sections

shown in the display. Select the desired voice section(s).

-2

Time

Determines the speed of the Glide function, or in other words, how

gradually the pitch returns when the Footswitch is released. Higher

settings produce slower pitch changes.

Range: 1-5

NOTE:

When the Glide function is applied, the

Vibrato is not effective.

4 Tremolo

Selection of Footswitch control over Tremolo.

Pressing the Footswitch turns the Tremolo effect on and off (Chorus),

performing the same function as the TREMOLO (FAST) button in the

DISPLAY SELECT section. (If you want to use this function, the tremolo

settings must be set properly. See page 42 for more information.)

<FOOT.SW>MODE:TREM.

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

100

Footswitches and Expression Pedal

2 Expression Pedal

You can choose the function of the Expression Pedal from three settings.

Press the PITCH/MIDI button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.

Transpose/Pitch function, the first page, will be displayed.

DISPLAY SELECT

VOICE EFFECT A.B.C.

DISPLAY SET M.O.C.

FOOT REGIST. PITCH TREMOLO

SW. SHIFT MIDI (FAST)

Select page 3 using Page buttons at the right side of the LCD display.

MIDI IN page will be displayed.

<MIDI IN> LEAD:INT.‹

SYNC:INT. EXP.:AUTO

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

EXP. (Expression)

Determines the control of the expression pedal functions.

<MIDI IN> LEAD:INT.‹

SYNC:INT. EXP.:AUTO

AUTO

INT.

EXT.

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

Ordinarily, this control is set to Auto.

However, when it is set to INT., the expression pedal lets you control Electone

volume even during M.D.R. playback.

When set to EXT., another (external) Electone controls over the volume of the

Electone.

101

Transpose and Pitch Controls

8 Transpose and Pitch Controls

There are two pitch-related controls on the Electone: Transpose and Pitch. Transpose allows you to change the

key of the instrument and Pitch lets you finely adjust the tuning. These features make it easy to change the key

of a song to accommodate a vocalist’s range or to precisely match the tuning of another instrument.

Press the PITCH/MIDI button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.

Transpose/Pitch function, the first page, will be displayed.

DISPLAY SELECT

VOICE EFFECT A.B.C.

DISPLAY SET M.O.C.

FOOT REGIST. PITCH TREMOLO

SW. SHIFT MIDI (FAST)

Transpose/Pitch Page

<TRANSPOSE><PITCH> ⁄

0 A=440.0Hz

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL

1 Transpose

Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the voices, and is adjustable in half

steps (semitones).

Range: -6 - +6 (one octave)

2 Pitch

Determines the fine pitch setting of all the voices. The range is about a

quarter of semitone.

Range: 438.8Hz – 444.5Hz

NOTE:

The default Pitch is 440.0Hz (=A3).

NOTE:

The pitch changes cannot be recorded to

the Music Disk Recorder.

About the Pitch

Each voice is tuned with the temperament.

–3.6

–1.2

0 (Standard 440Hz)

+1.2

+2.4

PK voice

(LK voice 2)

(LK2)

(UK voice 2)

(UK2)

LK voice

UK voice

LEAD

+6.0LEAD voice

Cent

NOTE:

When matching the pitch with other

instrument, use the Clarinet voice on the

Lower keyboard.

102

MIDI

9 MIDI

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a kind of communication system for electronic musical

instruments. It is built into most every modern digital musical instrument and allows different instruments to

“talk” to each other and control each other’s functions. For example, the Upper keyboard of your Electone

could be used to play sounds on a connected synthesizer. In another application, a rhythm machine can be

programmed to play its rhythms in perfect synchronization with the tempo set on the Electone.

To use the MIDI functions you must, of course, have a second MIDI device (such as a synthesizer or rhythm

machine), and a set of MIDI cables. For more information see page 105.

To select the MIDI page:

Press the PITCH/MIDI button in the DISPLAY SELECT section.

DISPLAY SELECT

VOICE EFFECT A.B.C.

DISPLAY SET M.O.C.

FOOT REGIST. PITCH TREMOLO

SW. SHIFT MIDI (FAST)

Transpose/Pitch function, the first page, will be displayed. The MIDI

related settings are shown on the second and third pages.

Select pages 2 and 3 using Page buttons at the right side of the LCD

display.

MIDI OUT Page

<MIDI OUT>LOWER: 2 ¤

UPPER: 1 PEDAL: 3

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

For setting the channels over which MIDI information will be transmitted. Any

channel from 1 through 16 can be assigned to each keyboard, the Upper

keyboard, the Lower keyboard and the Pedalboard. The note on/off messages

on each keyboard will be sent through the channels set here.

1 Upper

Selects the transmit channel for Upper keyboard from channels 1 - 16.

2 Lower

Selects the transmit channel for Lower keyboard from channels 1 - 16.

3 Pedal

Selects the transmit channel for Pedalboard from channels 1 - 16.

The MIDI receive channel of each connected MIDI device should match the

numbers set here.

103

MIDI

Receive Channels

When using another MIDI device to play the Electone’s voices, you must

set the MIDI transmit channel(s) of the connected device to match the

receive channel(s) of the Electone.

The MIDI receive channels of the Electone are fixed to the following

values:

Upper Keyboard: 1

Lower Keyboard: 2

Pedalboard: 3

MIDI IN Page

<MIDI IN> LEAD:INT.‹

SYNC:INT. EXP.:AUTO

1-1

1-2

DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE

1 Internal/External Controls

Switches between the Electone (INT.: Internal) and the connected device

(EXT.: External) to control the displayed items.

-1

Lead

Determines Internal or External control of the Lead Voices. When

set to Internal, Lead Voices are played from the Electone and the

sounds from a connected MIDI instrument can be played via MIDI

channel 1 (or channel 2, when the To Lower function is on). When

set to External, the Lead Voices can only be played from the

connected instrument via MIDI channel 4.

-2

Sync.

Determines the source of the timing control, for rhythm

synchronization purposes. Setting this to Internal gives the Electone

timing control over the connected rhythm machine. This also allows

you to start and stop the rhythms of the connected rhythm machine

from the Electone’s panel controls. Setting this to External gives

timing control to the connected rhythm machine.

NOTE:

Accompaniment pattern sounds cannot be

controlled via MIDI.

NOTE:

For the information on EXP. See page 100.

104

Accessory Jacks and Controls

10 Accessory Jacks and Controls

On the underside of the Electone keyboard is a separate panel equipped with various input/output terminals

and miscellaneous controls, the functions of which are described below.

HOST

SELECT

TO HOST

OUT

MIDI

MIDI Mac

PC-2 PC-1

HEADPHONES

AUX.

OUT

1 2

1 AUX. OUT (RCA, L/R)

This pair of RCA jacks is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker.

2 HEADPHONES (Phone)

For connection of a stereo headphone set. When headphones are connected

to this jack, sound to the Electone’s built-in speaker system is automatically

cut off, allowing you to play without disturbing others.

3 MIDI IN/OUT

For connecting external devices such as synthesizer and rhythm machine

with MIDI cables. MIDI cables are required (page 106).

4 TO HOST

This terminal can be connected to the serial port of a personal computer

instead of using MIDI connection.

5 HOST SELECT

When you have connected the Electone and the personal computer using the

TO HOST terminal, you need to select the appropriate setting here

depending on the computer used. (page 105)

NOTE:

See next page for the details of the

connection using the TO HOST terminal.

105

Appendix

11 Appendix

MIDI

On the right underside of the Electone keyboard you will find the MIDI IN/

OUT jacks and TO HOST terminal.

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface,

which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each

other, by sending and receiving MIDI messages. If your Electone is

connected with external devices via these MIDI jacks (with a personal

computer via the TO HOST terminal) and appropriate MIDI settings are

done, you can play an external MIDI device such as synthesizer from your

Electone keyboard or your Electone can be played by an external device

such as sequencer (by a personal computer with a sequencing software

installed).

You need MIDI cable(s) when you exchange the data between Electone and

an external device. Or you need a serial cable when you connect Electone’s

TO HOST to the computer serial port instead of using MIDI cables.

Also, to exchange the data between your Electone and connected MIDI

device you have to match the MIDI transmit/receive channels on both

devices. Receive channels of Electone are fixed as mentioned on page 103.

Accordingly, you need to match the transmit channels on the external

device to the fixed receive channels of Electone when you want to control

Electone by the external device. See page 102 for the detailed information

about the MIDI channel settings.

NOTE:

See page 107 for the information on the

MIDI message types.

Setting examples

Using the TO HOST terminal

Using a separately available Serial Cable allows you to directly connect them

(between the TO HOST terminal of your Electone and the Serial Port of the

personal computer). In this case you need to select one of the HOST SELECT

switches to match the computer type you use.

No additional MIDI setting is necessary.

NOTE:

MIDI jacks will be inactive when the TO

HOST terminal is currently used.

Windows 95/98/Me

(Computer)

HOST

8-pin MINI DIN to

D-SUB 9-pin Cable

HOST SELECT

EL-100

RS-232C

(DB9)

Mac

PC-1PC-2

MIDI

Macintosh

(Computer)

HOST

Macintosh Peripheral

Cable (M0197)

HOST SELECT

Mac

PC-1PC-2

MIDI

EL-100

NOTE:

For Windows users: To actually exchange

the data via the Serial Cable you need to

install the appropriate MIDI driver to your

personal computer in advance.

NOTE:

Select the HOST SELECT switches as follows:

When you use MIDI connection: MIDI

When you use TO HOST connection with

Windows system: PC-2

When you use TO HOST connection with

Macintosh: Mac

NOTE:

If you use a PC with USB terminal, you

need to use USB interface.

106

Appendix

Using MIDI IN/OUT jacks

MIDI

Interface

MIDI OUT

MIDI INMIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

EL-100

HOST SELECT

Mac

PC-1PC-2

MIDI

HOST SELECT

Mac

PC-1PC-2

MIDI

HOST SELECT

Mac

PC-1PC-2

MIDI

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI Keyboard

EL-100EL-100

MU80 etc.

MUSIC SYNTHESIZER

REALTIME CONTROL

EXTENDED SYNTHESIS

Controls an external device using

the EL-100 (as a master)

Controls the EL-100 using an external

device (as a slave)

Exchanges the data between EL-100 and

an external device

1 Control an external device using the EL-100

Using an external MIDI keyboard or MIDI tone generator

● Playing your Electone can cause the MIDI keyboard (or tone generator) to

be played using its own voices, accomplishing thick sound layers. (The

MIDI receive channels of the MIDI keyboard must match the transmit

channels on your Electone.)

● Various messages including the values how far the expression pedal is

pressed down and how hard you play the Electone keyboard can be transmit-

ted as digital data. However, how the external device responds depends on

the external device you have connected.

● The performance on your Electone can be recorded onto your PC using an

appropriate sequencing software. (You need a sequencing software in this

case.)

2 Control the EL-100 using an external device

Using an external MIDI keyboard

● Playing the external MIDI keyboard can cause your Electone to be played

using Electone’s voices. (The MIDI transmit channels of the MIDI keyboard

must match the (fixed) receive channels on your Electone. The channels 1, 2

and 3 for the Upper, Lower and pedal voices, respectively.)

● Also, Keyboard Percussion on your Electone can be played by playing the

external MIDI keyboard. (The MIDI transmit channels of the MIDI key-

board must be channel 15)

● The MIDI data played back by the external PC (using a sequencing soft-

ware) can be played using Electone’s voices. You can use the Electone as

an XG tone generator for computer-based music production. See page 110

for the details to use the EL-100 as an XG tone generator.

NOTE:

You cannot use the M.D.R. and MIDI

function at one time since the M.D.R. is

also connected via MIDI internally.

107

Appendix

The MIDI Messages of the EL-100

The MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: the Channel Messages and

System Messages. The Channel Messages are the data related to the

performance on the keyboard for a specific channel. Each time you play the

keyboard on the EL-100, the channel messages, which keys are played and how

hard the keys are pressed, will be transmitted via a specific channel. The

System Messages are the data that allows several MIDI devices communicate

each other. Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI messages

which the EL-100 can receive/transmit.

Channel Messages

Channel Messages are the data related to the performance on the keyboard for a

specific channel.

Key related messages

These are transmitted every time you play the keyboards on your Electone.

Reversely, the Electone can be played using these data from an external

keyboard.

Note On Indicates which keys are played with the note numbers 0

through 127. The note range is C-2 (0) – G8 (127), C3=60.

Velocity Indicates how hard the key is held. The range is 1 - 127.

Note Off Generated when a key is released.

NOTE:

For more detailed information see MIDI

Data Format on page 111 and MIDI

Implementation Chart on page 120.

Control Change

The Control Change Messages let you select a voice bank, control volume,

panning, modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other control

parameters, through specific Control Change numbers.

NOTE:

For more detailed information on the

Control Change messages available for the

EL-100 see MIDI Data Format on page

111 and MIDI Implementation Chart on

page 120.

NOTE:

For more detailed information see MIDI

Data Format on page 111 and MIDI

Implementation Chart on page 120.

Program Change

The Program Change messages allow you to change voices in the middle of a

song. With these messages you can change the registrations of the EL-100.

108

Appendix

System Messages

System Exclusive Messages

System Exclusive messages are used to exchange the system and voice/

registration data. These allow you to execute bulk dump operation, sending and

receiving all the data of the EL-100 including registrations to and from an

external device. This is especially useful for you to build up the library of the

registration data in a device like a hard disk.

Examples of Exchanging the Data

Use the following examples to send (or receive) the registration data to (or

from) a personal computer (a sequencing software).

First, you need to connect your EL-100 with a personal computer (a

sequencing software) using a Serial Cable or a MIDI cable (page 105).

NOTE:

You also need a sequencing software,

which has been properly installed in the

personal computer, and which can send

and receive system exclusive messages.

Send the Registration Data

from the EL-100 to the Personal Computer (PC)

Preparation (Setting up registrations)

Set the Strings voice on the Upper Keyboard of the EL-100.

Press STRINGS button on the Upper Keyboard Voice section, and

select String 1 from the Strings Menu.

Store the registration to the Registration Memory button 1.

While holding down the M. button Press the Registration Memory

button 1.

Sending the Registration Data

Send the Request-to-Send all RAM message, “F0, 43, 70, 70, 10, F7”

(Hexadecimal), from the sequencing software (PC) to the EL-100.

Once the EL-100 receives the Request-to-Send all RAM message, the

EL-100 automatically sends all registration data in the all registration

numbers to your PC.

You can store the registration data in a file on your PC.

NOTE:

Depending on the capacity of your

sequencing software, you may need to

divide the data into two and send them to

the PC separately. If you want to divide,

see page 114, “Data Code to Send” table.

For example,

by changing the message from

“F0,43,70,70,10,F7” (all data) to

“F0,43,70,70,17,F7,” the Electone will

send the Keyboard Percussion Assignment

data only.

109

Appendix

Send the Registration Data

from your PC to the EL-100 and

Change the Registration Memory Buttons

Send the data stored in the PC back to your Electone. Also, select a

Registration Memory button and then play the upper keyboard using PC.

Receiving the Registration Data

Send the Request-to-Receive all RAM message, “F0, 43, 70, 70, 20,

F7” (Hexadecimal), from the sequencing software (PC) to the EL-100.

Once the EL-100 receives the Request-to-Receive all RAM message, it

automatically receives all registration data and relocates them to the all

registration numbers.

Selecting the Registration Memory Buttons

Sending the Program Change messages from the PC to your EL-100 makes it

possible to change the registration on the Electone.

Send the Program Change message, “CF, 00” (Hexadecimal) to the EL-

100.

Once the Program Change message is received, the EL-100

automatically turns the Registration Memory button 1 on.

Sending the Note-On Messages

Send the Note-On message, “90, 30, 7F” (Hexadecimal) to the EL-100.

EL-100 receives the note-on message and plays C2 key on the Upper

keyboard. It plays String voice you have set in the previous step.

Send the Note-Off message, “90, 30, 00” to the Electone.

All the above operations can also be done with the M.D.R. easily and

efficiently. However, using the PC/ hard disk allows you to build up a

large data library a single disk cannot deal with.

110

Appendix

Use the EL-100 as an XG Tone Generator

You can also use the EL-100 as an XG tone generator since the EL-100 is

compatible with the XG format. You can play back the commercially available

XG song data with the Electone’s M.D.R., and also play them using an external

sequencer (or sequencing software) and the internal XG tone generator.

The internal tone generator section of the EL-100 is normally set to EL Mode

for playing as an “Electone.”

Sending an appropriate system exclusive message from the sequencing software

(PC) to the EL-100 changes the mode to XG Mode, in which you can use the

Electone as an XG tone generator.

NOTE:

The M.D.R. lets you play back the

commercially available XG song

data and convert the Electone song

data to XG data. For more

information on XG song playback

and data conversion functions, see

page 86, 87.

Send the XG System On message, “F0, 43, 1N*, 4C, 00, 00, 7E, 00,

F7” (Hexadecimal), from the sequencing software (PC) to the EL-100.

*N: Device Number (“0” for the EL-100)

Once the XG System On message is received, the internal tone

generator will be in the XG Mode allowing the EL-100 to receive all

the MIDI messages defined by the XG format such as NRPN and Bank

Select.

NOTE:

When you create an XG song data

using a sequencing software, be

sure to insert the XG System On

message at the beginning of the

data. The internal tone generator

mode automatically changes to

XG when you start to play back

the data.

NOTE:

The internal tone generator mode

automatically changes to XG

when you play back commercially

available XG song data.

111

Appendix

MIDI Data Format

1. Channel Messages

1.1 EL Mode

Code (Hexadecimal) Function Transmit Receive Remarks

8n,nn,00-7F Note Off ˛ 1ch UK

˛ 2ch LK

˛ 3ch PK

˛ (4ch)* LEAD

˛ 5-14ch XG

˛ 15ch Keyboard Percussion

9n,nn,00 Note Off (1ch)* 1ch UK

9n,nn,01-7F Note On (2ch)* 2ch LK

(3ch)* 3ch PK (note on transmit velocity=50H)

˛ (4ch)* LEAD

˛ 5-14ch XG

˛ 15ch Keyboard Percussion

Bn,00,00-7F Bank select ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,20,00-7F

Bn,01,00-7F Modulation ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,04,00-7F 2nd Expression ˛ 16ch Control

˛ (4ch)* LEAD

Bn,05,00-7F Portamento Time ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,06,00-7F Data Entry ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,26,00-7F

Bn,07,00-7F Volume ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,0A,00-7F Pan ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,0B,00-7F Expression 16ch 16ch Control

5-14ch XG

Bn,40,00-7F Hold ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,41,00-7F Portamento ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,42,00-7F Sostenuto ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,43,00-7F Soft Pedal ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,47,00-7F Resonance ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,48,00-7F Release Time ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,49,00-7F Attack Time ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,4A,00-7F Brightness ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,54,00-7F Portamento Control ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,5B,00-7F Reverb Send Level ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,5D,00-7F Chorus Send Level ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,5E,00-7F Variation Send Level ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,60,00-7F Data Increment ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,61,00-7F Data Decrement

Bn,62,00-7F NRPN LSB ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,63,00-7F NRPN MSB

Bn,64,00-7F RPN LSB ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,65,00-7F RPN MSB

Bn,78,00 All Sounds Off ˛ 5-14ch XG

Bn,79,00 Reset All Controllers

Bn,7B,00 All Note Off

Bn,7C,00 Omni Off

Bn,7D,00 Omni On

Bn,7E,00 Mono

Bn,7F,00 Poly

112

Appendix

Code (Hexadecimal) Function Transmit Receive Remarks

Cn,nn Program Change ˛ 1ch UK

˛ 2ch LK

˛ 3ch PK

˛ 5-14ch XG

16ch 16ch Control

Dn,00-7F After Touch ˛ 5-14ch XG

En,00-7F,00-7F Pitch Bend ˛ 5-14ch XG

* Can be changed in the MIDI settings.

1.2 XG Mode

Code (Hexadecimal) Function Transmit Receive Remarks

8n,nn,00-7F Note Off ˛ 1-16ch

9n,nn,00 Note Off (1ch) UK

9n,nn,01-7F Note On (2ch)* LK

(3ch)* PK (note on transmit velocity=50H)

1-16ch

Bn,00,00-7F Bank select ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,20,00-7F

Bn,01,00-7F Modulation ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,04,00-7F 2nd Expression ˛ ˛ Control

˛˛LEAD

Bn,05,00-7F Portamento Time ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,06,00-7F Data Entry ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,26,00-7F

Bn,07,00-7F Volume ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,0A,00-7F Pan ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,0B,00-7F Expression 16ch 1-16ch Control

Bn,40,00-7F Hold ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,41,00-7F Portamento ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,42,00-7F Sostenuto ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,43,00-7F Soft Pedal ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,47,00-7F Resonance ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,48,00-7F Release Time ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,49,00-7F Attack Time ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,4A,00-7F Brightness ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,54,00-7F Portamento Control ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,5B,00-7F Reverb Send Level ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,5D,00-7F Chorus Send Level ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,5E,00-7F Variation Send Level ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,60,00-7F Data Increment ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,61,00-7F Data Decrement

Bn,62,00-7F NRPN LSB ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,63,00-7F NRPN MSB

Bn,64,00-7F RPN LSB ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,65,00-7F RPN MSB

113

Appendix

Code (Hexadecimal) Function Transmit Receive Remarks

Bn,78,00 All Sounds Off ˛ 1-16ch

Bn,79,00 Reset All Controllers

Bn,7B,00 All Note Off

Bn,7C,00 Omni Off

Bn,7D,00 Omni On

Bn,7E,00 Mono

Bn,7F,00 Poly

Cn,00-7F Program Change 16ch Control

1-16ch

Dn,00-7F After Touch ˛ 1-16ch

En,00-7F,00-7F Pitch Bend ˛ 1-16ch

* Can be changed in the MIDI settings.

2. Realtime Messages

Code (Hexadecimal) Function Transmit Receive Remarks

F8 Clock Ø Ø*

FA Start Ø Ø

FC Stop Ø Ø

FE Active Sensing Ø Ø

FF Reset ˛ ˛

* Received only when in the Ext. mode

3. System Exclusive Messages

3.1 Format

Universal Realtime Messages

Code (Hexadecimal) Message Transmit Receive

F0,7F,7F,04,01,SS,TT,F7 XG Master Volume ˛ Ø

XN ˛Ø

Universal Non-Realtime Messages

Code (Hexadecimal) Message Transmit Receive

F0,7E,7F,09,01,F7 GM ON ˛ Ø

XN ˛Ø

XG Native

Code (Hexadecimal) Message Transmit Receive

F0,43,1N,4C,AH,AM,AL,..data..,F7 XG Parameter Change ˛ Ø

F0,43,0N,4C,BH,BL,AH,AM,AL,..data..,cc,F7 XG Bulk Dump ˛ Ø

F0,43,1N,27,30,00,00,MM,LL,cc,F7 XG Master Tuning ˛ Ø

F0,43,1N,4C,00,00,7E,00,F7 XG System On ˛ Ø

Electone/Single Keyboard Common Messages

Code (Hexadecimal) Message Transmit Receive

F0,43,73,01,02,F7 Request for Internal Synch. Mode ˛ Ø

03 Request for External Synch. Mode ˛ Ø

114

Appendix

Electone Exclusive

Code (Hexadecimal) Message Transmit Receive

F0,43,70,70,00,...(Data)...F7 Bulk Dump Data ˛ Ø

78 ØØ

ID ˛Ø

F0,43,70,ID,00,F7 Model ID Data Ø ˛

F0,43,70,70,nn(*1),F7 Request-to-Send Data ˛ Ø

78 ˛Ø

ID ˛Ø

F0,43,70,70,nn(*2),F7 Request-to-Receive Data ˛ Ø

78 ˛Ø

ID ˛Ø

F0,43,70,70,30,F7 Request-to-Send Model ID data ˛ Ø

F0,43,70,70,38,7F,F7 Bulk Dump Acknowledge ˛ ˛

00 Bulk Dump Unacknowledge Ø ˛

F0,43,70,70,40,nn(*3),7F,F7 Switch On Ø Ø

00 Switch Off Ø Ø

F0,43,70,70,40,50,TL,TH,F7 Tempo Ø Ø

F0,43,70,78,41,cd,dd,F7(*4) Panel Switch Events Ø Ø

F0,43,70,78,42,...(Data)...F7 Current Registration Data Ø Ø

F0,43,70,78,44...(Data)...(*5),F7 EL MIDI Parameters Ø Ø

F0,43,70,70,70,nn(*6),F7 External MDR ˛ Ø

F0,43,70,70,73,F7 EL ON ˛ Ø

F0,43,70,70,78,SC,NC,F7 Bar Signal Ø Ø

X : don't care N : Device Number(“0” on EL-100) ID=4C

*1 Data Codes to Send

nn Data

10 All RAM

11 Registrations

12 Rhythm Sequences

14,15 User Patterns

16 User Voices

17 Keyboard Percussion Assignments

*2 Data Codes to Receive

nn Data

20 All RAM

21 Registrations

22 Rhythm Sequences

24,25 User Patterns

26 User Voices

27 Keyboard Percussion Assignments

*3 Switches

nn Switch Transmit Receive

45 Left Footswitch Ø Ø

47 Knee Lever ˛ Ø

48 Fill In Ø Ø

4B Intro./Ending Ø Ø

115

Appendix

*4 Switch Codes

Selectors

Code Switch Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Remarks

02 UK Voice 1 Ø [00-0D] Ø [00-0D] Switch Number

03 LK Voice 1 Ø [00-0D] Ø [00-0D] Switch Number

04 UK Voice 2 Ø [00-01] Ø [00-0D] Switch Number

05 LK Voice 2 Ø [00-01] Ø [00-0D] Switch Number

06 LEAD Voice Ø [00-04] Ø [00-04] Switch Number

07 Pedal Voice 1 Ø [00-04] Ø [00-04] Switch Number

08 Pedal Voice 2 Ø [00-04] Ø [00-04] Switch Number

0B Rhythm Ø [00-0B] Ø [00-0B] Switch Number

0F Registration Memory ˛ Ø [00-0F]

Volume

Code Switch Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Remarks

12 UK Voice 1 Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX,7F:MIN

13 LK Voice 1 Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN

14 UK Voice 2 Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN

15 LK Voice 2 Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN

16 LEAD Voice Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN

17 Pedal Voice 1 Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN

18 Pedal Voice 2 Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN

1A Rhythm Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN

1B Reverb Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Depth Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN

To Lower

Code Switch Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Remarks

36 LEAD Voice Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON

37 Pedal Voice 1 Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON

38 Pedal Voice 2 Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON

Sustain

Code Switch Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Remarks

50 Upper Keyboard Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON

51 Lower Keyboard Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON

52 Pedalboard Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON

Keyboard Percussion

Code Switch Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Remarks

5B Lower Keyboard Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON

5C Pedal Board Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON

Disable

Code Switch Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Remarks

5F Disable Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON

Tremolo

Code Switch Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Remarks

60 Tremolo Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:SLOW,01:FAST

Rhythm Sequence

Code Switch Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Remarks

61 Sequence 1 Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON

62 Sequence 2 Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON

63 Sequence 3 Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON

64 Sequence 4 Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON

116

Appendix

00-04, 06, 07

04, 06, 07

00-07

00, 01, 04, 06, 07

00-04

00-0D

00-7F

00-0D

00-7F

00-04

00-7F

00-01

02-1A

00-54

3C-6C

00-01

00-02

02-7F

00-24

00-01

Voice Assign Number H

Voice Assign Number L

Voice Selector Number

Volume

Reverb Send Level

Feet

Pan

Initial Touch Sensitivity

User Vibrato

Vibrato Delay

Vibrato Depth

Vibrato Speed

To Lower

Slide

Slide Speed

Detune

2nd Expression Pedal

Glide

00:MIN

7F:MAX

00:MIN

7F:MAX

00:Preset

01:16Feet

02:8Fee

03:4Feet

04:2Feet

00:Right

40:Center

7F:Left

00:MIN

7F:MAX

00:PRESET

01:USER

00:Short

7F:Long

00:MIN

7F:MAX

00:Slow

7F:Fast

00:OFF

01:ON

00:OFF

01:ON

02:KneeControl

02:Slow

7F:Fast

00:Normal

24:TuneUP

00:OFF

01:ON

00:OFF

01:ON

[00-7F]

[00-0F]

[00-0D]

[00-7F]

[00]

[01]

[02]

[03]

[04]

[0B]

[1D]

[2B]

[40]

[55]

[63]

[75]

[00-7F]

[00]

[01]

[02-1A]

[00-54]

[3C-6C]

[00]

[01]

[00]

[01]

[02-7F]

[00-24]

[00]

[01]

[00]

[01]

[00-7F]

[00-0D]

[00-7F]

[00][05-7F]

[01]

[02]

[03]

[04]

[00-11]

[12-25]

[26-31]

[32-4E]

[4F-5A]

[5B-6E]

[6F-7F]

[00-7F]

[00]

[01-7F]

[00-7F]

[00]

[01-7F]

[00]

[01]

[02]

[00-7F]

[00]

[01-7F]

[00]

[01-7F]

Address Size Data Parameter Data Transmit Tx Range Rx Range RemarksReceive

Voice Section Parameters

Panel Voice Parameters

*5 EL MIDI Parameters

117

Appendix

00-01

00-04, 06, 07

40-42

48-4A

58-5B

60-62

68-69

1,2

00-05

00-7F

Effect Select

Reverb

Tr emolo

Symphonic

Delay

Flanger

Distortion

00:Preset

01:OFF

02:Tremolo

03:Symphonic

04:Delay

05:Flanger

06:Distortion

[00]

[01]

[02]

[03]

[04]

[05]

[06]

[00-7F]

[00][07-7F]

[01]

[02]

[03]

[04]

[05]

[06]

[00-7F]

Address Size Data Parameter Content Transmit Remarks

Effect Parameters (Voice Sections)

Tx Range Rx Range

Receive

Sustain On/Off

Length

Keyboard Percussion

Modes

Reverb

Tremolo

Symphonic

Delay

Flanger

Distortion

Pattern Assign Number

Pattern Select Number

Volume

Reverb Send Level

Auto Variation

Rhythm Balance

2nd Expression

Tempo Control

Footswitch Rhythm Mode

00:OFF

01:ON

00:Short

0C:Long

00:OFF

01:ON

00:Preset

01-08:UserAssign1-8

Pattern Numbers

Selector Switch Numbers

00:MIN

7F:MAX

00:MIN

7F:MAX

00:OFF

01:ON

00:Cymbal

40:Center

7F:Drums

00:OFF

01:ON

00:OFF

01:RhythmStop

02:Ending

03:FillIn

Address Size Data

Keyboard Parameters

Sustain Parameters

Rhythm

Rhythm Parameters

Keyboard Percussion Parameters

00-02

01-02

00-02

40-42

48-4A

58-5B

60-62

68-69

00-0B

1,2

00-01

00-0C

00-01

00-08

00-65

67-98

00-0B

00-7F

00-01

00-7F

00-01

00-03

[00]

[01]

[15-3D]

[00]

[01]

[00]

[01-08]

[00-7F]

[00-62]

[00-0B]

[00-7F]

[00]

[01]

[00-7F]

[00]

[01]

[00]

[01]

[02]

[03]

[00]

[01-7F]

[00-7F]

[00]

[01-7F]

[00]

[01-08]

[00-7F]

[00-62]

[00-0B]

[00-7F]

[00]

[01-7F]

[00-7F]

[00]

[01-7F]

[00][04-7F]

[01]

[02]

[03]

Effect Parameters (Keyboard)

Parameter Content Transmit

Tx Range Rx Range

RemarksReceive

Parameter Content Transmit

Tx Range Rx Range

RemarksReceive

Parameter Content Transmit

Tx Range Rx Range

RemarksReceive

Parameter Content Transmit

Tx Range Rx Range

RemarksReceive

118

Appendix

Rhythm Sequence03 00:OFF

01:ON

Rhythm Sequence Parameters

˛01 00-03 1 00-01 [00]

[01]

Ø [00]

[01-7F]

Parameter Content Transmit

Tx Range Rx Range

RemarksReceiveAddress Size Data

00:Type1

01:Type2

02:Type3

03:Type4

00:OFF

01:MUTE

00:MIN

7F:MAX

00:MIN

7F:MAX

00:OFF

01:SingleFinger

02:Fingerd

03:CustomABC

00:OFF

01:ON

00:OFF

01:ON

00:OFF

01:Close2Note

02:Close3Note

03:PassBOpen

00:OFF

01:ON

Address Size Data

Accompaniment Parameters

00-03

00-01

00-7F

00-03

00-01

00-03

00-01

Pattern Selector Number

Volume Mute

Volume

Reverb Send Level

A.B.C. Mode

Lower Memory

Pedal Memory

M.O.C. Mode

M.O.C. Knee Control

[00]

[01]

[02]

[03]

[00]

[01]

[00-7F]

[00]

[01]

[02]

[03]

[00]

[01]

[00]

[01]

[00]

[01]

[02]

[03]

[00]

[01]

[02]

[03]

[00]

[01-7F]

[00-7F]

[00][04-7F]

[01]

[02]

[03]

[00]

[01-7F]

[00]

[01-7F]

[00][04-7F]

[01]

[02]

[03]

[00]

[01-7F]

Parameter Content Transmit

Tx Range Rx Range

RemarksReceive

A.B.C. Parameters

M.O.C. Parameters

Address Size Data Parameter Content Transmit

Tx Range Rx Range

RemarksReceive

Parameter Content Transmit

Tx Range Rx Range

RemarksReceive

119

Appendix

00-01

3A-46

00-0B

00-03

3C-4F

00-04

34-4C

00-01

Address Size Data

Overall

System Parameters

Effect Parameters (Overall)

40-42

48-4A

58-5B

60-62

68-69

1,2

Disable

Transpose

2nd Expression Range

Footswitch Mode

Pitch

Glide Speed

Manual Balance

L.I.T.

Expression INT/EXT

Reverb

Tr emolo

Symphonic

Delay

Flanger

Distortion

00:OFF

01:ON

3A:KeyDown

40:Normal

46:KeyUp

01:100 ¢

0C:1200 ¢

00:OFF

01:Rhythm

02:Glide

03:Tremolo

3C:PitchDown

40:Normal

4F:PitchUp

01:Slow

05:Fast

34:Upper

40:Center

4C:Lower

00:Mode1

01:Mode2

00:Internal

01:External

[00]

[01]

[3A]

[40]

[46]

[01-0C]

[00]

[01]

[02]

[03]

[3C-4F]

[04-1C]

[34-4C]

[00]

[01]

[00]

[01]

[00-7F]

[00]

[01-7F]

[3A]

[40]

[46]

[01-0C]

[00][04-7F]

[01]

[02]

[03]

[3C-4F]

[00-7F]

[00]

[01]

[00][02-7F]

[01]

[00-7F]

Address Size Data

Parameter Content Transmit

Tx Range Rx Range

RemarksReceive

Parameter Content Transmit

Tx Range Rx Range

RemarksReceive

*6 External MDR

nn Command Transmit Receive

01 Play Start ˛ Ø

02 Play Stop ˛ Ø

03 Record Start ˛ Ø

04 Record Stop ˛ Ø

09 Rhythm Pointer Reset ˛ Ø

120

Appendix

TransmitFunction Receive Remarks

Basic Channel

Note Number

Velocity

After Touch

Pitch Bend

Control Change

Program Change

System Exclusive

System

Common

System

Real Time

Aux

Messages

Notes

Mode

Default

Changed

Note ON

Note OFF

Key's

Ch's

0, 32

1, 5, 7, 10

6, 38

96, 97

64-67

71-74

84, 91, 93, 94

98-99, 100-101

120, 121

True Voice

Clock

Commands

Local ON/OFF

All Notes OFF

Active Sense

Reset

Song Position

Song Select

Tune

1, 2, 3, 16 *

1-16

Ø 9nH, v=1-127

Ø 9nH, v=0

Ø *

************************

*10

Ch 1: UK; Ch 2: LK; Ch 3: PK; Ch 16: Control

Ch 1: UK; Ch 2: LK; Ch 3: PK; Ch 4: LEAD 1; Chs 5 - 14: XG; Ch 15: Keyboard

UK: 48 - 96; LK: 36 - 84; PK: 36 - 55

UK, LK, PK, LEAD 1: 36 - 96; XG: 0 - 127; Keyboard Percussion: 3 - 127

UK: UK Horizontal Touch; LK: LK Horizontal Touch

XG only

Control only

External Mode only

Control: 0 - 15, 112 - 116

UK, LK, PK, Control: 0 - 15, 112 - 116; XG: 0 - 127

Mode 3

************************

36-96 *

************************

1-3, 5-16 *

Ø 9nH, v=1-127

Ø 9nH, v=0, 8nH

Transmit with EL-100:

fixed to 80.

PK after touch with EL-100:

not transmit.

Ø *

6, 7

Ø *

Ø (123-127) *

Mode 3

0-127 *

Ø *

Bank Select

2nd Expression Pedal

Data Entry

Expression Pedal

Data Entry SW

Sound Controller

NRPN, RPN

(FAH, FCH)

Date:15. Nov. 2001

Version: 1.00

YAMAHA [Electone-EL mode] / Model: EL-100

Range

Default

Messages

Altered

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

Ø : YES

˛ : NO

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO

Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

MIDI Implementation Chart

121

Appendix

0, 32

1, 5, 7, 10

6, 38

96, 97

64-67

71-74

84, 91, 93, 94

98-99, 100-101

120, 121

True Voice

1, 2, 3, 16

1-16

Ø 9nH, v=1-127

Ø 9nH, v=0

Ø 0-15, 112-116

************************

*11

The same as the one in the EL Mode

Mode3

************************

36-96

************************

1-16

Ø 9nH, v=1-127

Ø 9nH, v=0, 8nH

Ø (123-127)

Mode 3

0-127

Bank Select

2nd Expression Pedal

Data Entry

Expression Pedal

Data Entry SW

Sound Controller

NRPN, RPN

Date:15. Nov. 2001

Version: 1.00

YAMAHA [Electone-XG mode] / Model: EL-100

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

Ø : YES

˛ : NO

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO

Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

Transmit with EL-100:

fixed to 80.

Transmit *

Function Receive Remarks

Basic Channel

Note Number

Velocity

After Touch

Pitch Bend

Control Change

Program Change

System Exclusive

System

Common

System

Real Time

Aux

Messages

Notes

Mode

Default

Changed

Note ON

Note OFF

Key's

Ch's

Clock

Commands

Local ON/OFF

All Notes OFF

Active Sense

Reset

Song Position

Song Select

Tune

Range

Default

Messages

Altered

122

Appendix

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

GENERAL OPERATION

A cracking noise is sometimes heard. Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or off,

or an electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the Electone.

If this occurs, plug the Electone into an electrical outlet located as far as

possible from the device that seems to be the source of the problem.

Interference from radio, TV, or other sources occurs. This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station, an

amateur ham radio setup or a mobile phone.

Electone generates some noise. A cell phone may be used in the proximity of Electone. Using a cell phone

beside the Electone may cause a noise. Turn off the power of the cell phone.

Radio or TV generates some noise. Locating a radio or TV close to the Electone causes to produce a noise from it.

Relocate it farther from the Electone.

The sound of the Electone causes surrounding Because the Electone is capable of producing powerful bass sounds, resonance

objects to resonate. may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass windows.

To avoid this, relocate the objects or lower the Electone’s volume.

Some of the lamps in the DISPLAY SELECT The lamp of TREMOLO (FAST) button is lit when turned on.

section do not light. The others momentarily flash when the function is selected.

The sound is too small even when the volume is ● The Master Volume may be set around the minimum position. Turn it

set to its maximum. clockwise.

● The Expression Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it down with your

toe.

The Electone panel does not function normally or This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to

the content of the memorized data has changed. electrical storms or other reasons may cause the Electone to malfunction and/or

alter the contents of memorized data. If this happens, turn the power off and

turn it back to on.

Pressing a certain panel button doesn’t open its When the Pattern Disk is inserted in the M.D.R., the LCD will

related LCD display. not change even if you press any buttons.

Eject the Disk and press the desired button again.

VOICES/RHYTHMS

Switching voices causes the volume to change, The volume of certain voices may seem lower than that of others. Adjust the

despite their having identical volume setting. balance of the sound with the volume control within the appropriate Voice

Condition display.

The pitch seems to be higher on the Pedalboard and You may feel it especially when playing piano voice. The temperament for the

lower on the Upper and Lower keyboards. acoustic piano is tuned by listening to the overtones since the overtone

configuration of the acoustic piano is so complicated that the actual notes in the

higher and lower registers are difficult to be adjusted. On the contrary, the

Electone voices including piano voice are tuned by actual notes. Thus, the

tuning method itself in the higher and lower registers is different.

Some voices seems to contain crack or distorted noise.

You may feel it mainly with wind instrument voices. These are purposely built

in effects, which can faithfully reproduce the characteristics of each instrument.

You can enjoy more realistic sounds such as brass vibration and breath noise.

When too many keys are pressed, not all of Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower

the notes sound. Keyboards) is 10 notes. The notes exceeding this limit may not be produced.

Only a note will be produced when pressing two The Lead and Pedal voices are designed to sound one note at a time. When you

keys or more on the Pedalboard and/or Lead voice. simultaneously press two or more keys, only the highest note will sound.

123

Appendix

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

VOICES/RHYTHMS

The volume of Upper keyboard is louder than that Manual Balance is wrongly set to the either side, Upper or Lower. Open the

of Lower keyboard, or vice versa. Voice Display by pressing the VOICE DISPLAY button in the DISPLAY

SELECT section, and select page 2 to display the Manual Balance. Then

change the balance between Upper keyboard and Lower keyboard.

Pedalboard doesn’t sound, even when its volume is ● One of the A.B.C. modes, Single Finger or Fingered Chord, is active. Set

properly set. the A.B.C. mode to off on A.B.C. page.

● The TO LOWER button in the Pedal Voice is turned on. Turn them off.

When keys on the Lower keyboard or pedalboard Keyboard Percussion function is set to on.

are pressed, the sounds of percussion instruments Turn the Keyboard Percussion off.

are also heard.

Even though a Dotted button’s rhythm has been Since the Dotted buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a

selected and started, the pattern does not sound. Pattern Disk pattern has not been saved to the selected Dotted button.

EFFECT

The Initial Touch function does not operate. Initial Touch setting in the Voice Condition is not high enough to get the effect.

Adjust the Initial Touch setting using the Voice Condition display.

The Reverb effect does not operate, even when The Reverb setting of the targeted voice group is set to 0. Raise the Reverb

Reverb parameters for the selected voice sections volume in the Voice Condition page 2 of the desired voice group.

are increased.

The Tremolo effect cannot be heard, even when the To get the Tremolo effect, you first need to select the Tremolo function in the

TREMOLO (FAST) button in the DISPLAY Voice Condition page 3 or Effect Set page.

SELECT section is on.

ACCOMPANIMENT

The pitch in the Single Finger mode does not Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a fixed octave

change, even when pressing different keys of interval on the Lower keyboard.

the keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed outside of that range, the chords

that are sounded will share the same pitch.

While an intro./Ending pattern is automatically Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the

playing, the Lower keyboard does not produce any Lower keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of

sound, even when the keys are played. an Intro./Ending pattern.

The Accompaniment cannot be heard even when The Accompaniment volume is set to 0 as the default. Be sure to raise the

an appropriate Accompaniment type is selected and Accompaniment volume on the rhythm condition page.

the rhythm has been started.

The harmony notes of the Melody On Chord The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead voices. Raise the volume

function cannot be heard. of Upper Keyboard voices (not Lead voice, in this case) high enough to get the

effect.

124

Appendix

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

REGISTRATION MEMORY

Certain functions have not been memorized to Some functions will not be memorized.

Registration Memory. (See page 67 for more information.)

An error occurs and the registration data is not Your operation may be wrong or the Write-protect tab of the floppy disk is set

recorded to M.D.R., when executing To Disk to on.

operation.

A simple beep sound is produced when I press the When the contents of the SEQ buttons are different from Electone’s default

Basic Regist. Button. settings (you may have loaded the sequence data from the upper models),

pressing one of the Basic Regist. buttons restores the original data and give a

simple beep sound to notify it.

MUSIC DISK RECORDER

Recording or playback cannot be performed. The PLAY or RECORD section buttons for selecting parts may be turned off.

Turn on the appropriate PLAY or RECORD buttons.

A total of 40 songs cannot be recorded. If some song numbers contain a large amount of recorded data, the disk may

not have enough available memory left to record the normal maximum of 40

songs. Check the remaining memory.

Recording is stopped before the performance is ● The amount of recorded data on the disk is close to the maximum limit.

finished, or the Song Copy function cannot be Either use another disk or delete the data of any unnecessary song number.

executed. ● The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of the

previously recorded parts. If you want to change the song length, first

delete the existing song and record again.

The rhythm does not start at the beginning of a The M.D.R. is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very

recording, or stops in the middle of the performance. beginning of a recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the

available memory display appears on the M.D.R. display.

The notes of the recording are “stuck” and sound During playback, you removed the disk by pressing the EJECT button.

continuously. Whenever you wish to stop playback, always press the STOP button.

125

Appendix

YAMAHA Electone

EL-100 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

Carefully read these instructions BEFORE assembling the Electone.

■ Precautions

Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction by following the procedures given

below.

Be sure to assemble the Electone with two or more people.

Don’t use the screws other than the ones specified and included in this package. Use of incorrect screws can cause

damage and malfunction.

Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly.

To disassemble, reverse the procedures.

You need a Phillips (+) screwdriver to assemble the Electone.

Open the package, take out two cardboard pads from the both sides of the package, and place the main unit on

top of the cardboard pads.

Position the pads not to directly contact the terminals equipped on the bottom of the main unit.

Take out all parts from the package.

Please confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are provided.

Bench Board

Bench

Legs: 4pcs.

Main Unit

Music

Stand

Dust Cover

Pedalboard Unit

Speaker

Unit

Grill Net

(Attached to the Speaker Unit)

Long/Yellow Screws (ø5X25mm): 4pcs.

Long/Black Screws (ø6X25mm): 4pcs.

Short/Black Screws (ø5X12mm): 8pcs.

Screw caps: 4pcs.

AC Power Cord

Pedalboard Cord Cramps: 2pcs.

Sideboard

(Left)

Sideboard

(Right)

126

Appendix

Mount the Sideboards onto the Pedalboard unit.

Be sure not to confuse the Right and Left Sideboards.

3-1 Raise the Pedalboard as shown in the illustration

below.

3-2 Position each screw hole on both the Pedalboard and

Sideboards as shown in the illustration and mount

the Sideboards onto the Pedalboard using the 4 Short/

black screws (2 screws on each Sideboard).

Short/black screws

while pushing the

Sideboard toward

the Pedalboard…

3-3 Stand the Pedalboard after securing the screws.

Mount the Speaker Unit onto the Sideboards.

4-1 Remove the Grill Net from the Speaker Unit.

4-2 Hold the Speaker unit horizontally (by 2 people) and

slide it, from the rear side, in place along the brackets.

Take care not to drop the Speaker unit or to pinch your

finger(s) between the Speaker unit and Sideboard.

4-2 While holding the Sideboard(s) to the Speaker unit, screw

the 4 Short/black screws, from the rear side, to fasten it

to the Sideboards. Cover 4 screw holes on the rear

side with the 4 screw caps.

4-3 Also, use the 4 Long/yellow screws to secure it.

Long/yellow screws

Short/black

screws

Screw caps

Short/black screws

while pushing

the Sideboard

toward the

Speaker unit...

while pushing

the Sideboard

toward the

Speaker unit...

Mount the Main Unit.

5-1 As shown in the illustration, hold the Main unit

horizontally (by 2 people), and place it on the rear

side of the Speaker unit, then slide it to the front side.

Hook the guide screw,

protruding from the

bottom of the Main

unit, here.

Make sure to center the main unit to produce equal

clearance on the left and right sides.

Take care not to drop the Main unit or to pinch your

finger(s) between the Speaker unit and Main unit.

127

Appendix

5-2 Use the 4 Long/black screws to fasten the Main unit

to the Sideboards as shown in the illustration.

Long/black

screws

Long/black

screws

Fit the Grill Net onto the Speaker.

First, align the bottom line and then fix it.

Hook up the Grill Net by

inserting the protrudents

into the holes.

Connect the Pedalboard cord and Speaker cord

to the Main Unit.

Make sure that the latches on each plug of the cords

face to your side and that you connect them to each

socket securely.

Speaker

cord

Pedalboard

cord

Fix the Pedalboard cord to the Sideboard using

the Pedalboard cord Cramps.

8-1 Stick the 2 Pedalboard cord cramps to the rear side of

the Left Sideboard as shown in the illustration.

8-2 Fix the Pedalboard cord in the cramps.

Shut the cramp

after inserting

the cord.

128

Appendix

Connect the AC Power Cord plug to the AC Inlet

of the Main Unit.

Place the Music Stand.

Turn on the Electone’s power switch and confirm

that the Electone can be played, or that the

assembly is successful.

BENCH ASSEMBLY

Reverse the bench board and place one of the legs to the

corner of the bench board, then tighten the nut using the

included wrench. Be sure to put the washer between the

leg and the bench board.

leg

bench

board

nut

washer

■ After completing the assembly, please check the following

items.

• Are there any parts left over?

ﬁ Review all assembly procedures.

• Is the Electone clear of doors and other movable

fixtures?

ﬁ Move the Electone to an appropriate location.

• Does the Electone make a rattling noise when you

shake it?

ﬁ Tighten all screws.

• Can the Electone be turned on?

ﬁ Confirm that the AC power cord plug is securely

connected to the Electone’s AC Inlet and the other

side of the cord is connected to an appropriate power

outlet.

• Does the Electone produce sounds?

ﬁ Confirm that the Speaker cord plug and the Pedalboard

cord plug are securely connected to each socket on

the Main unit.

If the Electone creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you

play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly instructions and

tighten all screws again.

129

Appendix

EL-100 Specifications

KEYBOARD Upper: 49 keys (C – C), Lower: 49 keys (C – C), Pedal: 20 keys (C – G)

Initial Touch Upper 1, 2, Lead, Lower 1, 2, Pedal 1, 2 (Available only when it is played by external MIDI control)

VOICE Tone Generation AWM

Upper Keyboard Voice Strings 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, Pizz. Strings, Tremolo Strings, Synth. Strings 1, 2, 3; Brass 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,

Lower Keyboard Voice Synth. Brass 1, 2, 3; Clarinet 1, 2, Bass Clarinet, Synth. Clarinet 1, 2; Saxophone 1, 2,

Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Soprano Sax., Sax. Ensemble 1, 2, Synth. Sax, Synth. Lead 1, 2, 3, 4, 5; Chorus 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,

Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Vocal; Organ 1, 2, 3, 4, Jazz Organ 1, 2, 3, 4, Pop Organ 1, 2, Theatre Organ 1, 2, Accordion,

Bandoneon; Piano 1, 2, Honky Tonk, Elec. Piano 1, 2, 3, Harpsichord, Clavi., Clavichord;

Guitar 1, 2, 3, 12 String Guitar, Banjo, Mandolin, Sitar, Shamisen, Elec. Guitar 1, 2,

Muted Guitar, Distortion Guitar, Harp, Steel Guitar, Koto, Taisho Koto; Vibraphone,

Glockenspiel, Celesta, Music Box, Marimba, Xylophone, Chime, Synth. Chime, Steel Drum;

Cosmic 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16; Tutti 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7;

[Upper] Harmonica 1, 2; [Lower] Horn 1, 2, 3, 4, Muted Horn; 2 Dotted Buttons;

[Upper] 115 Voices; [Lower] 118 Voices; Volume Fine

Lead Voice Violin 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Pizz. Violin, Cello, Kokyu; Flute 1, 2, Piccolo, Yokobue, Recorder, Ocarina,

Pan Flute, Shakuhachi, Whistle; Oboe 1, 2, English Horn, Bassoon 1, 2;

Trumpet 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, Muted Trumpet, Trombone 1, 2, Muted Trombone, Flugel Horn,

Euphonium; To Lower; Dotted Button; 34 Voices; Volume Fine

Pedalboard Voice Contrabass 1, 2, 3, Pizz. Bass, Upright Bass; Elec. Bass 1, 2, 3, 4, Synth. Bass 1, 2, 3; Organ

Pedalboard Voice 2 Bass 1, 2, 3, 4; Tuba, Timpani, Timpani Roll; To Lower; Dotted Button; 19 Voices; Volume Fine

Voice Display Upper 1, 2; Lower 1, 2; Lead; Pedal 1, 2; Manual Balance

EFFECT/ Digital Reverb 3 Types: Room, Hall, Church; Length; Depth; Volume: Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead,

CONDITION

Pedal 1, 2, Accompaniment, Percussion

Sustain Upper, Lower, Pedal: Length

Tremolo/Chorus Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead, Pedal 1, 2, Tremolo (Fast): Speed; Chorus: Slow, Stop

Symphonic/Celeste Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead, Pedal 1, 2; Mode: Symphonic/Celeste

Vibrato

Upper

1, 2

, Lower

1, 2

, Lead, Pedal

1, 2

: Preset/User (Delay, Depth, Speed)

Delay Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead, Pedal 1, 2; Control: Time, Feedback, Balance; Mode: Mono,

Stereo 1, 2, 3

Flanger Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead, Pedal 1, 2; Control: Speed, Feedback, Depth

Distortion Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead, Pedal 1, 2; Control: Level, Hi-pass

Glide Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead; Control: Time

Lead Slide On/Off; Control: Time

Lead Tune Tune Control

Panning Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead, Pedal 1, 2; (7 positions)

Feet Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead, Pedal 1, 2; Preset 2' (Pedal Voices only)/4'/8'/16'

130

Appendix

RHYTHM Rhythms March 1, 2, 3, Polka 1, 2, Country 1, 2, Broadway, Baroque; Waltz 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,

Jazz Waltz 1, 2, 3, Bolero; Swing 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, Jazz Ballad, Dixieland 1, 2; Bounce 1, 2, 3,

Reggae 1, 2; Slow Rock 1, 2, 3; Tango 1, 2, 3; Chacha, Rhumba, Beguine; Mambo, Salsa,

Samba 1, 2, 3, Bossanova 1, 2, 3; 8Beat 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Dance Pop 1, 2, 3, 4; 16Beat 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,

Funk 1, 2, 3; User 1-8 (A-D); 2 Dotted Buttons; 66 Rhythms; Volume Fine

Variations Fill-In; Intro. Ending; Lead In; Auto Variation: On/Off

Others Start; Synchro Start; Tempo; Bar/Beat LED; Condition: Reverb, Balance, Volume

Rhythm Sequence On/Off, Sequence 1 - 4

KEYBOARD PERCUSSION Lower, Pedal On/Off: Lower Preset, Pedal Preset, User 1- 8; Copy: LK Preset, PK Preset,

User; Assign: 120 Instruments, Clear

ACCOMPANIMENT

Auto Bass Chord Mode: Off; Single Finger; Fingered Chord; Custom A.B.C.; Memory: Lower, Pedal

Accompaniments Type 1, 2, 3, 4, All Off, Volume, Reverb

MELODY ON CHORD Mode: Off, 1, 2, 3

BASIC REGISTRATION 1 - 5

REGISTRATION MEMORY M./To Disk, 1 - 8; Disable Button; Registration shift

MUSIC DISK RECORDER Play/Record: Upper, Lower, Pedal, Lead, Keyboard Percussion, Control; Pause, Stop, Fast Forward/

Reverse, Song Select, Shift, Custom Play, Tempo; Format, Read & Auto Increment, Song Repeat; Song

Delete; Song Copy: From/To; Disk Copy, Punch in Recording, XG Song Playback, XG Easy Converter,

Song Name, Pattern Disk, Remaining Memory; LED Display; Eject

FOOT SWITCH

Left Mode: Off; Rhythm (Stop, Ending, Fill-In); Glide (Upper 1, 2/Lower 1, 2/Lead; Time);

Tremolo/Chorus

Right Regist. Shift Mode: Off, Shift, Jump, User (80 Positions; Cursor Controls: Data: Insert, Delete;

Shift End: Stop, Top, Next Song)

TRANSPOSE/PITCH Transpose: -6 - +6; Pitch: 438.8Hz - 444.5Hz

LCD DISPLAY 20 x 2 Character

LANGUAGE English, Japanese

OTHER CONTROLS Power On/Off; Exp. Pedal (Right/Left Footswitches); Pitch Control; Transpose; Master Volume;

Display Select; Data Controls; Page; MIDI (Output: Upper, Lower, Pedal; Int./Ext.: Lead, Sync.,

Exp.)

OTHER FITTINGS

Dust Cover; Music Stand; Bench; Headphone Jack; Aux In/Out (RCA; R/L); MIDI In/Out; To Host;

Host Select

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Pattern Disk; HPE-170 Headphones; 3.5" Floppy Disks

SOUND SYSTEM

Power Amplifiers 40W (Stereo)

Speakers 16cm x 2; 5cm x 2

DIMENSIONS (W x D x H) 112.3cm x 48.2cm x 92.5cm (111.1cm with Music Stand)

[Bench] 59.5cm x 29.5cm x 58.0cm

WEIGHT 55.0kg

[Bench] 6.2kg

Specifications and description in this Owner's Manual are information purposes only.

Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice.

As specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with Yamaha dealer.

131

Appendix

A.B.C. ............................................................ 52

A.B.C./M.O.C. .......................................... 52, 64

ACC. Reverb ................................................. 55

Accompaniment ...................................... 45, 54

Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) ............................. 52

Auto Varietion (Rhythm) ................................ 48

AUX. OUT .................................................... 104

Balance (Delay) ............................................. 37

Balance (Rhythm) ......................................... 48

BAR/BEAT ..................................................... 47

BASIC REGlST. ............................................. 11

Celeste ........................................................... 35

Characteristics of Each Delay Type ............. 37

Chord ............................................................. 53

Chorus ..................................................... 35, 42

Church (Reverb) ............................................ 40

Clear (Keyboard Percussion) ....................... 59

Control data ................................................... 78

Copy/LK PRESET (Keyboard Percussion) ... 62

Copy/PK PRESET (Keyboard Percussion) ... 63

Copy/USER (Keyboard Percussion) ............. 63

Copy Protect ................................................. 95

Cursor Controls (Registration Shift) .............. 71

Custom A.B.C. ............................................... 52

CUSTOM PLAY .............................................. 88

D. (Disable) ................................................... 68

DATA CONTROL ........................................... 14

Data Controls (Registration Shift) ................. 72

Delay (Effect) ........................................... 32, 36

Delay (Vibrato) .............................................. 33

Delete (Registration Shift) ............................. 72

Depth (Flanger) ............................................. 38

Depth (Reverb) .............................................. 40

Depth (Vibrato) .............................................. 33

Disk Copy ...................................................... 92

DISPLAY SELECT ...................................... 9, 20

Distortion ................................................. 32, 39

Dotted button (Rhythm) ................................ 49

Dotted button (Voice) .................................... 21

Effect ........................................................ 29, 32

EFFECT SET .................................................. 34

Eject ............................................................... 73

ENDlNG ......................................................... 46

EXP. (Expression) ....................................... 100

Expression Pedal .................................. 11, 100

Index

Fast Forward (M.D.R.) ................................... 88

Fast Reverse (M.D.R.) ................................... 88

Feedback (Delay) ......................................... 36

Feedback(Flanger) ....................................... 38

Feet ................................................................ 30

Fill In .............................................................. 47

Fingered Chord ............................................. 52

Flanger ..................................................... 32, 38

Floppy Disk .................................................... 73

FOOT SW. ...................................................... 97

FORMAT ........................................................ 75

Glide (Footswitch) ......................................... 98

Group (Keyboard Percussion) ...................... 59

Hall (Reverb) ................................................. 40

HEADPHONES ............................................ 104

“hidden” voices ............................................. 27

Hi Pass (Distortion) ....................................... 39

HOST SELECT ............................................. 104

Initial Touch ................................................... 30

Insert .............................................................. 72

Instrument Names (Keyboard Percussion) .. 59

Internal/External (MIDI IN) .......................... 103

INTRO. ENDING ............................................ 46

Jump (Registration Shift) .............................. 70

KEYBOARD PERCUSSION ........................... 56

Language ...................................................... 16

LCD Display .................................................. 13

LEAD (MIDI) ................................................ 103

LEAD IN ......................................................... 46

LEAD VOlCE .................................................. 17

LED Display ................................................... 75

Left Footswitch .............................................. 97

Length (Reverb) ............................................ 40

Level (Distortion) ........................................... 39

Lower (MIDI OUT) ....................................... 102

LOWER KEYBOARD VOlCE .......................... 17

LOWER KEYBOARD VOlCE 2 ...................... 18

M./TO DISK .................................................... 67

M.BAL ............................................................ 20

MASTER VOLUME ........................................ 11

Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) ........................... 64

Memory (Lower/Pedal) .................................. 53

Metronome .................................................... 66

MIDI ..................................................... 102, 105

MIDI IN ......................................................... 103

MIDI IN/OUT ................................................ 104

MIDI OUT ..................................................... 102

Mode (Chorus) .............................................. 44

Mode (Delay) ................................................. 37

Mode (M.O.C.) .............................................. 65

Music Disk Recorder (M.D.R.) ...................... 73

Mute (XG) ...................................................... 86

Next Song (Shift End) ................................... 71

PAGE ............................................................. 14

Panning .......................................................... 31

PART (XG) ..................................................... 86

Pattern Disk ................................................... 94

PAUSE (M.D.R.) ............................................ 88

Pedal (MIDI OUT) ........................................ 102

PEDAL VOICE ............................................... 17

PEDAL VOICE 2 ............................................ 18

Performance data ......................................... 78

Pitch ............................................................. 101

PITCH/MIDI .......................................... 101, 102

PLAY .............................................................. 76

Playback (M.D.R.) ......................................... 84

POSITION (Registration Shift) ...................... 71

POWER .......................................................... 10

Preset (Effect) ................................................ 32

Preset (Keyboard Percussion) ...................... 56

Preset (Vibrato) ............................................. 33

Preset Keyboard Percussion ........................ 57

PRESET/USER (Vibrato) ................................ 33

Punch-in Recording ...................................... 81

Read and Auto Increment (M.D.R.) .............. 88

RECORD ........................................................ 76

Recording Registrations ............................... 82

Registration data ........................................... 78

Registration Memory ..................................... 67

REGlST. SHlFT .............................................. 69

Remaining Memory (M.D.R.) ........................ 94

Repeat playback ........................................... 85

Retry .............................................................. 77

REVERB ......................................................... 40

Reverb (Rhythm) ........................................... 48

Reverb (Voice Condition) ........................ 31, 40

RHYTHM ........................................................ 45

Rhythm (Footswitch) ..................................... 98

Rhythm Condition .......................................... 48

Rhythm Menu ................................................ 51

Rhythm Sequence ......................................... 66

Right Footswitch ............................................ 69

Room (Reverb) .............................................. 40

132

Appendix

Selecting Voice Group .................................. 35

SEQ. ............................................................... 66

Set (Keyboard Percussion) ........................... 59

SHIFT ............................................................. 75

Shift (Registration Shift) ................................ 70

Shift End ........................................................ 71

Single Finger ................................................. 52

Slide ............................................................... 34

Slide Time ...................................................... 34

SOLO (XG) .................................................... 86

Song Copy ..................................................... 90

Song Delete ................................................... 92

SONG REPEAT .............................................. 85

SONG SELECT .............................................. 75

SPEED (Flanger) ........................................... 38

SPEED (Tremolo) ........................................... 44

SPEED (Vibrato) ............................................ 33

START ............................................................ 46

STOP (Footswitch) ........................................ 98

STOP (M.D.R.) ............................................... 77

STOP (Shift End) ........................................... 71

Sustain ........................................................... 41

Symphonic ............................................... 32, 35

SYNC.(MIDI IN) ........................................... 103

SYNCHRO START ......................................... 46

TEMPO ........................................................... 47

Tempo (M.D.R.) ............................................. 89

Time (Delay) .................................................. 36

TO HOST ..................................................... 104

TO LOWER .................................................... 21

Top (Shift End) .............................................. 71

Transpose .................................................... 101

Tremolo (Effect) ................................. 32, 35, 42

TREMOLO (FAST) ......................................... 44

Tremolo (Footswitch) ..................................... 99

Tune ............................................................... 34

Type (Accompaniment) ................................ 55

Type (Reverb) ............................................... 40

Upper (MIDI OUT) ....................................... 102

UPPER KEYBOARD VOlCE ........................... 17

UPPER KEYBOARD VOlCE 2 ....................... 18

User (Registration Shift) ................................ 71

User Keyboard Percussion ........................... 58

User rhythm ................................................... 50

User voice (Voice) ......................................... 22

Vibrato ........................................................... 33

Voice .............................................................. 17

Voice Condition ............................................. 30

Voice Control ................................................. 29

VOICE DISPLAY ...................................... 17, 20

Voice Menu .............................................. 18, 23

Voice section ................................................. 17

Volume (Rhythm) ........................................... 48

Volume (Voice Condition) ............................. 31

Volume (XG) .................................................. 86

Volume (Accompaniment) ............................ 55

Volume balance ............................................ 20

Write-protect tab ........................................... 74

XG .............................................................. 4, 86

XG Easy Converter ........................................ 87

XG Song Playback ........................................ 86

133

Appendix

134

Appendix

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below.

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

MEXICO

Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,

Departamento de ventas

Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del

Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.

Tel: 686-00-33

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.

Av. Reboucas 2636, Sao Paulo, Brasil

Tel: 011-853-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha de Panamá S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha de Panamá S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanizacion

Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: 507-269-5311

AFRICA

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2312

MIDDLE EAST

* Except Turky and Cyprus

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone

P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.

Tel: 971-4-881-5868

ASIA

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F

23-8 Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3770-0661

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-703-0900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,

Singapore

Tel: 65-747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,

Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2713-8999

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,

Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,

Bangkok 10320, Thailand

Tel: 02-641-2951

THE PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2317

HEAD OFFICE

Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2317

[EL] 23

M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

Printed in Indonesia

Yamaha Manual Library (English versions only)

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

V788820 ???MW???.?-01A0

Transcripción de documentos

PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Use only the supplied power cord/plug. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality Do not open • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. Assembly • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. 2 • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. (1)B-7 1/2 Location • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/ one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. Using the bench (If included) Connections • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Maintenance • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Handling caution • Do not place the bench in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. Saving data Saving and backing up your data • All panel settings and Registration Memories are lost when you turn off the power to the instrument. If you want to keep the settings, save the data to a floppy disk (see page 67). • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. Backing up the floppy disk • To protect against data loss through media damage, we recommend that you save your important data onto two floppy disks. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. (1)B-7 2/2 3 Congratulations! You are the proud owner of a fine electronic organ, Electone EL-100. The Yamaha EL-100 Electone combines the most advanced AWM tone generation technology with state-of-the-art digital electronics and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical enjoyment. In order to make the most of the Electone and extensive performance potential, we urge you to read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described. Keep the manual in a safe place for later reference. Included Items Owner’s Manual Music Stand Dust Cover Bench Turning the Electone off erases all panel settings you have made. When the Electone is turned on, Basic Registration 1 is automatically selected. GM (General MIDI System Level 1) is an addition to the MIDI standard that ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible tone generator, regardless of maker. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support the General MIDI standard. XG is a new MIDI format created by Yamaha that significantly improves and expands upon the General MIDI standard by providing a greater variety of high-quality voices plus considerably enhanced effect operation – while being fully compatible with GM. • The screen displays and illustrations as shown in this owner’s manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • Copying of the commercially available music sequence data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • The company names and product names in this Owner’s manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. • This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, styles files, MIDI files, WAVE data and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. 4 Table of Contents Main Features ............................... 6 Panel Layout ................................. 7 EL-100 Panel Layout .......................................................... 8 5 Registration Memory .............. 67 1 2 3 4 Storing Registrations ......................................... 67 Selecting Registrations ...................................... 68 Saving the Registration Data to Disk .............. 68 Registration Shift ............................................... 69 1 Quick Introductory Guide 2 Voice Sections 3 Voice Controls and Effects 4 Rhythm and Accompaniment 5 Registration Memory 6 Music Disk Recorder (M.D.R.) 7 Footswitches and Expression Pedal 8 Transpose and Pitch Controls 9 MIDI 1 Quick Introductory Guide ........ 10 1 2 3 4 Getting Started ................................................... 10 Basic Registrations ............................................. 11 Basic Operation .................................................. 12 LCD DISPLAY ................................................... 13 2 Voice Sections ......................... 17 1 2 3 4 Voice Display ....................................................... 17 Selecting Voices from the Panel ........................ 18 Selecting Voices from the Dotted Buttons ....... 21 Voice Menus ........................................................ 23 3 Voice Controls and Effects ....... 29 1 Selecting from Voice Condition Pages ............. 30 (PAGE 1) .............................................................. 30 1 Initial Touch .................................................... 30 2 Feet .................................................................. 30 (PAGE 2) .............................................................. 31 1 Volume ............................................................. 31 2 Panning ............................................................ 31 3 Reverb .............................................................. 31 (PAGE 3) .............................................................. 32 1 Effect ............................................................... 32 (PAGE 4) .............................................................. 33 1 Vibrato ............................................................. 33 (PAGE 5) .............................................................. 34 2 1 Tune ................................................................. 34 2 Slide ................................................................. 34 Selecting from Effect Set Page ......................... 34 3 1 Tremolo/Chorus .............................................. 35 2 Symphonic/Celeste ......................................... 35 3 Delay ................................................................ 36 4 Flanger ............................................................. 38 5 Distortion ......................................................... 39 Selecting from the Panel .................................... 40 6 Music Disk Recorder (M.D.R.) .. 73 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Precautions on M.D.R. ...................................... 73 Formatting a Disk .............................................. 75 Recording ............................................................ 76 Recording Registrations (and Bulk Data) ...... 82 Recalling Recorded Registrations (and Bulk Data) .................................................. 83 Replacing Registrations .................................... 83 Playback .............................................................. 84 Other Functions .................................................. 88 7 Footswitches and Expression Pedal .................... 97 1 2 Footswitch ........................................................... 97 Expression Pedal .............................................. 100 8 Transpose and Pitch Controls 101 9 MIDI ...................................... 102 10 Accessory Jacks and Controls .... 104 11 Appendix ............................. 105 MIDI .......................................................................... 105 MIDI Data Format .................................................. 111 MIDI Implementation Chart ................................. 120 Troubleshooting ....................................................... 122 EL-100 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS ................ 125 EL-100 Specifications .............................................. 129 Index .......................................................................... 131 1 Reverb .............................................................. 40 2 Sustain ............................................................. 41 3 Tremolo/Chorus .............................................. 42 4 Rhythm and Accompaniment .. 45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Selecting Rhythms from the Panel ................... 45 Rhythm Condition Pages .................................. 48 Dotted Buttons and User Rhythms .................. 49 Rhythm Menus ................................................... 51 Automatic Accompaniment Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) ................................ 52 Accompaniment Controls ................................. 54 Preset/User Keyboard Percussion .................... 56 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) ............................. 64 10 11 Accessory Jacks and Controls Appendix The Index on page 131 can be of your help in finding the functions and terms. 5 Main Features 1 Astoundingly True-to-life Sounds The new AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generation technologies combined with authentic touch response make this Electone a truly expressive musical instrument. You can enjoy playing a total of 173 AWM voices using the touch response function. 2 Wide Variety of High Quality Effects Electone voices can also be enhanced with a full range of high-quality digital effects, ranging from Tremolo and Reverb to Flanger, Delay and Distortion. Stereo panning is independent of effect on/off status. (page 34) 3 Dynamic Rhythm Patterns and Programmable Percussion Sounds The Rhythm section of the Electone features authentic drum and percussion sounds, used by expert rhythm programmers in creating a total of 66 rhythm patterns, ranging across all styles of music. (page 45) The Keyboard Percussion function lets you play 120 different percussion sounds, each of which can be assigned onto any key. (page 56) 4 Convenient Registration Functions The Basic Registrations let you instantly change the voices for playing any styles of music. (page 11) Also, Registration Memory Function lets you set up and record your own Electone settings, and call up them in the middle of the performance. (page 67) 5 Versatile Functions of the Music Disk Recorder The Electone also features a Music Disk Recorder (MDR) for recording your registrations and performances to a floppy disk. In addition, the MDR allows you to copy a song from a disk to another, duplicate a disk, and play commercially available XG song data. (page 73) 6 LCD for Systematic and Intuitive Operation The systematic and intuitive LCD allows you to smoothly understand almost all the Electone operation. 6 Panel Layout Music Stand Upper Keyboard Front Panel (pages 8-9) Lower Keyboard MIDI Jacks (page 104) Jacks (page 104) Right-Footswitch (page 69) Speaker Unit Left-Footswitch (page 97) Expression Pedal (page 11) Pedalboard 7 EL-100 Panel Layout UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE (page 17) LEAD VOICE (page 17) PEDAL VOICE (page 17) LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE (page 17) MAX STRINGS BRASS CLARINET SAXOPHONE CHORUS HARMONICA ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRAPHONE COSMIC TUTTI MIN VIOLIN FLUTE OBOE TRUMPET MAX TO LOWER MIN SUSTAIN MIN PEDAL VOICE LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE UPPER LOWER MAX PEDAL STRINGS BRASS CLARINET SAXOPHONE CHORUS HORN ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRAPHONE COSMIC TUTTI ¨⁄String Ò⁄String BASIC REGIST. LEAD VOICE UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE REVERB (page 40) MAX CONTRA BASS ELEC. BASS ORGAN BASS TUBA MIN MAX TO LOWER MIN RHYTHM RHYTHM (page 45) SEQ. 1 SEQ. 2 MARCH WALTZ SWING BOUNCE SLOW ROCK SEQ. 3 SEQ. 4 TANGO LATIN 1 LATIN 2 8 BEAT 16 BEAT MAX MIN KEYBOARD PERCUSSION RHYTHM BAR / BEAT INTRO. ENDING LOWER KEYBOARD PERCUSSION (page 56) SYNCHRO START START TEMPO PEDAL FILL IN BAR / BEAT TEMPO (page 47) 8 LCD Display (page 13) DATA CONTROL REVERB SUSTAIN (page 41) DATA CONTROL (page 14) BAR/BEAT (page 47) BAR/BEAT/TEMPO (page 47) RHYTHM (page 46) BASIC REGIST. (page 11) DISPLAY SELECT (page 15) A.B.C./M.O.C. Button (pages 52, 64) EFFECT SET Button (page 34) VOICE DISPLAY Button (page 20) DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY EFFECT SET A.B.C. M.O.C. FOOT SW. REGIST. SHIFT PITCH MIDI PAGE (page 14) TREMOLO (FAST) TREMOLO (FAST) Button (page 44) PITCH/MIDI Button (pages 101, 102) REGIST. SHIFT Button (page 69) FOOT SW. Button (page 97) M./TO DISK (page 67) Registration Memory (page 67) D. (Disable) (page 68) MASTER VOLUME DISPLAY SELECT DATA CONTROL PAGE VOICE DISPLAY EFFECT SET A.B.C. M.O.C. REGISTRATION MEMORY s1ÎViolin1 ⁄ s1∏⁄ContBs.1 M. / TO DISK FOOT SW. REGIST. SHIFT PITCH MIDI TREMOLO (FAST) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MASTER VOLUME (page 11) D. RECORD UPPER SONG REPEAT PAUSE LOWER PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL STOP PLAY SHIFT MUSIC DISK RECORDER (page 73) SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER POWER POWER (page 10) Floppy Disk Slot LED (Lamp in-use) Eject 9 1 Quick Introductory Guide 1 Getting Started 1 Plug the power cord in to an appropriate electrical outlet. 2 Turn on the Electone by pressing the POWER switch. Only use the voltage specified as correct for the Electone. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the Electone. Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage, please consult with a qualified technician. POWER When you turn on the Electone, the following displays will appear one after the other on the LCD display: YAMAHA Electone ¨⁄Strings1ÎViolin1 ⁄ Ò⁄Strings1∏⁄ContBs.1 This last display, Voice Display, shows you the currently assigned voice settings for each voice section. When the Electone is turned on, Basic Registration 1 is automatically selected. 10 3 Set the MASTER VOLUME control. The MASTER VOLUME control is an overall control which affects the volume of the entire instrument. 1 MASTER VOLUME Quick Introductory Guide 4 Press the Expression pedal down with your foot. Once you have set the MASTER VOLUME control to a suitable level, you can use the Expression pedal to change the volume with your foot as you play. Louder Softer BASIC REGIST. 2 Basic Registrations “Registration” indicates a panel setting including upper keyboard voices, lower keyboard voices, pedal voices, a rhythm and so on. The Basic Registration section has five factory preset registrations, each with a different set of voices for Upper/Lower keyboards and Pedalboard and each specially suited for playing in a different music style. To select Basic Registrations: Press the BASIC REGIST. buttons to select each Basic Registration. When you turn the power on, the Electone automatically selects Basic Registration 1. Basic Basic Basic Basic Basic Registration 1 Registration 2 Registration 3 Registration 4 Registration 5 NOTE: Upper Keyboard Voice Strings 1 Brass 1 Flute 1 Cosmic 1 Synth. Brass 1 Lower Keyboard Voice Strings 1 Horn1 Piano 1 Cosmic 2 Cosmic 3 Pedal Voice Contra Bass1 Tuba Contra Bass 1 Cosmic 2 Synth. Bass 1 Additional basic registrations are preset on the Registration Memory locations from 1 to 8. See page 67 for the details. Turning the Electone off erases all panel settings you have made. When the Electone is turned on, Basic Registration 1 is automatically selected. 11 3 Basic Operation 1 Quick Introductory Guide Registration Set-up Select the keyboard to play Select the voice (Voice Menu) Select the rhythm (Rhythm Menu) Finely adjust the voice (Voice Condition) Finely adjust the rhythm (Rhythm Condition) * The Controls and Effects may be applied differently depending on the selected type of Controls and Effects. See page 29 for more information. Add effects (Effect Set) Add reverb Adjust the total volume (Master Volume) Playing Electone Setting Registration Shift/Footswitch Saving the registration data Recording the performance Music Disk Recorder Expression Pedal Playing back 12 Loading the registration data 4 LCD DISPLAY 1 Quick Introductory Guide This section introduces you the convenient control functions of the LCD display. The LCD display lets you see at a glance the current settings and provides easy-to-understand graphic representation of all parameters. Selecting a voice/rhythm 1 Press the panel voice/rhythm button which you want to use (For example, press the STRINGS button in the Upper Keyboard Voice section). UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE STRINGS BRASS CLARINET SAXOPHONE CHORUS HARMONICA ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRAPHONE COSMIC TUTTI MAX MIN The following display will appear, showing all the available voices/ rhythms in the category (Strings Category in this case). DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL Strings1 Strings2 Pizz.Strs Syn.Strs1 2 Press the Data Control button corresponding to the voice you want to play (Strings 2 in this case). DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL Strings1 Strings2 Pizz.Strs Syn.Strs1 The first letter of the selected voice/rhythm will start blinking. For more information on the Voice Menu list see page 23. 13 Function of the Data Control Buttons 1 DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL Quick Introductory Guide Strings1 Strings2 Pizz.Strs Syn.Strs1 1 1 2 DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL VOL.:24 PAN:C ¨1¤ REVERB:24 2 DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL EFFECT:SYMPHONIC ¨1‹ ”SYMPHONIC ’CELESTE 3 3 DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <R.SHIFT>[INS][DEL]¤ T_ ?????????????????? Cursor 4 4 The Data Control buttons are used to select 1 a voice/rhythm or function shown on the display. Each pair of buttons corresponding to the section of the display directly above it increases/decreases 2 the value or chooses 3 a setting/function. When you are setting the Registration Shift, each of them moves the cursor 4 to the right/left. Using Page Buttons DATA CONTROL pages DATA CONTROL ¨⁄Strings1ÎViolin1 ⁄ Ò⁄Strings1∏⁄ContBs.1 These buttons 5 are used to select (when available) the various ‘pages’ of the display, the names of which appear at the top right of the LCD. Use Page F to select the next page, and Page E to select the previous page. 14 PAGE 5 Summary of the LCD Operation 1 The following chart gives you a general view of the basic operations on the Electone. Quick Introductory Guide 1. To call up the LCD display 2) Pressing a Display Select button 1) Pressing Panel Buttons ● Selecting voices or setting up the Voice Condition ● Selecting rhythms or setting up the Rhythm Condition ● Setting the Reverb effect ● Setting the Sustain ● Setting the User Keyboard Percussion ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Displaying Voice Display (Manual Balance) Setting effects Setting A.B.C./M.O.C. Setting the Left-Footswitch Setting Registration Shift (Right-Footswitch) Setting Pitch and Transpose Setting MIDI Selecting and setting Tremolo/Chorus LCD display 2. To Select Pages Selecting the page you want to use with the Page buttons 3. To Actually Change the Settings Using the Data Control buttons to: ● Select voices/rhythms/effects ● Turn on/off the Accompaniment and A.B.C. Memory ● Adjust Initial Touch and Reverb depth ● Move the pan position and cursor position 15 Language on the LCD 1 LCD display can be shown in two languages, English and Japanese. Quick Introductory Guide How to select the language: 1. Press the VOICE DISPLAY button in the DISPLAY SELECT section. The page 1 will be displayed. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY EFFECT SET A.B.C. M.O.C. FOOT SW. REGIST. SHIFT PITCH MIDI TREMOLO (FAST) DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL ¨⁄Strings1ÎViolin1 ⁄ Ò⁄Strings1∏⁄ContBs.1 2. Press the PAGE button to select the page 3. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <v(4∂/Display> ‹ ’i-y∫ ”English 3. Pressing each pair of Page buttons at the bottom select the language: the right ones select English and the left ones select Japanese. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <v(4∂/Display> ‹ ’i-y∫ ”English 16 PAGE 2 Voice Sections The EL-100 features 173 different high quality AWM voices. Each of the AWM voices can be used on the Upper keyboard, Lower keyboard and Pedalboard. There are two voice sections for the Upper keyboard, one voice section for the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard, respectively. Each voice section can, of course, have its own Voice Condition page(s), which allow you to finely set up voice and volume settings. LEAD VOICE UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE BRASS CLARINET SAXOPHONE CHORUS HARMONICA ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRAPHONE COSMIC TUTTI MAX VIOLIN FLUTE OBOE TRUMPET TO LOWER MIN MIN PEDAL VOICE LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE STRINGS BRASS CLARINET SAXOPHONE CHORUS HORN ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRAPHONE COSMIC TUTTI 2 MAX Voice Sections STRINGS MAX CONTRA BASS ELEC. BASS ORGAN BASS TUBA MIN MAX TO LOWER MIN 1 Voice Display You can visually confirm the voice assignments to each keyboard. Pressing the VOICE DISPLAY button in the DISPLAY SELECT section selects the Voice Display. (The Voice Display always appears when the Electone is turned on.) DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY EFFECT SET A.B.C. M.O.C. FOOT SW. REGIST. SHIFT PITCH MIDI TREMOLO (FAST) The Voice Display is configured with three pages. Each page can be selected using the Page buttons. Page 1 and 2 show the currently assigned voice settings for each voice section, as well as the overall balance between the Upper and Lower voices. (page 1) DATA CONTROL UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE LEAD VOICE DATA CONTROL PAGE ¨⁄Strings1ÎViolin1 ⁄ Ò⁄Strings1∏⁄ContBs.1 LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE PEDAL VOICE 17 (page 2) DATA CONTROL UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE 2 Volume Balance between UPPER and LOWER (Page 20) DATA CONTROL PAGE ¨¤Strings1 M.BAL: 0¤ Ò¤Strings1∏¤ContBs.1 2 NOTE: LOWER KEYBOARD VOICE 2 PEDAL VOICE 2 Voice Sections In addition to the four panel voice groups such as Upper Keyboard Voice, Lower Keyboard Voice, Pedal Voice and Lead Voice, the EL-100 has three “hidden” voice groups, Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2, Pedal Voice 2. These three voice groups are displayed on page 2 of the Voice Display screen. This fact indicates the EL-100 owns the same voice group numbers as those of the upper models like EL-500. Accordingly, the EL-100 can play back the registrations created with the upper models like EL-500. You can change the settings of each “hidden” voice group as you do with the panel voice groups. See page 27 for the details. For more information on the volume balance between the Upper Keyboard and the Lower Keyboard see page 20. You can select the language shown on the LCD display on page 3 of the Voice Display (page 16). DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <v(4∂/Display> ‹ ’i-y∫ ”English 2 Selecting Voices from the Panel Since selection of panel voices follows the same procedure throughout the various sections, instructions for only the Upper Keyboard Voice are given here. 1 Select a voice from the Upper Keyboard Voice section by pressing one of the Voice buttons in that section. UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE STRINGS BRASS CLARINET SAXOPHONE CHORUS HARMONICA ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRAPHONE COSMIC TUTTI MAX MIN If, for example, you have selected the ORGAN voice, the following display (Voice Menu) will appear: DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL Organ1 JazzOrgan1 PopOrgan1 Accordion 18 Notice that several different voice names are shown on this display. These are variations of the basic organ voice category. PAGE 2 Press one of the Data Control buttons that corresponds to the voice you wish to select. (Pop Organ 1, in this case) DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL Organ1 JazzOrgan1 PopOrgan1 Accordion 2 Voice Sections The first letter of the selected voice will start blinking. You have selected Pop Organ 1 for the Upper Keyboard Voice. 3 4 If you wish to, you can select voices from Lead Voice, Lower Keyboard Voice and Pedal Voice sections, following steps #1 and #2 above. Set the volume for each voice section. There are two volume controls: Coarse: Use the VOLUME controls of each voice section on the panel to set the desired level for each voice. The controls have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full volume. UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE STRINGS BRASS CLARINET SAXOPHONE CHORUS HARMONICA ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRAPHONE COSMIC TUTTI MAX MIN Fine: Pressing the same panel voice button again (or the same Data Control button corresponding to the selected voice) calls up the Voice Condition display. Use the Page buttons to select page 2, which contains Volume setting. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE INIT.T: 8 ¨1⁄ FEET:PRESET 19 Use the top left side Data Control button pair to change the level of the desired voice. Fine volume settings, 0-24, are available. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL VOL.:24 2 PAN:C ¨1¤ REVERB:24 NOTE: Pressing a voice button once calls up that voice’s Voice Menu display. Pressing it a second time calls up the Voice Condition display. Successive presses alternate between the two displays. NOTE: Voice Sections The Lead and Pedal Voices sound one note at a time; when you simultaneously press two or more keys, only the highest note will sound. 5 6 Now select voices for the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard as you did for the Upper keyboard above. Also set the volumes of the voices. Adjust the volume balance between the Upper and Lower Voices with the Balance Control provided on the Voice Display. To adjust the volume balance: 1. Press the VOICE DISPLAY button in the DISPLAY SELECT section. The Voice Display always appears when the Electone is turned on. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY EFFECT SET A.B.C. M.O.C. FOOT SW. REGIST. SHIFT PITCH MIDI TREMOLO (FAST) 2. Select page 2 of the Voice Display using Page buttons at the right side of the LCD display. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE ¨⁄Strings1ÎViolin1 ⁄ Ò⁄Strings1∏⁄ContBs.1 3. Adjust the balance with the corresponding Data Control buttons, at the top right side. The positive values increase the Upper Keyboard volume, while the negative values lower it, or increase the Lower Keyboard volume. Range: -6 - +6 DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL ¨¤Strings1 M.BAL:+4¤ Ò¤Strings1∏¤ContBs.1 20 NOTE: Pressing this pair of Data Control buttons at the same time restores the balance to the center position. About TO LOWER - Playing (Upper) Lead Voice and Pedal Voice from the Lower keyboard: The Electone has a special ‘To Lower’ function that lets you assign Lead or Bass voices to the Lower keyboard. Simply press the TO LOWER button on the voice section you wish to assign, and that voice will be playable from the Lower keyboard. PEDAL VOICE LEAD VOICE FLUTE OBOE TRUMPET MAX TO LOWER CONTRA BASS ELEC. BASS ORGAN BASS TUBA MAX 2 Voice Sections VIOLIN When the TO LOWER button is turned on, the Lead voices and Pedal voices cannot be played on the Upper keyboard and Pedalboard, respectively. TO LOWER MIN MIN Turning the Electone off erases all panel settings you have made. When the Electone is turned on, Basic Registration 1 is automatically selected. If you have made panel settings you wish to keep, save them to the floppy disk before turning the Electone off. See page 68 for more information. 3 Selecting Voices from the Dotted Buttons The EL-100 has a wide variety of voices from which you can choose – far greater than what is immediately apparent from the front panel controls. You’ve already learned in the section above how to select the different voices that are available in the Voice Menu display of each panel voice. The Electone also has dotted buttons in each voice section, giving you access to even more voices. These dotted buttons function as ‘wild card’ Voice Menu selectors; any internal voices can be selected from these buttons. UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE STRINGS BRASS CLARINET SAXOPHONE CHORUS HARMONICA ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRAPHONE COSMIC TUTTI MAX MIN The dotted buttons have two basic uses: ● For playing any voice of the Voice Menus from any of the keyboards or Pedalboard. You can play on the Upper keyboard, for example, voices from the twenty-two Voice Menu pages (including User), and not be limited to only the twelve buttons (equivalent to twelve Voice Menu pages) that make up the Upper Voice section. Another advantage to this feature is that when the normally monophonic (one note) Lead and Pedal voices are assigned to the Upper or Lower keyboard Voice sections, they can be played polyphonically. ● For having three different voices from the same Voice Menu page available for selection in the same song. For example, you can assign one of the voices to a dotted button in the Upper Keyboard Voice section, the second voice to the other dotted button in the same section, and the third one on the Voice Menu. 21 To select voices from the dotted buttons: 1 Press one of the dotted buttons in any of the voice sections. Select Honky Tonk piano, for example, to the Dotted button 1 in Upper Keyboard Voice. 2 UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE Voice Sections STRINGS BRASS CLARINET SAXOPHONE CHORUS HARMONICA ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRAPHONE COSMIC TUTTI MAX MIN STRINGS, Voice Menu 1, appears. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <STRINGS> 01:Strings1 2 ¨1‚⁄ Select one of the pages with the Page buttons, and choose a Voice Menu. (PIANO, page 17, in this case) DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <PIANO> 01:Piano1 PAGE ¨1⁄‡ NOTE: 3 Select 03: Honky Tonk piano voice using the Data Control buttons. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <PIANO> 03:Honky Tonk ¨1⁄‡ You have selected Honky Tonk for the Upper Keyboard Voice. About User voices: Page 22 is “User” area. Although EL-100 cannot exactly play back the user voices created with the upper models like EL-900, the automatic conversion function allows your EL-100 play back the voices fairly close to the original sounds. However, some voices may not be reproduced properly. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <USER VOICE> 01:****** 22 ¨1¤¤ You can directly view and select Voice Menu pages by holding down one of the Dotted buttons and simultaneously pressing the desired voice buttons in succession. 4 Voice Menus The following chart lists the voices that are shown by pressing the panel voice buttons. The other voices that are only available when using the Dotted buttons are shown on pages 24 - 26. STRINGS Upper/Lower CONTRABASS Pedal Horn2 Huted Horn Tuba Timpani Timp.Roll Trumpet1 Trumpet2 Trombone1 Muted Trp Flute1 Recorder Piccolo Whistle CLARINET Upper/Lower OBOE Lead Oboe2 EnglshHorn Clarinet1 Clarinet2 Bass Cla. Syn.Cla.1 TUTTI Upper/Lower SAXOPHONE Upper/Lower Saxophon1 Saxophon2 Sopra.Sax Syn.Lead1 Tutti1 Tutti3 Tutti2 Tutti4 HARMONICA Upper CHORUS Upper/Lower Chorus2 Vocal Harmoni.1 Harmoni.2 ORGAN BASS Pedal ORGAN Upper/Lower Organ1 JazzOrgan1 PopOrgan1 Accordion Org.Bass1 Org.Bass2 Org.Bass3 Org.Bass4 GUITAR Upper/Lower PIANO Upper/Lower E.Piano1 Harpsi. Guitar1 Guitar2 ElecGtr.1 Harp ELECTRIC BASS Pedal VIBRAPHONE Upper/Lower Vibrphone Glocken. Marimba Syn.Chime ElecBass1 ElecBass2 Syn.Bass1 Syn.Bass2 USER VOICE Upper/Lower/Pedal COSMIC Upper/Lower Cosmic1 Cosmic3 Brass2 Syn.Brass1 FLUTE Lead TUBA Pedal Piano1 E.Piano2 Brass1 Brass3 TRUMPET Lead HORN Lower Chorus1 Chorus3 Violin2 PizzViolin BRASS Upper/Lower ContBass1 ContBass2 Pizz.Bass UprghtBass Oboe1 Bassoon1 Violin1 Cello Voice Sections Strings1 Strings2 Pizz.Strs Syn.Strs1 Horn1 Horn3 2 VIOLIN Lead Cosmic2 Cosmic4 <USER VOICE> 01:****** The details for each voice such as octave (feet) setting and effect on/off status are shown in the list on pages 24 - 26. 23 Details on All Voices The voices not lead by a bullet indicate that they are only selectable using the Dotted buttons. Preset Page/Section Voice Name Comments Effect 1. Upper/Lower ● 01: Strings 1 8' - Large strings ensemble. STRINGS ● 02: Strings 2 8' - Relatively small strings ensemble for contemporary music. 2 ● Voice Sections ● 03: Strings 3 8' - Small strings ensemble. 04: Strings 4 8' - Having specific harmonics for layering other voices. 05: Strings 5 8' - For legato playing. 06: Strings 6 8' - Strings with clarity. Appropriate for the fast passages. 07: Strings 7 8' - Expressive full bodied strings with a slow attack. 08: Pizz. Strings 8' - Pizzicato strings. 09: Trem. Strings 8' - Tremolo strings. 10: Synth. Strings 1 8' Cele. Synth. strings with softer attack. 11: Synth. Strings 2 8' Sym. Bright synth. strings. Softer Synth. strings. 12: Synth. Strings 3 8' Cele 2. Lead ● 01: Violin 1 8' - For multi purposes. VIOLIN ● 02: Violin 2 8' - For solo with sharp attack. 03: Violin 3 8' - Bright fidle for country music. 04: Violin 4 8' - Darker synth. violin with wider dynamic range. 05: Violin 5 8' - Violin with deep vibrato, also suited for chord playing. ● 06: Pizz. Violin 8' - Pizzicato violin. ● 07: Cello 8' - Cello with realistic rubbed string-instrument feel. 08: Kokyu 8' - Ancient Chinese fiddle. 8' - Standard type. 3. Pedal ● 01: Contrabass 1 CONTRABASS ● 02: Contrabass 2 8' - True-to-life tight contrabass sounding in an octave unison. 03: Contrabass 3 16' - Realistic contrabass solo. ● 04: Pizz. Bass 8' - Pizzicato contrabass for classicals. ● 05: Upright Bass 8' - For jazz. 4. Upper/Lower ● 01: Brass 1 8' - Trumpet and trombone ensemble for classicals. BRASS ● 02: Brass 2 8' - For big band with brighter attack. ● 03: Brass 3 8' - With strong impact. Can be used as orchestra hit. 04: Brass 4 U16'/L8' - Trombone ensemble. 05: Brass 5 8' - Tight octave brass for contemporary music. ● 06: Synth. Brass 1 8' - Synth. brass with sharp attack. Used for Basic Regist. 5. 07: Synth. Brass 2 8' - Analog type. Can be used as melody line. 08: Synth. Brass 3 8' - Fat synth. brass. 5. Lower ● 01: Horn 1 8' - Standard horn for classicals. HORN ● 02: Horn 2 8' - Horn unison solo. Alpenhorn. ● 03: Horn 3 8' - For solo playing. 04: Horn 4 8' - Impressive horn ensemble. ● 05: Muted Horn 8' - Muted horn. 6. Lead ● 01: Trumpet 1 8' - Standard trumpet for classicals. TRUMPET ● 02: Trumpet 2 8' - Jazz trumpet 1 with full-bodied sounds. 03: Trumpet 3 8' - Sweet voice. 04: Trumpet 4 8' - Jazz trumpet 2 with a peculiar attack. 05: Trumpet 5 8' - Comical synth. trumpet. 06: Trumpet 6 8' - Resonant trumpet solo. ● 07: Muted Trp. 8' - Harmon mute. ● 08: Trombone 1 U16'/L8' - For legato playing. 09: Trombone 2 U16'/L8' - Bright trombone solo. For fast phrases. 10: Muted Trb. U16'/L8' - Cup mute. 11: Flugel Horn 8' - Flugelhorn. 12: Euphonium U16/L8 - Euphonium with softer sounds. 7. Pedal ● 01: Tuba 16' - Accentuated by touch. TUBA ● 02: Timpani 8' - Standard timpani. ● 03: Timpani Roll 8' - Typical timpani roll. ● 01: Flute 1 8' - Standard flute solo. 02: Flute 2 8' - For legato playing. 03: Piccolo 4' - Standard piccolo. 04: Yokobue 4' - Japanese pipe with clear sounds. 05: Recorder 4' - Block floete. 06: Ocarina 4' - Ocarina with simple but warm sounds. 07: Pan Flute 8' - Pan Flute. 8. Lead FLUTE ● ● ● 24 Feet 08: Shakuhachi 8' - Japanese Shakuhachi with realistic breath noises. 09: Whistle 4' - Whistle. Preset Page/Section Voice Name Feet Effect Comments 9. Lead ● 01: Oboe 1 8' - Softer oboe. OBOE ● 02: Oboe 2 8' - Rounder tone with characteristic tonguing. For fast phrases. ● 03: English Horn 8' - Cor Anglais. ● 04: Bassoon 1 U16'/L8' - For legato playing. U16'/L8' - For staccato playing. ● 01: Clarinet 1 8' - Standard clarinet. CLARINET ● 02: Clarinet 2 8' - Clarinet solo for jazz and contemporary. ● 03: Bass Cla. 8' - Bass clarinet with fat and resonant sounds. ● 04: Synth. Cla. 1 8' - Resonant synth. clarinet. Synth. reed with a unique attack sound. 05: Synth. Cla. 2 8' - 11. Upper/Lower ● 01: Saxophone 1 U16'/L8' - Alto sax. SAXOPHONE ● 02: Saxophone 2 U16'/L8' - Characteristic tenor sax with strong tonguing. ● 03: Sopra. Sax. 8' - Standard soprano sax. 04: Sax. Ens. 1 U16'/L8' - Softer sounds for classicals. 05: Sax. Ens. 2 U16'/L8 - Saxophone section for bigband. 06: Synth. Sax. 8' - Wind synthesizer with thick sounds in the middle and lower range. 07: Synth. Lead 1 8' - Softer analog synth. reed. ● 08: Synth. Lead 2 8' - Clear synth. reed with a sharp attack. 09: Synth. Lead 3 4' - Hoarse noise reed. 10: Synth. Lead 4 8' - Digital synth. reed. 11: Synth. Lead 5 8' - Synth. reed with thick fourth notes. 12. Upper/Lower ● 01: Tutti 1 8' - Strings unison and wood winds ensemble. TUTTI ● 02: Tutti 2 8' - Strings unison and the brasses. ● 03: Tutti 3 8' - The brasses for classicals and bands. ● 04: Tutti 4 8' - Big band. Softer playing = sax only. Harder playing = 1 octave higher brasses added. 05: Tutti 5 8' - Wood winds ensemble. Instruments vary depending on the register played. 06: Tutti 6 8' - Wood winds quintet. 07: Tutti 7 8' - Brass ensemble. Female “Ah”. 13. Upper/Lower ● 01: Chorus 1 8' - CHORUS ● 02: Chorus 2 8' - Male “Wh”. ● 03: Chorus 3 8' - Mixed chorus. 04: Chorus 4 8' - Mixed chorus with beautiful resonance. Wh. 05: Chorus 5 8' - Scat type vocal ensemble. ● 06: Vocal 8' - Accentuated solo vocal, “Ah”. 14. Upper ● 01: Harmonica 1 8' - Standard type with pitch modulated vibrato. HARMONICA ● 02: Harmonica 2 8' - Solo harmonica with filter and amplitude modulated vibrato. 15. Upper/Lower ● 01: Organ 1 8' - Small pipe organ. 8'. ORGAN ● ● ● 02: Organ 2 8' - Big pipe organ with full coupler. 03: Organ 3 8' - Nasard stops. 8'+2 2/3'. 04: Organ 4 8' - 05: Jazz Organ 1 16' Chor. Harmonium. For solo playing. 16'+8'+5 1/3'. 06: Jazz Organ 2 16' Trem. 16'+8'+2'. 07: Jazz Organ 3 16' Trem. For cluster playing. 16'+1 3/5'+1 1/3'+1'. 08: Jazz Organ 4 16' Chor. Fat and noisy jazz organ. 09: Pop Organ 1 8' Chor. Bright sounds for jazz. 8'+4'+2 2/3'. 10: Pop Organ 2 8' Chor. For multi purposes. 11: Theat. Organ 1 8' Sym. 8'+4' with slower attack. 12: Theat. Organ 2 8' - 16'+8' with slower attack. 13: Accordion 8' - Slower attack. 14: Bandoneon 8' - Attack can be controlled by initial touch. 8' - Combination organ bass. 16. Pedal ● 01: Organ Bass 1 ORGAN BASS ● 02: Organ Bass 2 16' - Pipe organ bass 1. Standard type. ● 03: Organ Bass 3 16' - For jazz. 16'. ● 04: Organ Bass 4 16' - Pipe organ bass 2. Full coupler. ● 01: Piano 1 8' - For multi purposes. 02: Piano 2 8' - Brighter sounds. CP80 type. 17. Upper/Lower PIANO 03: Honkytonk 8' - ● 04: Elec. Piano 1 8' Cele. ● 05: Elec. Piano 2 8' Cele. 06: Elec. Piano 3 8' - ● 2 Voice Sections 05: Bassoon 2 10. Upper/Lower Honky tonk piano. DX7 type. Old fashioned, full bodied electric piano. Electric piano with clearly brilliant but deep sounds. 07: Harpsichord 8' - Standard cembalo. 08: Clavi. 16' - Funky clavi. 09: Clavichord 8' - Clavichord with stable and grave sounds. 25 Preset Page/Section Voice Name Feet Comments Effect 18. Upper/Lower ● 01: Guitar 1 U16'/L8' - Folk guitar. Steel string. GUITAR ● 02: Guitar 2 U16'/L8' - Acoustic jazz guitar. Tone varies depending on the touch. 03: Guitar 3 U16'/L8' - Classic guitar. Suitable to backing for bossanova. 04: 12Str. Guitar U16/L8 - 12-string classic guitar with gorgeous sounds. 2 Voice Sections ● ● 05: Banjo 8' - 06: Mandolin 8' Cele. For country and dixieland. 07: Sitar 8' - 08: Shamisen 8' - Japanese classical shamisen. 09: Elec. Guitar 1 U16'/L8' - For backing. 10: Elec. Guitar 2 U16'/L8' - For solo playing. 11: Muted Guitar U16'/L8' - Muted guitar. 12: Dist. Guitar U16'/L8' - Distorted guitar. 13: Harp 8' - Grand harp. 14: Steel Guitar 8' - Hawaiian guitar. Effective when used with the glide function. 15: Koto 8' - 16: Taisho Koto 4' Cele. Standard mandolin. Indian sitar with the different resonances between lower and mid./high ranges. Japanese Koto. Japanese Taisho Koto. 19. Upper/Lower ● 01: Vibraphone 8' - VIBRAPHONE ● 02: Glocken 4' - Glockenspiel. 03: Celesta 4' - Celesta. ● ● Standard vibraphone. 04: Music Box 4' - Antique music box. 05: Marimba 8' - Concert marimba. 06: Xylophone 4' - Tone varies depending on the initial touch. 07: Chime 4' - 08: Synth. Chime 8' Cele. Chime. Starry chime. 09: Steel Drum 8' - 20. Pedal ● 01: Elec. Bass 1 8' - Steel Drum. For multi purposes. ELECTRIC BASS ● 02: Elec. Bass 2 16' - Slap bass. 03: Elec. Bass 3 16' - 04: Elec. Bass 4 16' Cele. Plucked bass with hard attack. ● 05: Synth. Bass 1 16' - Sustained sounds. ● 06: Synth. Bass 2 16' - With remarkable attack. 07: Synth. Bass 3 16' - Tone varies depending on the touch. 4' - Decay type. For multi purposes. UK in Basic Regist. 4. Fretless bass, also suited for solo playing. 21. Upper/Lower ● 01: Cosmic 1 COSMIC ● 02: Cosmic 2 8' - The lower register of celesta. LK and PK in Basic Regist. 4. ● 03: Cosmic 3 8' - Brass type.LK in Basic Regist. 5. ● 04: Cosmic 4 8' - Decay type. With fantastic image. 05: Cosmic 5 8' - Spacious sounds with feedback. 06: Cosmic 6 8' - Synth. brass type. 07: Cosmic 7 8' - Vocal type with feedback. 08: Cosmic 8 8' - Distortion type with feedback. 09: Cosmic 9 8' - Decay type with unique feedback. 10: Cosmic 10 8' - Clear synth. pad. 11: Cosmic 11 8' - Digital synth. pad. 12: Cosmic 12 8' - Chorus type synth. pad. 13: Cosmic 13 8' - Special sound effect with a slower attack. The sounds drastically changes. 14: Cosmic 14 8' - Fantastic digital music box. 15: Cosmic 15 8' - Ethnic synth. percussion. 16: Cosmic 16 16' - Special sound effect with a complicated mixture of various sounds. Some of the voices may be different from the ones on the upper models like EL-900 even if they have the same voice names. 26 To select the “hidden” voices (Upper Keyboard Voice 2, Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2): You can call up the “hidden” voices on the LCD display and select them. This function allows you to layer the voices on each keyboard to make the sound thicker. 2 Voice Sections The procedure is explained with the selection of Upper Keyboard Voice 2, as an example. 1. Press one of the voice buttons in the Upper Keyboard Voice section while holding down the VOICE DISPLAY button in the DISPLAY SELECT section. UPPER KEYBOARD VOICE DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY EFFECT SET A.B.C. M.O.C. FOOT SW. REGIST. SHIFT PITCH MIDI TREMOLO (FAST) STRINGS BRASS CLARINET SAXOPHONE CHORUS HARMONICA ORGAN PIANO GUITAR VIBRAPHONE COSMIC TUTTI MAX MIN If, for example, you have selected the ORGAN voice, the following display (Voice Menu) will appear: DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL Organ1 JazzOrgan1 PopOrgan1 Accordion Notice that several different voice names are shown on this display. These are variations of the basic organ category. NOTE: In this case the lamp on/off status in the Upper Keyboard Voice section will not be affected since you are dealing with the Upper Keyboard Voice 2. 2. Press one of the Data Control buttons that corresponds to the voice you wish to select. (Pop Organ 1, in this case) DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL Organ1 JazzOrgan1 PopOrgan1 Accordion The first letter of the selected voice will start blinking. You have selected Pop Organ 1 for the Upper Keyboard Voice 2. 27 3. Set the volume for the Upper Keyboard Voice 2. Pressing the same Data Control button corresponding to the selected voice calls up the Voice Condition display. Use the Page buttons to select page 2, which contains Volume setting. DATA CONTROL 2 DATA CONTROL PAGE INIT.T: 8 Voice Sections ¨2⁄ FEET:PRESET Use the top left side Data Control button pair to change the level of the desired voice. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL VOL.:24 PAN:C ¨2¤ REVERB:24 You can select the voices of Lower Keyboard Voice 2 and Pedal Voice 2 in the same manner. NOTE: Also, you can change the volume of the Upper Keyboard Voice 2 voices by pressing the Upper Keyboard Voice volume buttons on the panel while holding VOICE DISPLAY button. NOTE: The panel volume lamp position will not be affected even if you change the volume of Upper Keyboard Voice 2. The volume buttons on the panel are exclusive for the panel voice groups. 28 3 Voice Controls and Effects The Electone is equipped with two general kinds of functions that can be used to change the sound of the voices: Voice Controls and Effects. Certain effects may have been applied to some of the voices, but can be modified as you like. All built-in effects are digital. The chart below shows the various voice controls and effects for the individual voice sections. Available functions are indicated by circles. The controls and effects are differently applied depending on those types: applied to each voice group, to each keyboard or to the entire system. Inital Touch Feet Volume Pan Reverb *2 Tremolo Sym/Chorus phonic/ Delay Flanger Distortion Vibrato *1 Celeste Lead Slide Lead Tune 3 Sustain Voice Controls and Effects Upper Keyboard Voice Lower Keyboard Voice Lead Voice Pedal Voice Voice Condition Page 1 Voice Condition Page 2 Voice Condition Page 3 Related Pages Voice Condition Page 4 Voice Condition Page 5 (Lead Voice only) Effect Set Page Reverb Page Sustain Page Tremolo Page *1 *2 Turning tremolo/chorus on/off and switching between tremolo and chorus are common to all voice sections. The total reverb depth and length are controlled on the reverb page, though the different reverb settings can be done for each voice section. To change the settings and add the effects, display the appropriate page: 1. Selecting from Voice Condition Pages 2. Selecting from Effect Set Pages 3. Selecting from the Panel 29 1 Selecting from Voice Condition Pages To call up the Voice Condition Pages: Choose a voice on the panel, then press that voice’s panel button again. The Voice Condition Choose a voice on page appears on the LCD display. LEAD VOICE 3 Voice Controls and Effects VIOLIN FLUTE OBOE TRUMPET MAX TO LOWER MIN Each voice group’s Voice Condition (except for Lead Voice) is configured with four pages. Voice Condition of the Lead Voice consists of five pages. Voice Condition [PAGE 1] 1 DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL INIT.T: 8 Î ⁄ FEET:PRESET 2 The included items are different between Pedal Voice group and the others (Only Feet setting is available with Pedal Voice group). Pedalboard ∏1⁄ FEET:PRESET 1 Initial Touch Controls volume and timbre according to the velocity at which you strike the keys. The harder you strike the keys, the greater the volume and the brighter the timbre will become. All voices are provided with this expressive function, making it possible to perfectly reproduce the subtle dynamic and tonal changes of actual instruments. Higher settings make the change wider. Range: 0 - 14 2 Feet Determines the octave setting of the voice group. You can use a certain voice in the broader range. PRESET is the original (factory) setting; 4' is the highest and 16' is the lowest. 2' setting is added to the Pedal Voice sections. 30 NOTE: Minimum setting produces no effect at all. Voice Condition [PAGE 2] Press the Page buttons to select PAGE 2. DATA CONTROL 1 VOL.: 0 2 DATA CONTROL PAGE PAN:C Î ¤ REVERB:24 3 1 Volume 3 Fine adjustment of the voice volume. See page 20 for more information. Voice Controls and Effects Range: 0 - 24 2 Panning Determines the position of the voice in the stereo image. Seven pan positions are available. 3 Reverb Determines the amount of reverb applied to each Voice section. When the panel REVERB control is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. See page 40 for the details. Range: 0 - 24 31 Voice Condition [PAGE 3] Press the Page buttons to select PAGE 3. 1 DATA CONTROL EFFECT:PRESET 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 3 DATA CONTROL PAGE Î ‹ Voice Controls and Effects PRESET OFF TREMOLO SYMPHONIC DELAY FLANGER DISTORTION 1 Effect Determines the effect type applied to each voice section. Each press of top left F Data Control button selects Preset, Off, Tremolo, Symphonic, Delay, Flanger and Distortion, in order. Each press of top left E Data Control button selects in the reversed order. 32 1 -1 Preset Selects the original (factory) effect. When PRESET is selected, some of the voices have already got a certain type of effects. 1 -2 Off Cancels the effect. 1 -3 Tremolo Selects Tremolo/ Chorus. See page 42 for the details of the Tremolo/ Chorus setting. 1 -4 Symphonic Selects Symphonic/ Celeste. See page 35 for the details of the Symphonic/ Celeste setting. 1 -5 Delay Selects Delay. See page 36 for the details of the Delay setting. 1 -6 Flanger Selects Flanger. See page 38 for the details of the Flanger setting. 1 -7 Distortion Selects Distortion. See page 39 for the details of the Distortion setting. NOTE: Effect can also be selected in the Effect Set page (page 34). Voice Condition [PAGE 4] Press the Page buttons to select PAGE 4. 1 -1 DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL VIB:PRESET Î › 1 -3 DATA CONTROL PAGE DATA CONTROL 3 1 -2 Voice Controls and Effects VIB:USER DEPTH: 0Î › DELAY: 0 SPEED: 0 1 -4 1 Vibrato Vibrato function vibrates the voices to create softer image. Applied to each voice group. 1 -1 PRESET/USER Selects the original (factory) effect. When PRESET is selected, some of the voices have already got vibrato effect. Selecting User allows you to access the Vibrato parameters to create your own vibrato setting. NOTE: The User vibrato may not be effective for some voices such as Harmonica2, Electric Piano1 and Synth. Chime. NOTE: 1 -2 Delay Determines the amount of time that elapses between the playing of a key and the start of the vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher settings increase the delay of the vibrato onset. The Vibrato parameters, Delay, Depth and Speed, are not displayed as long as Preset is selected. Range: 0 - 14 1 -3 Depth Determines the intensity of the vibrato effect (see diagram). Higher settings result in a more pronounced vibrato. Range: 0 - 14 1 -4 Speed Determines the speed of the vibrato effect (see diagram). Range: 0 - 14 Vibrato Control Speed Delay Depth 33 Voice Condition [PAGE 5] Press the Page buttons to select PAGE 5. 1 DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL TUNE: 0 SLIDE:OFF Î ﬁ S.TIME: 0 2 -1 2 -2 1 Tune 3 Voice Controls and Effects Determines the pitch of the Lead voice. This control lets you detune the Lead voice relative to the other voices of the Electone, for producing a richer sound. The higher the value set, the higher the pitch. Range: 0-24 (max. 28.88 cents; 1 step= Ca.1.2cents) 2 Slide Slide applies a portamento effect to notes played in legato. For example, if you play one note, then play another before completely releasing the first note, the pitch of the first note will ‘slide’ up or down to the second note. The Slide function is effective within a one-octave range. 2 -1 On/Off Determines on/off status of the Slide effect. 2 -2 Slide Time Determines the speed of the slide or portamento effect. The higher the value that is set, the slower the speed. Range: 0 - 14 2 Selecting from Effect Set Page To call up the Effect Set page: Pressing the EFFECT SET button in the DISPLAY SELECT section calls up the Effect Set pages. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY EFFECT SET A.B.C. M.O.C. FOOT SW. REGIST. SHIFT PITCH MIDI TREMOLO (FAST) See page 32 for the information on Preset and Off. The explanation on each effect is given here. 34 PAGE DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL EFFECT:PRESET 1 2 3 4 5 PAGE ¨1 PRESET OFF TREMOLO SYMPHONIC DELAY FLANGER DISTORTION 3 Voice Controls and Effects Selecting Voice Group You can select the voice section to which the effect should be applied, by pressing the Page buttons. The acronyms indicate each voice group. ¨1: Ò1: Î: 1: Upper Keyboard Voice Lower Keyboard Voice Lead Voice Pedalboard Voice ¨2: Ò2: 2: Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Pedalboard Voice 2 1 Tremolo/Chorus See Tremolo section on page 42. Independently applied to each voice section. 2 Symphonic/Celeste Determines the type of the Symphonic effect, SYMPHONIC (Sym.) or CELESTE (Cele.). Symphonic is a subtle echo effect that makes one voice sound like an ensemble. For example, a solo violin voice played through Symphonic would sound like many violins playing together. SYMPHONIC simulates the effect of a large ensemble, while CELESTE creates the effect of a gradually expanding sound. Press the appropriate Data Control button to turn on the desired effect. The solid (negative) box indicates the effect is turned on. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL EFFECT:SYMPHONIC ¨1 ”SYMPHONIC ’CELESTE 2 -1 2 -2 2 -1 Symphonic Selects the Symphonic effect to the designated voice section. 2 -2 Celeste Selects the Celeste effect to the designated voice section. NOTE: In the illustration at the left, Symphonic is selected and effective. 35 3 Delay Delay is a pronounced echo effect, with distinct delayed repeats of the original sound. Independently applied to each voice section. Delay Effect Signal Adjusts the level balance using BALANCE parameter Time Delayed Signal 3 Adjusts the delay interval using TIME parameter Voice Controls and Effects Adjust the number of repeated sounds using FEEDBACK parameter DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL EFFECT:DELAY ¨1 ÚÆTIME----242mSec 3 -1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 TIME F.B. BAL. MODE 3 -1 Parameter Settings The bottom left Data Control buttons select available Delay parameters. Available parameters are as follows: 3 -2 Time Determines the time between delayed repeats. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL EFFECT:DELAY ¨1 ÚÆTIME----242mSec Range: 5mSec – 956mSec 3 -3 Feedback Determines the number of delayed repeats. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL EFFECT:DELAY ÚÆF.B.----28.5% Range: 0.2% - 46.9% 36 ¨1 3 -4 Balance Determines the volume of the delay effect, relative to the original sound. Higher settings produce a louder delay. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL EFFECT:DELAY ÚÆBAL.----60.6% ¨1 3 Range: 0% - 100% Mode Selects the delay type from Mono, ST (Stereo) 1, 2, 3. Selecting one of the Stereo Delays produces more expanding image or an image sounds move from right to left, or left to right. DATA CONTROL Voice Controls and Effects 3 -5 DATA CONTROL EFFECT:DELAY ÚÆMODE----MONO ¨1 Range: Mono, ST1, ST2, ST3 Characteristics of Each Delay Type Monaural Normal monaural delay. ST1 Multi delay with complicated reflections. Provides the most pronounced effect. ST2 Simple stereo delay. Feedback is 0 and the first reflection only. Special effects can be obtained. ST3 Adds thickness and brilliance to the monaural delay. 37 4 Flanger Flanger introduces a swirling, animated modulation effect to the sound. Independently applied to each voice section. Flanger Effect Signal Changes the pitch using SPEED parameter Sets the depth using DEPTH parameter Time 3 Intensifies the pitch change using FEEDBACK parameter Voice Controls and Effects DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL EFFECT:FLANGER ÚÆSPEED--- 4.5Hz 4 -1 ¨1 4-2 SPEED 4-3 F.B. 4-4 DEPTH 4 -1 Parameter Settings The bottom left Data Control buttons select available Flanger parameters. Available parameters are as follows: 4 -2 Speed Determines the speed of the modulation. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL EFFECT:FLANGER ÚÆSPEED--- 4.5Hz ¨1 Range: 0Hz - 12.1Hz 4 -3 Feedback Controls the brightness and the metallic sound of the effect. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL EFFECT:FLANGER ÚÆF.B.----35.2% ¨1 Range: 0.6% - 94.0% 4 -4 Depth Determines the intensity of the effect. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL EFFECT:FLANGER ÚÆDEPTH---52.3% Range: 37.8% - 87.8% 38 ¨1 5 Distortion Distortion adds a distorted image to the sounds usually found in electric guitars. Independently applied to each voice section. Distortion Effect Determines the depth using LEVEL parameter Signal Changes the timbre using HIPASS parameter DATA CONTROL 3 DATA CONTROL Voice Controls and Effects EFFECT:DISTORTION ¨1 ÚÆLEVEL---16.4dB 5 -1 5-2 LEVEL 5-3 HI PASS 5 -1 Parameter Settings The bottom left Data Control buttons select available Distortion parameters. Available parameters are as follows: 5 -2 Level Determines the depth of the distorted sounds. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL EFFECT:DISTORTION ¨1 ÚÆLEVEL---16.4dB Range: 0dB – 21.8dB 5 -3 High Pass Changes the timbre of the distorted sounds. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL EFFECT:DISTORTION ¨1 ÚÆHI PASS- 476Hz Range: 20Hz - 1036Hz 39 3 Selecting from the Panel Reverb, Sustain and Tremolo/Chorus pages are called up by pressing the respective panel buttons. 1 Reverb Reverb adds an echo-like effect to the sound, giving the impression of a performance in a large room or concert hall. Reverb effect can be applied to the entire system or to each voice section (page 31) independently. Also, Reverb can be applied to the rhythm and accompaniment independently. 3 Voice Controls and Effects Press one of the REVERB buttons, located to the left of the panel, to set the Reverb effect. The following display appears. REVERB MAX MIN REVERB page 1 -1 DATA CONTROL <REVERB> LENGTH:3 1 -2 DATA CONTROL TYPE:HALL DEPTH:16 1 -3 1 -1 Type Determines the type of reverb effect: Room, Hall and Church. Each type simulates a different acoustic environment; Room is the smallest and Church the largest. 1 -2 Length Determines the acoustic liveliness of the simulated room in the effect. Higher settings make the room more reverberant. Range: 0 - 6 1 -3 Depth Fine adjustment of the depth of reverberation or the level of the reflected sounds. Coarse reverb depth settings are made with the panel REVERB buttons. Range: 0 - 24 40 NOTE: When this parameter or the panel REVERB control is set to the minimum, the settings in each voice condition page (page 31) have no effect. 2 Sustain The Sustain effect, selectable for the Upper, Lower and Pedal voices, causes voices to gradually fade out when the keys are released. The sustain on/off and sustain length settings are independent for each keyboard, providing maximum expressive control. Press one of the SUSTAIN buttons, located to the left of the panel, to set the Sustain effect. The following display appears. The lamp of the button lights up to indicate that sustain is on. Press the button again to turn sustain off. 3 SUSTAIN LOWER Voice Controls and Effects UPPER PEDAL SUSTAIN Page DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <SUSTAIN> UPPER:10 LOWER:10 PEDAL: 6 Upper/Lower/Pedal Determines the length of sustain applied to each keyboard. The display shows the current sustain length values for each keyboard. The values here must be set high enough for the sustain effect to be noticeable. NOTE: Sustain cannot be applied to the Lead voices. Range: 0 - 12 NOTE: Remember that the SUSTAIN buttons are on/off switches. If you use them to simply check the sustain length values, you may unintentionally change the on/off status of the effect. Remember to check whether the sustain button lamps are on or off before you start to play. 41 3 Tremolo/Chorus Tremolo recreates the rich, swirling sound of the popular rotating speaker effect. Just as with a conventional rotating speaker, you can switch between slow and fast speeds. And like a motor-driven speaker, the characteristic tremolo effect gradually changes speed after it is switched. You can also adjust the maximum speed of the effect to suit your playing style. The Tremolo effect can be switched in real time as you play with either the front panel button or the Left Footswitch (when properly set for Footswitch operation). 3 ■ Tremolo Operation Voice Controls and Effects For Panel Voices (Voice Menu) 1 Select (turn on) Tremolo effect in each Voice Condition page 3. 2 Adjust the Tremolo setting in Tremolo Control (or Effect Set) page. 3 Assign footswitch for Tremolo Control, if desired. Turn on Tremolo as you play, with Tremolo button or Footswitch. 42 1) Turning on the Tremolo effect (set to standby): You cannot use the Tremolo effect only by turning on the TREMOLO (FAST) button. First, you need to turn the effect on in the desired voice section(s). Independently applied to each voice section. Select (turn on) Tremolo 1 Press the desired voice button on the panel twice to display one of the Voice Condition pages. 3 LEAD VOICE FLUTE OBOE TRUMPET MAX Voice Controls and Effects VIOLIN TO LOWER MIN The Voice Condition page appears. 2 Select page 3 of the Voice Display using PAGE buttons at the right side of the LCD display. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL EFFECT:PRESET 3 PAGE Î ‹ Select Tremolo to turn it on. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL EFFECT:TREMOLO Î ‹ 43 2) Setting the Tremolo Effect Tremolo setting made here are global; in other words, they are applied the same to all voices for which Tremolo has been turned on (set to standby). To turn on the Tremolo effect and call up the Tremolo Control page: Press the TREMOLO (FAST) button in the DISPLAY SELECT section. The following display appears. DISPLAY SELECT 3 Voice Controls and Effects VOICE DISPLAY EFFECT SET A.B.C. M.O.C. FOOT SW. REGIST. SHIFT PITCH MIDI TREMOLO (FAST) DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <TREMOLO> <CHORUS> SPEED:6.82 MODE:SLOW 1 2 The lamp of the button lights up to indicate that Tremolo is on. Press the button again to turn Tremolo off and Chorus on (the LED turns off). 1 Tremolo Speed Determines the speed of the Tremolo (rapid rotation) effect. Range: 4.75Hz – 7.77Hz 2 Chorus Mode Determines the effect applied when Tremolo is switched off: a slow chorus effect (SLOW) or STOP. Use the SLOW setting when you want to have a constant rotating speaker sound. 3) Realtime control of Tremolo effect Once the Tremolo effect has been turned on and set, you can control the effect in real time from the panel or from the Left Footswitch (page 97). Simply press the TREMOLO (FAST) button in the DISPLAY SELECT section to turn the Tremolo effects on and off while you’re playing. This button functions just like the fast/slow switch on an actual rotating speaker cabinet. When Tremolo is on, the rotation effect is fast; when off (Chorus), it is slow. The speed change is gradual, effectively simulating the slowing down and speeding up of a rotating speaker. You can also use the Left Footswitch to control the Tremolo effect in the same way, if the Footswitch has been properly assigned. 44 4 Rhythm and Accompaniment The Rhythm features of the Electone use actual drum and percussion sampled sounds to automatically play various rhythms. Automatic Accompaniment functions are used with the rhythms, providing appropriate and completely automatic accompaniment to match the style of the selected rhythm. Moreover, the Electone has a Keyboard Percussion feature that allows you to play drum and percussion sounds from the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard. 1 Selecting Rhythms from the Panel Ten different rhythm categories in various styles can be instantly selected from the front panel. The Electone has many more ‘hidden’ rhythms, however. A total of 66 rhythms are available, and can be selected by using the display. 4 1) To select and play a rhythm: Rhythm and Accompaniment 1 Press any of the RHYTHM buttons once. NOTE: RHYTHM SEQ. 1 SEQ. 2 MARCH WALTZ SWING BOUNCE SLOW ROCK SEQ. 3 SEQ. 4 TANGO LATIN 1 LATIN 2 8 BEAT 16 BEAT In addition to 10 different rhythm styles, four types of metronome sounds, simple metronome, two four, three four and four four, are assigned to the SEQ 1 – 4 buttons, respectively, as the defaults. MAX MIN Designated Rhythm Menu page will be displayed. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL 8Beat1 8Beat2 DancePop1 DancePop2 The first letter of the currently selected rhythm will start blinking. 2 Press the Data Control button corresponding to the rhythm you wish to play, as you do with the voices. The first letter of the selected rhythm will start blinking. Dance Pop 1 is selected here, for example. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL 8Beat1 8Beat2 DancePop1 DancePop2 NOTE: The chord/bass patterns matching with the designated rhythm will be selected automatically when the A.B.C. function is turned on. (Refer to the Auto Bass Chord section, page 52, for details on Auto Bass Chord and Memory.) 45 3 Turn the rhythm on. You can use one of three buttons to turn on the rhythm: RHYTHM INTRO. ENDING SYNCHRO START START 3 2 1 FILL IN 1 START This button does as its name indicates; the rhythm begins as soon as the button is pressed. To stop the rhythm, press this button again. 2 SYNCHRO START This button puts the rhythm in ‘stand-by’ status. The rhythm will start when you press a note on the Lower keyboard or Pedalboard. 4 Rhythm and Accompaniment 3 INTRO. ENDING Pressing this button automatically adds a short introduction (of up to eight measures) before starting the actual rhythm. First, press the INTRO. ENDING button, then the START or SYNCHRO START button to actually start the rhythm. While the introduction is playing, the display shows the countdown to the first measure of the pattern. For example, if there is an eightmeasure lead-in for a pattern in 4/4 time, the following display appears. Pressing the INTRO. ENDING button again while the pattern is being played will automatically add an ending phrase before stopping the rhythm. BAR / BEAT NOTE: The Left Footswitch can also be used to turn the rhythm on and off in the middle of song. To assign the Footswitch for rhythm control, see page 98. NOTE: ABOUT SYNCHRO START: Synchro Start functions quite differently when the Auto Bass Chord feature is turned on and the Accompaniment Memory is turned off. The rhythm starts when a key on the Lower keyboard is played, but then immediately stops when the key is released. To keep this from happening, turn the Memory function on. (Refer to the Auto Bass Chord section, page 52, for details on Auto Bass Chord and Memory.) LEAD IN Pressing the START button while holding down the INTRO. ENDING button automatically plays a special one-measure Lead In, with a click on each beat, to cue you in to the beginning of the song. 4 Set the volume using the panel rhythm volume button. The controls have seven volume settings, from a minimum of 0, or no sound, to a maximum of full volume. Fine adjustments in the volume of the rhythm can also be made from the Rhythm Condition page (page 48). RHYTHM SEQ. 1 SEQ. 2 MARCH WALTZ SWING BOUNCE SLOW ROCK SEQ. 3 SEQ. 4 TANGO LATIN 1 LATIN 2 8 BEAT 16 BEAT MAX MIN 46 NOTE: When the Electone is turned on, the Rhythm Volume is automatically set to 0. 5 Set the rhythm tempo using the Tempo button in the rhythm section. BAR / BEAT 2 (TEMPO Display: shows current tempo) TEMPO 1 BAR / BEAT 1 TEMPO Button For adjusting the speed of the rhythm. Pressing the right button increases the tempo and pressing the left button decreases it. Range: 40 - 240 When the rhythm begins playing, the TEMPO display changes function to a Bar/Beat indicator. 4 Rhythm and Accompaniment 2 TEMPO Display (BAR/BEAT Indicator) Shows the current tempo. (Displayed values are given in beats per minute, just as on a conventional metronome.) NOTE: When you press the TEMPO Button even while the rhythm is playing, the display momentarily changes to show the current tempo. BAR / BEAT The number on the left indicates the current bar or measure and the one on the right indicates the number of the beat in each bar. The beat indicator lamp below the TEMPO buttons also indicates the beats. (BAR/BEAT Indicator: shows the current position in the measures) 2) To use the Fill In patterns: Fill In patterns are designed to be used as temporary and regular rhythmic breaks to spice up a repeating rhythm. Like the regular rhythms, all Fill In patterns have been designed to perfectly match the bass and chord parts of the Automatic Accompaniment feature. 1 2 Select and play a rhythm. As you play the Electone along with the rhythm, occasionally press the FILL IN button. RHYTHM INTRO. ENDING SYNCHRO START START FILL IN NOTE: USING A FILL IN FOR THE START OF A SONG: Fill In patterns can also be used as introductions; simply press the FILL IN button before starting the rhythm with the START or SYNCHRO START buttons. NOTE: PLAYING PARTIAL FILL IN PATTERNS: You can also start Fill In patterns within a bar, in order to play only the final one or two beats of the Fill In pattern and create additional rhythmic interest. Since the Fill In feature is very sensitive to bar/beat boundaries, you should be very careful to ‘play’ the FILL IN button precisely on (or just slightly before) the beat that you want the Fill In pattern to begin. 47 2 Rhythm Condition Pages The Rhythm Condition includes the following two pages: the Rhythm Condition page used to adjust the rhythms and the Instrument page used to make up each drum/percussion instrument, each of which comprises the rhythms and is playable using the Keyboard Percussion function. To select the Rhythm Condition page: Choose a rhythm, and press that pattern’s panel button again (or again press the Data Control button corresponding to the selected rhythm). (The button should be pressed only once if the Rhythm display has already been called up; otherwise press the button twice.) RHYTHM 4 Rhythm and Accompaniment SEQ. 1 SEQ. 2 MARCH WALTZ SWING BOUNCE SLOW ROCK SEQ. 3 SEQ. 4 TANGO LATIN 1 LATIN 2 8 BEAT 16 BEAT MAX MIN Rhythm Condition [PAGE 1] 1 DATA CONTROL VOL.: 0 REV.:12 3 2 DATA CONTROL BAL.: 0 ⁄ ’AUTO VARI. 4 1 Volume Fine Adjustment of rhythm/keyboard percussion volume. Range: 0 - 24 2 BAL. (Balance) Determines the balance between two main sound types of the rhythms: the drum sounds and the cymbal sounds. Positive settings emphasize the cymbal sounds, while negative settings emphasize the drums. Range: -6 - 0 - +6 NOTE: Pressing this pair of Data Control buttons at the same time restores the balance to the center position. 3 Reverb Determines the amount of reverb applied to the rhythms and percussion sounds used in the rhythms. When the panel REVERB control is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. Range: 0 - 24 4 Auto Variation On/off switches of the Auto Variation function. Use the bottom right Data Control button to turn on the Auto Variation function (Solid box indicates the function is effective). The Auto Variation function lets you set pattern variations to be played automatically. When set to ON, Auto Variation automatically substitutes additional pattern variations to make the rhythm more interesting and complex. 48 NOTE: The Auto Variation function is not applied to some of the rhythms. Rhythm Condition [PAGE 2] DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL ACC.VOL.: 0 ”ON’OFF¤ ACC.REV.:24 TYPE:1 The settings related to Accompaniment are available on this page. See page 54 for the details. 3 Dotted Buttons and User Rhythms 4 Rhythm and Accompaniment The Rhythm section also has, like the voice sections, dotted buttons from which rhythms can be selected. These dotted buttons function as ‘wild card’ rhythm selectors; any of the rhythms available from the panel buttons, the Rhythm Menus or User rhythms loaded from optional Pattern Disk can be selected from these buttons. 1) To select a rhythm from a dotted button: 1 Press one of the dotted buttons on the right side of the Rhythm section. RHYTHM SEQ. 1 SEQ. 2 MARCH WALTZ SWING BOUNCE SLOW ROCK SEQ. 3 SEQ. 4 TANGO LATIN 1 LATIN 2 8 BEAT 16 BEAT MAX MIN MARCH, Rhythm Menu 1, appears. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <MARCH> 01:March1 2 ‚⁄ Select one of the pages with the Page buttons, and choose a Rhythm Menu. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <SWING> 01:Swing1 PAGE ‚‹ 49 3 Select the desired rhythm using the Data Control buttons. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <SWING> 07:JazzBallad ‚‹ 2) To call up the User rhythms: You can call up the rhythms created by the other Electone that has Rhythm Pattern Programming function and those on optional Pattern Disks. 4 Rhythm and Accompaniment 1 Press Page buttons to select the User page. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <USER RHYTHM> 01:USER1-A 2 ⁄⁄ Press to select the User rhythm number and its Type. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <USER RHYTHM> 04:USER1-D 50 ⁄⁄ PAGE 4 Rhythm Menus NOTE: The Baroque on the March page is configured with accompaniment only; it does not contain any drum or percussion. This chart lists all 66 of the rhythms available on the Electone. MARCH WALTZ March1 Country1 Polka1 Broadway Waltz1 J.Waltz1 SWING Waltz2 Bolero BOUNCE Swing1 J.Ballad Swing2 Dixieland1 Bounce1 Reggae1 SLOW ROCK Bounce2 Reggae2 TANGO SlowRock1 SlowRock2 SlowRock3 Tango1 Tango3 Tango2 4 LATAN2 LATIN1 Rhumba Mambo Samba1 Bossa.1 Samba2 Bossa.2 Rhythm and Accompaniment ChaCha Beguine 16 BEAT 8 BEAT 16Beat1 Funk1 8Beat1 8Beat2 DancePop1 DancePop2 16Beat2 Funk2 USER RHYTHM <USER RHYTHM> 01:USER1-A The rhythms not lead by a bullet can be selectable only through the Dotted buttons. Page Category LCD Page Category LCD Page Category 01 MARCH ● 01:March1 05 SLOW ROCK ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 11 USER RHYTHM 02:March2 03:March3 ● 04:Polka1 06 TANGO 05:Polka2 ● 06:Country1 07:Country2 07 LATIN1 ● 08:Broadway 09:Baroque 02 WALTZ ● 01:Waltz1 ● 02:Waltz2 SWING 02:USER1-B 03:SlowRock3 03:USER1-C 01:Tango1 04:USER1-D 02:Tango2 05:USER2-A 03:Tango3 06:USER2-B 01:ChaCha 07:USER2-C 02:Rhumba 08:USER2-D 03:Beguine 09:USER3-A 04:Mambo 10:USER3-B 05:Salsa 11:USER3-C 12:USER3-D 05:Waltz5 03:Samba3 14:USER4-B ● 06:JazzWaltz1 15:USER4-C 07:JazzWaltz2 ● 04:Bossanova1 ● 05:Bossanova2 08:JazzWaltz3 06:Bossanova3 17:USER5-A ● 09:Bolero ● 01:Swing1 ● 02:Swing2 LATIN2 13:USER4-A 16:USER4-D ● 01:8Beat1 ● 02:8Beat2 18:USER5-B 03:8Beat3 20:USER5-D 03:Swing3 04:8Beat4 21:USER6-A 04:Swing4 05:8Beat5 22:USER6-B 05:Swing5 ● 06:DancePop1 ● 07:DancePop2 23:USER6-C 08:DancePop3 25:USER7-A 09:DancePop4 26:USER7-B 09 8 BEAT ● 07:JazzBallad ● 08:Dixieland1 19:USER5-C 24:USER6-D ● 01:16Beat1 ● 02:16Beat2 27:USER7-C 03:16Beat3 29:USER8-A 03:Bounce3 04:16Beat4 30:USER8-B ● 04:Reggae1 ● 05:Reggae2 05:16Beat5 31:USER8-C 09:Dixieland2 BOUNCE 01:USER1-A 02:SlowRock2 04:Waltz4 08 06:Swing6 04 LCD ● 01:Samba1 ● 02:Samba2 03:Waltz3 03 01:SlowRock1 ● 01:Bounce1 ● 02:Bounce2 10 16 BEAT ● 06:Funk1 ● 07:Funk2 28:USER7-D 32:USER8-D 08:Funk3 51 5 Automatic Accompaniment Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) The Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) function works with the Rhythm section of the Electone to automatically produce chord and bass accompaniment as you play. There are three modes to obtain Automatic Accompaniment patterns. To select the A.B.C. function: Press the A.B.C./M.O.C. button in the DISPLAY SELECT section. DISPLAY SELECT 4 VOICE DISPLAY EFFECT SET A.B.C. M.O.C. FOOT SW. REGIST. SHIFT PITCH MIDI TREMOLO (FAST) Rhythm and Accompaniment The following display appears. A.B.C. [PAGE 1] 1 DATA CONTROL <ABC> OFF 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 OFF SINGLE FINGERED CUSTOM 2 DATA CONTROL <MEMORY> ⁄ ’L ’P 2 -2 2 -1 1 A.B.C. Type You can select one of three automatic accompaniment functions here. Each press of bottom left F Data Control button selects Off, Single Finger, Fingered Chord and Custom A.B.C., in order. Each press of bottom left E Data Control button selects in the reversed order. 52 1 -1 Off Cancels the Auto Bass Chord function. 1 -2 Single Finger Provides the fastest and easiest means to obtain many different chord/bass combinations, by simply using one, or at most, two or three fingers to play the chords. 1 -3 Fingered Chord Automatically produces bass and chord accompaniment for chords played in the Lower keyboard. It allows you to use a wider range of chord types than in the Single Finger mode. In the Fingered Chord mode, you play all the notes of the chord while the Auto Bass Chord function automatically selects the appropriate bass pattern. 1 -4 Custom A.B.C. A slight variation on the Fingered Chord mode. It allows you to determine what bass notes will be played in the accompaniment by playing a note on the Pedalboard along with the chords you play in the Lower keyboard. 2 Memory When you start a rhythm with this memory function on, A.B.C. automatic accompaniment keeps playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard. Lower Use the bottom right E Data Control button to turn on the Lower keyboard Memory function (Solid box indicates the function is effective). Selecting this keeps the chord accompaniment of the Lower Keyboard voices playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard. 2 -2 PEDAL Use the bottom right F Data Control button to turns on the Pedalboard Memory function (Solid box indicates the function is effective). Selecting this keeps the chord accompaniment of the Pedalboard voices playing even after you release your fingers from the Lower keyboard. 4 Rhythm and Accompaniment 2 -1 2) Chords Recognized in the Single Finger Mode Major, minor, 7th and minor 7th chords can all be played in the Single Finger mode. G F A G B A D B C With Single Finger, the chord produced will sound in the same octave regardless of where it is played on the Lower keyboard. E D NOTE: E NOTE: (Key of C) C Major chords: Press the root of the chord (the note that corresponds to the chord’s name). Cm Minor chords: Simultaneously press the root and any one black key to the left of it. PLAYING SINGLE FINGER CHORDS WITHOUT RHYTHM: Auto Bass Chord is generally used with rhythms to create full rhythmic accompaniment, but it can also be used in the Single Finger mode to add full continuous chords to your performance without the use of the rhythm. Simply leave the rhythm off in Single Finger mode, and play Single Finger chords from the Lower keyboard. C7 7th chords: Simultaneously press the root and any one white key to the left of it. Cm7 Minor 7th chords: Simultaneously press the root as well as any black key and any white key to the left of it. NOTE: If you forget to cancel the Single Finger or Fingered Chord accompaniment functions, single notes that you play will be sounded as continuous chords. NOTE: Minor, 7th and minor 7th chords with black key roots (such as B or G) are played in the same way as those with white key roots. 53 3) Chords Recognized in the Fingered Chord Mode (Key of C) C Cm C7 Cm7 Cmaj7 Cm maj7 C+5 C7+5 Cdim C7sus4 Cm7-5 C-5 C7-5 C6 Cm6 4 Rhythm and Accompaniment 6 Accompaniment Controls The Accompaniment function described in this section is independent of the A.B.C. accompaniment. When rhythms are used, A.B.C. provides rhythmical chords and bass, while the Accompaniment of this section provides arpeggiated chords and other instrumental embellishments. This control is selected from the Rhythm Menu and Rhythm Condition pages. 1 Press any of the RHYTHM buttons twice. RHYTHM SEQ. 1 SEQ. 2 MARCH WALTZ SWING BOUNCE SLOW ROCK SEQ. 3 SEQ. 4 TANGO LATIN 1 LATIN 2 8 BEAT 16 BEAT MAX MIN Rhythm Condition page 1 appears. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL VOL.: 0 REV.:12 54 BAL.: 0 ⁄ ’AUTO VARI. 2 Press the Page buttons to select PAGE 2. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE ACC.VOL.: 0 ”ON’OFF¤ ACC.REV.:24 TYPE:1 Rhythm Condition [PAGE 2] 1 DATA CONTROL 2 DATA CONTROL ACC.VOL.: 0 ”ON’OFF¤ ACC.REV.:24 TYPE:1 4 4 Rhythm and Accompaniment 3 1 ACCOMPANIMENT Determines the volume of the Accompaniment. Range: 0 - 24 2 On/Off On/off switches of the Accompaniment function. Use the top right Data Control buttons to turn on/off the Accompaniment function. 3 ACC. Reverb Determines the amount of reverb applied to the Accompaniment. When the panel REVERB control is set to the minimum, the setting here will have no effect. Range: 0 - 24 4 Type Four types of accompaniment are available. These settings provide various types of rhythmic and melodic accompaniment, and generally become more complex according to the type number. 3 Start the rhythm by pressing START button and play the Lower keyboard. An appropriate accompaniment pattern, suited to the current rhythm and the chord played on the Lower keyboard, will be played automatically. NOTE: Even if the Accompaniment Type is changed, the Intro/Ending and Fill In patterns remain the same. NOTE: When the Electone is turned on, the Accompaniment Volume is automatically set to 0 (factory setting). Be sure to set the Accompaniment Volume to the appropriate value when using the Accompaniment function. 55 7 Preset/User Keyboard Percussion The keyboard Percussion function features a total of 120 different drum and percussion sounds, playable from the keyboards and pedalboard. The Keyboard Percussion has two different modes, Preset and User. Preset Keyboard Percussion lets you play 43 different sounds from the Lower keyboard and Pedalboard, while the User Keyboard Percussion lets you freely assign the 120 available sounds to any key or pedal you wish. 1) To use the Preset Keyboard Percussion: 1 2 4 Turn off the Lower and/or Pedal voices by setting each voice’s volume to MIN. Rhythm and Accompaniment Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the LOWER/1 and/or PEDAL/2 buttons in the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION section on the left side of the panel. KEYBOARD PERCUSSION LOWER PEDAL DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <KBP1> ”LK PRESET ’USER1 3 Set the volume. The volume of the percussion sounds is set together with that of the rhythm volume. RHYTHM SEQ. 1 SEQ. 2 MARCH WALTZ SWING BOUNCE SLOW ROCK SEQ. 3 SEQ. 4 TANGO LATIN 1 LATIN 2 8 BEAT 16 BEAT MAX MIN 4 56 Play some notes on the Lower keyboard and/or Pedalboard. The 43 percussion sounds have been assigned to the keyboards as shown in the chart below. NOTE: Pressing the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION button call up the Menu display. You can select from Preset (LK/PK preset) or User (one of the eight Users you created). LK Preset/PK Preset is selected as the defaults. If not, select the Preset. Preset Keyboard Percussion Preset Percussion Assignments for the Lower Keyboard (43) O rc le O l d ve s 3 2 1 ol l 1 3 2 1 m ol se p la C d an gh H Hi o og ow L Ag o og h Ag ig H k oc w o Bl L d oo lock W B 1 d ll be ow en p C ng la m m m R ot m m m ru R lo D m C ru le D ng ia oo W Tr ia e C To To To h Sh To To To e h. h. h. us h ar nt nt nt Br us Sn ar Tr Sn ra e Br ar e st ar he Sn Sn Sy Sy Sy 4 Rhythm and Accompaniment er ak igh Sh a H c ui Low C ca igh ui C oH ng ow Bo o L h ng ig Bo ga H w on o h C a L Hig g on 1 C ale Low b 1 m Ti le ba m t Ti ane e al 2 t in b as r C bou Cym al 1 m ra mb Ta est Cy h rc ra l 1 O st ba he m rc y 1 O h C al b s ra m C Cy n e pe id R at O ed 1 s i-h lo im H tC R t a m h 1 i-h ru ig H e D L erb m ar ru ev Sn e D R vy ar rum ea Sn e D m H avy ar ru He Sn re D m t a ru gh Sn e D Li vy ar um ea Sn Dr H um ss um Dr Ba Dr ss ss Ba Ba ert c on C NOTE: Preset Percussion Assignments for the Pedalboard (18) h. nt Sy h. nt Sy h. nt Sy m To m To m To m To m To m To 1 2 n pe O y av He rb ve Re t gh Li m Ri ed os Cl um Dr um Dr um Dr y av He um Dr um Dr 1 l1 ba m Cy ra st he l1 rc O ba m Cy h as l1 Cr ba m Cy at -h Hi 3 de Ri 1 e ar Sn at -h Hi 2 e ar Sn ss Ba e ar Sn e ar Sn 3 ll Ro 1 ot Sh h us Br h us Br e ar Sn e ar Sn You can rearrange the key assignments of the drum and percussion sounds using the following User Keyboard Percussion function. 1 57 2) To use the User Keyboard Percussion: A total of 120 different drum and percussion sounds can be assigned to any key or pedal, and your original setups can be saved to eight memory locations: User 1 through User 8. (For this example, use User1) 1 Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the LOWER/1 button in the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION section. KEYBOARD PERCUSSION LOWER <KBP1> ”LK PRESET ’USER1 PEDAL 4 Rhythm and Accompaniment The Menu display appears on the LCD, and indicates that the LK (Lower Keyboard) PRESET is currently selected. The Menu can be selected from LK PRESET and eight Users, USER 1 through USER 8. When the PEDAL/2 button is used to call up the Menu display: KEYBOARD PERCUSSION LOWER <KBP2> ”PK PRESET ’USER1 PEDAL The Menu can be selected from PK (Pedalboard) PRESET and eight Users, USER 1 through USER 8. 2 Select User 1 using the bottom right Data Control buttons. This means that you change the function of the Keyboard Percussion button from Preset to User. You have selected User 1 for the LOWER/1 button. When you select one of the Users, a Page number will be added to the top right side of the display. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <KBP1> [COPY] ’LK PRESET ”USER1 58 ⁄ NOTE: User 1 and User 2 contain the LK Preset data and PK Preset data, respectively, as the defaults. 3 Press the Page buttons to select PAGE 2. The page 2 allows you to assign the instruments to each key/ pedalboard. DATA CONTROL 1 3 DATA CONTROL ‚⁄CYMBAL [SET] ¤ 01:Crash Cym1[CLEAR] 2 4 1 Group Lets you select the percussion group you want using the top left Data Control buttons. The percussion groups are 12, 01 – 12. (Refer to the User Keyboard Percussion Categories list below.) 4 Rhythm and Accompaniment 2 Instrument Names The individual instruments are shown in the display and can be selected with the appropriate Data Control buttons. (Refer to the User Keyboard Percussion Categories list below.) 3 Set Assigns the selected instrument to the key you wish. (See the following explanation in the step #4.) 4 Clear This function is used to erase User assignment for User 1. CLEAR works in two ways: either to erase a single instrument, or to erase all instruments. (See step #5 below.) NOTE: Playing back EL-100’s MDR reproduces the instrument condition set by EL-900/ 700/500. 59 User Keyboard Percussion Categories Category LCD Category LCD 01 CYMBAL 01:Crash Cym1 08 CUICA/SURDO 01:Cuica High 02:Crash Cym2 02:Cuica Med. 03:CrashCym M 03:Cuica Low 04:Ride Cym1 04:Tamborim O 05:Ride Cym2 05:Tamborim M 06:RideCymCup 06:Surdo Open 07:Orch.Cym1 07:Surdo Mute 08:Orch.Cym2 08:Surdo Rim 09:Orch.Cym M 10:Cym March 02 HI-HAT 4 Rhythm and Accompaniment 03 SNARE DRUM 09:Surdo Muff 09 TIMBALE/COW 11:Cym BrShot 02:Timbale1 L 12:Tam-Tam 03:Timbale2 H 01:HH Open 04:Timbale2 L 02:HH Close 05:Timbale3 H 03:HH Pedal1 06:Timbale3 L 04:HH Pedal2 07:Timbale4 H 05:AnalogHH O 08:Timbale 4 L 06:AnalogHH C 09:Cowbell1 01:SD Light 10:Cowbell2 02:SD Heavy 11:Cowbell3 03:SD Rim1 04:SD Rim2 04 SNARE BRUSH 12:Cowbell4 10 PERCUSSION1 06 BASS DRUM 02:Shaker 06:SD Accent2 03:Maracas H 07:SD Reverb1 04:Maracas L 08:SD Reverb2 05:GuiroShort 09:Synth.SD 06:Guiro Long 10:Orch.SD 07:Wood High 11:SD Roll 08:Wood Med. 12:Analog SD 09:Wood Low 01:SD BrShot1 10:Claves 02:SD BrShot2 11:Castanet 01:Tom1 12:Vibraslap 11 PERCUSSION2 02:Agogo Low 03:Tom3 03:Triangle O 04:Tom4 04:Triangle C 05:TomBrShot1 05:Windbell1 06:TomBrShot2 06:Windbell2 07:TomBrShot3 07:Tambourine 08:TomBrShot4 08:Pandeiro 09:Synth.Tom1 09:Bell 10:Synth.Tom2 10:Hand Claps 11:Synth.Tom3 11:Fingersnap 01:BD Light 12:Scratch 03:BD Attack 13:Noise Per. 12 PERCUSSION3 01:Kotsuzumi1 04:Synth.BD 02:Kotsuzumi2 05:BD March 03:Kotsuzumi3 06:Concert BD 04:Kotsuzumi4 07:Analog BD1 05:Ohtsuzumi1 08:Analog BD2 06:Ohtsuzumi2 01:Conga High 07:Taiko1 02:Conga Low 08:Taiko2 03:Conga Slap 09:Ohdaiko1 04:Conga Muff 10:Ohdaiko2 05:CongaSlide 11:Kakegoe1 06:Bongo High 12:Kakegoe2 07:Bongo Low 13:Kakegoe3 08:Bongo Slap 09:Bongo Mute 60 01:Agogo High 02:Tom2 02:BD Heavy 07 CONGA/BONGO 01:Cabasa 05:SD Accent1 03:SD BrRoll 05 TOM 01:Timbale1 H 4 To assign an instrument to a particular key or pedal: Simultaneously hold down the Data Control button corresponding to [Set] and press the key (or pedal) to which the instrument is to be assigned. The currently displayed instrument will be assigned to the key you press down as a part of User 1. Upper Keyboard DATA CONTROL ‚ﬂBASS DRUM 02:BD Heavy [SET] ¤ [CLEAR] Lower Keyboard or Pedalboard Continue the operation above to build up your own User Keyboard Percussion set. If you want, you can erase the instrument assignment. Rhythm and Accompaniment 5 4 To erase one instrument: Simultaneously hold down the Data Control button corresponding to CLEAR and press the key (or pedal) corresponding to the instrument you wish to erase. (A short ‘beep’ sound indicates that the instrument has been erased.) To erase all instruments: 1. Press, then release the Data Control button corresponding to CLEAR. The following display appears, prompting confirmation of the operation. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL ≥ Assign All Clear?≥ ≥ [CLEAR] [CANCEL]≥ 2. Press any of the bottom left Data Control buttons (corresponding to [Clear] in the display) to erase all data. When [Clear] is selected, a ‘Completed’ message momentarily appears on the display. Press any of the bottom right Data Control buttons (corresponding to [Cancel] in the display) to abort the operation. NOTE: Though eight User Keyboard Percussion setups can be created, they cannot be memorized to Registration Memory. Only on/off data and the Keyboard Percussion Menu are memorized to Registration Memory. NOTE: Two User Keyboard Percussions currently selected by LOWER/1 and PEDAL/2 are playable if both buttons are on. 61 3) Other User Keyboard Percussion Functions Additional operations in the User mode include copying of Lower/Pedal Preset Keyboard Percussion to one of the Users, and copying from one User location to another. To copy the Lower Preset Keyboard Percussion to one of the Users: The following operation allows you to copy the Lower Preset Keyboard Percussion to one of the Users. The copy operation is convenient for creating a slight modification from the Preset. 1. Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the LOWER/ 1 button in the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION section. 4 2. Select the User number to which you want to copy using the bottom right Data Control buttons. Rhythm and Accompaniment DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <KBP1> [COPY] ’LK PRESET ”USER1 ⁄ 3. Press the top right Data Control buttons to select Copy function. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <KBP1> [COPY] ’LK PRESET ”USER1 ⁄ The following display appears: DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL ≥ ÚÆPRESET Copy? ≥ ≥ [COPY] [CANCEL]≥ 4. Press top left Data Control buttons to select the copy source (in this case, Lower Preset Keyboard Percussion). DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL ≥ ÚÆPRESET Copy? ≥ ≥ [COPY] [CANCEL]≥ 62 5. Press any of the bottom left Data Control buttons (corresponding to [Copy] in the display) to copy the data. When [Copy] is selected, a ‘Completed’ message momentarily appears on the display. Press any of the bottom right Data Control buttons (corresponding to [Cancel] in the display) to abort the operation. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL ≥ ≥ PRESET Copy Completed!! ≥ ≥ The Pedal Preset Keyboard Percussion (PK PRESET) can be copied in the same way. DATA CONTROL 4 DATA CONTROL Rhythm and Accompaniment <KBP2> ”PK PRESET ’USER1 To copy from one User location to another: 1. Turn on the Keyboard Percussion function by pressing the LOWER/ 1 (or PEDAL/2) button in the KEYBOARD PERCUSSION section. 2. Select the User number to which you want to copy using the bottom right Data Control buttons. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <KBP1> [COPY] ’LK PRESET ”USER3 ⁄ 3. Press the top right Data Control buttons to select Copy function. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <KBP1> [COPY] ’LK PRESET ”USER3 ⁄ The following display appears: DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL ≥ ÚÆUSER1 Copy? ≥ ≥ [COPY] [CANCEL]≥ 63 4. Select the User number from which you want to copy using the top left Data Control buttons. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL ≥ ÚÆUSER1 Copy? ≥ ≥ [COPY] [CANCEL]≥ In this case, the destination User number will not be displayed as the source number, or selectable on the display. 5. Press any of the bottom left Data Control buttons (corresponding to [Copy] in the display) to copy the data. When [Copy] is selected, a ‘Completed’ message momentarily appears on the display. Press any of the bottom right Data Control buttons (corresponding to [Cancel] in the display) to abort the operation. 4 Rhythm and Accompaniment DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL ≥ ≥ USER1 Copy Completed!! ≥ ≥ 8 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) The Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) feature automatically adds a harmony part to the melodies you play on the Upper keyboard. The harmony is derived from the chords you play on the Lower keyboard – or from the chords that are played for you, if you use Automatic Accompaniment. Melody On Chord has three different modes, each providing a different set of harmonies to accompany the melody played. To display the M.O.C. function, press A.B.C./M.O.C. button in the DISPLAY SELECT and then select the Page 2. DISPLAY SELECT 64 VOICE DISPLAY EFFECT SET A.B.C. M.O.C. FOOT SW. REGIST. SHIFT PITCH MIDI TREMOLO (FAST) M.O.C. [PAGE 2] DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <MOC> MODE:OFF 1 2 3 4 5 ¤ OFF 1 2 3 1 Mode You can select one of three automatic accompaniment functions here. Each press of bottom left F Data Control button selects Off, 1, 2 and 3, in order. Each press of bottom left E Data Control button selects in the reversed order. 4 Rhythm and Accompaniment 2 Off Cancels the Melody On Chord function. 3 1 Produces harmonies of up to two notes in a range close to the melody played. 4 2 Produces harmonies of up to three notes in a range close to the melody played. 5 3 Produces harmonies of up to four notes in a range relatively distant from the melody played. NOTE: Melody On Chord applies only when the Upper keyboard voice section’s volume is set to the appropriate value. 65 About the Rhythm Sequence Rhythm Sequence is built up with various different rhythm patterns, and can be programmed by the other Electone such as EL-900. The EL-100 doesn’t have Rhythm Sequence function, but it can read and load the rhythm sequence data recorded on the MDR (a floppy disk) to its four SEQ buttons in the Rhythm section and play back them, as follows: 1. Insert the floppy disk containing rhythm sequence data into the EL-100’ s MDR slot. The rhythm sequence data is recorded as a part of registration data (explained on page 78). 2. Select the song number containing the registration data and press PLAY button on the MDR to load the data. The rhythm sequence data has been loaded to the Electone, or SEQ button(s). 4 Rhythm and Accompaniment 3. Press the desired SEQ button. The SEQ button’s lamp will be lit. NOTE: RHYTHM SEQ. 1 SEQ. 2 MARCH WALTZ SWING BOUNCE SLOW ROCK SEQ. 3 SEQ. 4 TANGO LATIN 1 LATIN 2 8 BEAT 16 BEAT MAX You can have up to all four rhythm sequences play back automatically by pressing the SEQ buttons. MIN 4. Turn the START button on and play the rhythm sequence(s). NOTE: RHYTHM INTRO. ENDING SYNCHRO START START FILL IN Four types of metronome sounds, simple metronome, two four, three four and four four, are assigned to the SEQ 1 – 4 buttons, respectively, as the defaults. NOTE: During the rhythm sequence playback, the rhythm name currently played back is displayed on the LCD. 66 As soon as you load the sequence data using MDR, the default settings on each SEQ button, four types of metronome sounds, will be overwritten, or lost. Turning the power off resets the Electone to the defaults. Also, pressing any of the BASIC REGIST. buttons generates a short beep sound and retrieves the metronome sounds. 5 Registration Memory Registration Memory allows you to store virtually all the settings you make on the panel and LCD, providing a convenient way to instantly change all voice settings and rhythms while you’re playing, with the simple touch of a single button on the Registration Memory panel. REGISTRATION MEMORY M. / TO DISK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D. Functions and settings that cannot be memorized are: ● Reverb type ● Pan, Reverb, Tune and Volume settings for the instruments (Drum and percussion sounds) ● User Keyboard Percussion settings (except for User numbers currently assigned to the Lower/Pedal buttons) ● Registration Shift settings ● Pitch/Transpose settings ● User rhythm patterns in a Pattern Disk (except for User rhythm numbers currently assigned to the Dotted buttons) ● Rhythm Sequence ● MIDI settings When turned on, various types of basic registrations are preset on the numbered buttons from 1 through 8. No. Name 1 Marching Band 5 Latin 2 Polka 6 2 Beat 3 8 Beat Ballad 7 Organ Ballad 4 Strings Waltz 8 Dance Pop When you record your registration setting to one of the numbered buttons, the preset registration on that button will be overwritten and erased as a result. When you turn off the Electone, your own registration setting(s) will be reset to the default, or erased. Turning the Electone back to on restores the preset registration settings (the defaults). If you want to keep your own registration settings, you need to record them onto a floppy disk before turning the Electone off. Refer to page 68 for details on saving registration data to disk. Registration Memory No. Name 5 NOTE: 1 Storing Registrations Newly created registrations you make can be stored to the Registration Memory panel buttons. All registrations in Registration Memory can also be saved to floppy disk for future recall. 1 2 After creating your original registration, decide which numbered button you wish to store. Be careful when turning off the power, since it erases all your existing data. Always save your important data to a floppy disk using M.D.R. (page 68) in advance. While holding down the M (Memory) button in the Registration Memory section, press the numbered button to which you wish to save your registration. REGISTRATION MEMORY M. / TO DISK 1 1. While holding down M button.. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D. 2. ...Press desired numbered button. When the registration is stored, the lamp above the numbered button flashes momentarily. NOTE: Although the number of the Registration Memory buttons of EL-100 are limited to eight, from Registration Memory 1 through Registration Memory 8, the Registration Memory 9 through Registration Memory 16 can be accessible when using MDR playback and Registration Shift functions. 67 2 Selecting Registrations NOTE: Simply press the numbered button that corresponds to the registration you wish to select. Although the number of registration memory locations is limited to eight, from 1 through 8, the registrations assigned in the memory locations from 9 through 16 of an upper model are accessible using the following method. To select the number between the registration memory 9 and 16, press one of the eight registration memory buttons while holding down the VOICE DISPLAY button in the DISPLAY SELECT section (in this case, the buttons 1 through 8 correspond to the buttons 9 through 16, respectively). Any of the numbered button lamps is not lit while the registration between 9 and 16 is selected. Using the D (Disable) button: Rhythm and automatic accompaniment patterns also change when you select different Registration Memory buttons. Pressing the D (Disable) button allows you to keep the same rhythm and accompaniment patterns throughout all your registration changes, or make your own rhythm selections if you want to. 5 REGISTRATION MEMORY NOTE: The settings, can be disabled, are: ■ Current rhythm pattern ■ Rhythm Condition ■ Tempo ■ A.B.C./M.O.C. settings M. / TO DISK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D. Registration Memory 3 Saving the Registration Data to Disk 1 Insert a formatted disk into the disk slot under the Music Disk Recorder (M.D.R.). Make certain that the disk is either blank or has data you can erase. If the disk is new and unformatted, you will have to format it. Refer to the instructions how to format a disk (page 75). 2 Select a song number on the M.D.R. using the SONG SELECT buttons. You can also select a song number shown on the display using the appropriate Data Control button and (if necessary) using Page buttons to display the appropriate page. A song name is displayed next to the song number that already contains data. RECORD UPPER LOWER NOTE: See pages 82 and 83 for the details on saving/recalling registrations to/from the M.D.R. NOTE: Song name may not be displayed depending on the Electone model created the data. PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT <SONG NAME> 01: SONG REPEAT PAUSE FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SONG DEL. SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER There are 40 songs (ten song numbers on the four pages), or memory locations, available on a single disk. 68 ⁄ 3 While holding down the RECORD button on the M.D.R., press the M (Memory) button in Registration Memory. RECORD UPPER LOWER PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL TO FROM SONG COPY SONG REPEAT PAUSE STOP SHIFT SONG DEL. PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER REGISTRATION MEMORY M. / TO DISK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D. This operation saves all eight registrations in Registration Memory to one song. The other 39 available songs on the disk can be used for saving additional batches of 8 registrations. 5 Registration Memory 4 Registration Shift The Registration Shift function allows you to change registrations, all the settings you make on the panel and LCD, without taking your hands from the keyboards. Using the Right Footswitch on the Expression Pedal, you can “jump” to a specified registration or step through the panel registrations in sequence, either in numeric order or in any order you specify. Press the REGIST. SHIFT button in the DISPLAY SELECT section. REGIST. SHIFT page will be displayed. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY EFFECT SET A.B.C. M.O.C. FOOT SW. REGIST. SHIFT PITCH MIDI TREMOLO (FAST) REGIST SHIFT Page Select one of the modes using the bottom left Data Control buttons. Registration Shift has three modes: Shift, Jump and User. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <R.SHIFT> MODE:OFF 1 2 3 4 OFF SHIFT JUMP USER 69 1 Off Turns off the Registration Shift assignment. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <R.SHIFT> MODE:OFF 2 Shift Selects the Shift mode. In the Shift mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects the Registration Memory presets in their numerical order. The numbered buttons light up as they are selected. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <R.SHIFT> MODE:SHIFT 1˘ 2 5 NOTE: Registration Memory • Although the number of the Registration Memory buttons of EL-100 is limited to eight, from Registration Memory 1 through Registration Memory 8, you can select the other eight Registration Memory numbers, the Registration Memory 9 through Registration Memory 16. • After the last preset is reached, the function “wraps around” to select the first preset again. • The current registration number and the number next to it will be displayed. 3 Jump Selects the Jump mode. In the Jump mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects a specified panel registration. ■ To set the Jump mode: 1. When you select the Jump mode, one of the registration numbers will be displayed at the right side of the display. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <R.SHIFT> MODE:JUMP REGIST: 1 2. Select the registration number to which you want to jump using the bottom right Data Control buttons. Each press of the bottom right Data Control buttons selects next number. 3. Pressing the Right Footswitch jumps to select the designated panel registration. NOTE: Although the number of the Registration Memory buttons of EL-100 are limited to eight, from Registration Memory 1 through Registration Memory 8, you can select the other eight Registration Memory numbers, the Registration Memory 9 through Registration Memory 16. 70 4 User Selects the User mode. In the User mode, each press of the Right Footswitch selects registrations according to the order you specify. 1. When you select the User mode, the Shift End selector function, how the Registration Shift function acts when it reaches to the end, will be added to the right side of the display. Also, page number will be shown at the top right side. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <R.SHIFT> MODE:USER <S.END> ⁄ STOP STOP TOP NEXT SONG 2. Select the Shift End type using the bottom right Data Control buttons. The following three types are available: Stop: Selects the last registration and quits the operation. Next Song: After reaching the last preset, then automatically calls up the registration data of the next song. This function is handy for you to play a song containing more than 16 registrations. Recording the songs onto the M.D.R. using this function allows you to play back them successively. 3. Press the Page buttons to select Page 2. The following display appears. You can edit the registration shift settings of your own here. 1 -1 1 -4 2 -1 2 -2 DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL 5 Always press the PLAY button to start the songs and activate the Next Song function on the M.D.R. The CUSTOM PLAY button will not cause to activate the Next Song function. Registration Memory Top: After reaching the last preset, then selects the first preset again and repeats the operation. NOTE: NOTE: Using the Next Song function will not read the User rhythm patterns/sequences while playing back a rhythm. NOTE: The cursor cannot be moved unless registration numbers have been entered. NOTE: <R.SHIFT>[INS][DEL]¤ T_ 1¯????????????????? The registration to which the cursor is currently positioned is set on the Electone. However, moving the cursor cannot activate the Shift End function. Cursor 1 -2 1 -3 1 -2 1 -3 NOTE: 1 POSITION (Cursor Controls) 1 -1 1 -2 1 -3 1 -4 Moves the cursor to the first position. Moves the cursor one step to the left. Moves the cursor one step to the right. Moves the cursor to the last position. Up to 80 steps can be memorized. Although the number of registrations shown in the display at a time is limited, the display scrolls to the right to show the currently entered registration number as you enter them. NOTE: The Shift End mark will automatically be put at the end of the registrations you entered. N ¯ NEXT SONG TOP 71 2 Data (Data Controls) The pair of the top right Data Control buttons is used to enter or delete registration numbers in the registration row. Move the cursor to the desired position and edit the registration data. 2 -1 [INS] Insert For initially entering a registration or inserting a registration number just before the current cursor position. First, move the cursor to the position at which you want to insert. Then press the desired Registration Memory button (the lamp above the selected button will light), and press the Data Control button corresponding to INS. The new registration number is inserted at the cursor position and all other numbers to the right of the cursor are moved to accommodate the new number. 2 -2 [DEL] Delete For deleting a registration number at the current cursor position. To delete the unnecessary number, move the cursor to a numbered position and press the Data Control button corresponding to DEL. 5 Registration Memory Registration numbers cannot be entered beyond the Registration Shift function’s capacity of 80. END will automatically be placed at the end of the registration shift setting. The following message momentarily appears when the 80 spaces have been filled: First delete unnecessary registrations, then perform the operation again. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL ≥ ≥ 72 Data Full! ≥ ≥ 6 Music Disk Recorder (M.D.R.) The Music Disk Recorder (M.D.R.) lets you store the registration data and load back to the Electone as well as record your performance and play back the data. Moreover, the M.D.R. allows you to execute song copy operation and play back commercially available XG song data. 1 Precautions on M.D.R. Follow the important precautions below. To eject a floppy disk: Compatible Disk Type 3.5" 2DD and 2HD type floppy disks can be used. Inserting/Ejecting Floppy Disks ■ To insert a floppy disk into the disk drive: Hold the disk so that the label of the disk is facing upward and the sliding shutter is facing forward, towards the disk slot. Carefully insert the disk into the slot, slowly pushing it all the way in until it clicks into place and the eject button pops out. Press the eject button slowly as far as it will go; the disk will automatically pop out. When the disk is fully ejected, carefully remove it by hand. Never attempt to remove the disk or turn the power off during recording, reading and playing back. Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk drive. 6 Music Disk Recorder If the eject button is pressed too quickly, or if it is not pressed in as far as it will go, the disk may not eject properly. The eject button may become stuck in a half-pressed position with the disk extending from the drive slot by only a few millimeters. If this happens, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk, since using force in this situation can damage the disk drive mechanism or the floppy disk. Floppy disk slot LED (Lamp in-use) Be sure to confirm that the lamp of STOP button on M.D.R. is turned off before ejecting a floppy disk from the slot. Never eject the floppy disk before the STOP lamp lights up. Eject button NOTE: When the EL-100 is turned on, the LED below the floppy disk slot will be lit indicating that the M.D.R. is ready to use. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again, or push the disk back into the slot and then repeat the eject procedure. Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. A floppy disk left in the drive for extended periods can easily pick up dust and dirt that can cause data read and write errors. 73 Cleaning the Disk Drive Read/Write Head ● This instrument employs a precision read/write magnetic head. The magnetic head will pick up a layer of magnetic particles from the disks for an extended period of time. The stained magnetic head will eventually cause read and write errors. ● To maintain the disk drive in optimum working order Yamaha recommends that you use a commercially available dry-type head-cleaning disk to clean the head about once a month. ■ To protect your data (Write-protect Tab): To prevent accidental erasure of important data, slide the disk’s write-protect tab to the “protect” position (tab open).If you attempt to modify the disk when the write-protect tab is set to “on” position, “Prot (Protected)” will appear on the LED display in the M.D.R. section indicating that the operation is not possible. Also please check if the write-protect tab is set to “off” position when you record data. Protect Off (tab closed: unlocked) NOTE: Rear side Ask your Yamaha dealer about the availability of proper headcleaning disk. Shutter About the Floppy Disks ■ To handle floppy disks with care: Do not place heavy objects on a disk or bend or apply pressure to the disk in any way. Always keep floppy disks in their protective cases when they are not in use. 6 Music Disk Recorder Do not expose the disk to direct sunlight, extremely high or low temperatures, or excessive humidity, dust or liquids. Do not open the sliding shutter and touch the exposed surface of the floppy disk inside. Do not expose the disk to magnetic fields, such as those produced by televisions, speakers, motors, etc., since magnetic fields can partially or completely erase data on the disk, rendering it unreadable. Never use a floppy disk with a deformed shutter or housing. Do not attach anything other than the provided labels to a floppy disk. Also make sure that labels are attached in the proper location. Write-protect tab Protect On (tab open: locked) ■ Data backup Yamaha recommends that you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks by using this function. To make a backup disk use the Disk Copy function on page 92. Improved Potentiality of the M.D.R. The M.D.R. of the EL-100 begins reading all data as soon as you insert a disk into the floppy disk slot. Thus, inserting a disk causes to produce a sound (reading sound) indicating that the M.D.R. is in the reading process. The improvement of the M.D.R. allows you to start song playback immediately, to be free from the reading sound during playback and to record the song playback using the several song numbers with the Next Song function. NOTE: Ejecting the disk will lose the data loaded from the disk except for the currently selected and played back song. NOTE: The time reading sound is produced is in proportion to the amount of data recorded in the disk. You can eject the disk whenever you are not using the M.D.R. and don’t want to be bothered with the reading sound. 74 2 Formatting a Disk Before recording, the disk must first be formatted. RECORD 1 UPPER Put the disk, label facing up, into the disk drive (floppy disk slot). “Fort” will appear on the LED display indicating that the inserted disk requires to be formatted. LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG DEL. SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER RECORD 2 UPPER While holding down the SHIFT button, press the FORMAT button. This step puts the format operation on stand-by, indicated by the dashes on the LED display and the flashing LED (lamp) above the FORMAT button. LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER RECORD 3 UPPER <SONG NAME> 01: SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL PLAY 6 SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY Music Disk Recorder Press the FORMAT button again to begin formatting. Formatting is engaged and the LED above the FORMAT button stays lit. The number “160” appears on the LED display and counts down to “001” as the disk is being formatted. When formatting is completed, operation returns to the original STOP status. The following Song Name display appears after the operation. LOWER MUSIC DISK RECORDER ⁄ The song number can be selected using SONG SELECT button or the Data Control buttons on the bottom row. Up to 10 song numbers can be selectable in a single page. The page numbers, from 1 through 4, are also shown at the top right side of the display. A total of 40 song locations are created. The song names next to each song number are left blank and indicate that each song number doesn’t contain any data. Formatting a disk erases all the data in the disk and makes it ready to record. The erased data by formatting will be lost permanently. Check if the disk contains your important data, or not, before executing the operation. About SHIFT Button You will find the SHIFT button (printed in green) at the top right side of the M.D.R. section. Some buttons in the M.D.R. section have dual functions: the first function is printed in white above each button; the second function is printed in green below each button. The SHIFT button is used to select the second functions by pressing each function button while holding down the SHIFT. 75 3 Recording 1) To record a song: 1 Set the desired registrations on the Electone. Make all the Electone settings necessary for the song you will record. This means entering the all registrations you will need for the entire performance in the Registration Memory. Make sure also to select the registration that you will use at the beginning of the song. 2 3 Put a formatted disk into the disk slot. NOTE: The song numbers 01 through 40 are available and up to 40 songs can be stored on a disk. However, available song numbers may be reduced depending on the amount of the song data you have recorded. See page 94 for the information about the total amount of memory left on a floppy disk. RECORD UPPER LOWER SONG REPEAT Use the SONG SELECT (G, H) buttons to select the song number for recording. You can also select the song number by pressing the Data Control buttons. PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER DATA CONTROL 6 DATA CONTROL <SONG NAME> 01: ⁄ Music Disk Recorder RECORD UPPER 4 Press the RECORD button. The RECORD lamp lights up and the PLAY and CUSTOM PLAY lamps begins blinking, indicating that the Music Disk Recorder is ready to record. LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER NOTE: If the selected song number already contains recorded data, small bars (“--”) appear at the left part of LED display and flash along with the song number, warning you that the selected song number already contains recorded data. If you want to execute recording operation over the song number, press the RECORD button again. If you don’t want, select another song number for recording or press the STOP button to cancel recording. RECORD 5 UPPER Press the PLAY button. The PLAY lamp lights up and small bars flash across the LED display from left to right. This indicates M.D.R. is reading the registrations and other settings. SONG REPEAT PAUSE LOWER PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER PEDAL CONTROL STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG DEL. TO FROM SONG COPY MUSIC DISK RECORDER 76 LOWER SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY RECORD 6 UPPER After numbers appear on the LED display of the M.D.R., begin playing. Once the setup operation in step #5 is complete, a number will appear on the LED display indicating that you can begin recording your performance. The number also indicates the amount of memory left on the disk. LOWER SONG REPEAT PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY PAUSE STOP SHIFT PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER NOTE: The short time it takes to set up for recording is recorded as well, causing a short pause before playback of the song. If you make a mistake during recording: RECORD UPPER 1. Press the PLAY button while the M.D.R. is still running. This stops the recording and returns you to the starting point of the song. The letters “rE” (retry) appear on the left side of the LED display and the PLAY and CUSTOM PLAY LEDs start flashing, indicating that you can re-record the song. LOWER SONG REPEAT PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY PAUSE STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER 2. Press PLAY again to begin re-recording the song. Re-recording starts from the beginning of the song and replaces the previously recorded performance with the newly recorded performance. 6 7 When you finish playing, press the STOP button. After the small bars flash to draw a square on the LED to indicate the processing for stop, the STOP lamp lights up, indicating the recording process is finished. The song number will be displayed on the LCD display, indicating that the number contains recorded data. SONG REPEAT PAUSE LOWER PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL PLAY SHIFT SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP Music Disk Recorder RECORD UPPER SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER Indicates the M.D.R. is in the stop process. <SONG NAME> 01:SONG 1 ⁄ Never eject the floppy disk before the STOP lamp lights up. NOTE: When the available memory reaches “008” or less, the numbers begin flashing to warn you. If this happens, stop recording before the display reaches “000.” 8 To hear your newly recorded performance, press the PLAY button. Play back will begin after a couple of seconds. For more information on playback and other playback-related functions, see page 84. Never attempt to press the eject button or turn the power off during recording, reading and playing back. Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk drive. Be sure to remove the floppy disk from the disk drive before turning off the power. 77 Outline of M.D.R. Operation Though the M.D.R. is as easy to operate as a cassette tape recorder, it is far move versatile. Since it records all Electone settings and control movements as well as the notes you play as digital data, it allows you much more flexibility and control than even the most sophisticated tape recorder. Basically, the M.D.R. independently records the following three types of data: Registration data (including Bulk data) All registrations stored to the Registration Memory numbered buttons as well as the registration currently set to the panel, are recorded at the beginning of a song, before the actual recording of your performance. Bulk data is also saved to the song with the Registration data. Bulk data includes: Registration Shift settings, and Rhythm Pattern (User rhythms) and Rhythm Sequence data. Performance data The M.D.R. records your performance on the keyboards and pedalboard of the Electone exactly as you play it, even recording the strength at which you play the keys and how hard you press them down while playing. The various types of performance data – Upper, Lower, Pedal and Lead – are recorded to independent “tracks,” so that you can change any one of them without affecting the others. Control data All changes you make on the Electone during your performance are recorded in real time. These include registration changes, the use of the expression pedals and footswitches. 6 Music Disk Recorder 78 2) To record each part separately: You can also record the parts of your performance independently; for example, first recording the chords and bass to the song (using the Lower and Pedalboard), and after that recording the melody (using the Upper Keyboard). This function also lets you record the lead voice, keyboard percussion and performance control data, such as registration changes and expression pedal operation, separately from the other parts of the song. 1 Set up the M.D.R. for recording, as you did in the section above. The first steps in recording parts separately are the same as for normal recording on page 76: 1. Memorize all the registrations needed for your performance to the Registration Memory numbered buttons, and set the registration that will be used at the beginning of the song. 2. Insert a formatted disk. 3. Select the song number to which you will record your performance. 4. Press the RECORD button to make the Music Disk Recorder ready to record. RECORD UPPER SONG REPEAT PAUSE LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT Music Disk Recorder 2 Select the parts for recording. Pressing the RECORD in the procedure 1-4. above turns on the all parts’ LEDs in the upper left row indicating that each part is ready to record. Press the RECORD buttons for each part in the upper left row to turn off the parts you don’t want to record. For this example, press RECORD/UPPER, the PLAY/UPPER lamp in the upper right row lights up. 6 PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER ■ RECORD/UPPER Records the performance data of the Upper keyboard when turned on. Recording is cancelled when turned off. ■ RECORD/LOWER Records the performance data of the Lower keyboard when turned on. Recording is cancelled when turned off. ■ RECORD/PEDAL Records the performance data of the Pedalboard when turned on. Recording is cancelled when turned off. ■ RECORD/CONTROL Records the control data when turned on. Recording is cancelled when turned off. (See Outline of M.D.R. Operation on the previous page.) This example operation disables recording of the Upper part. 79 Separate recording for Lead Voice and/or Keyboard Percussion parts: The Lead voice and the Keyboard Percussion can be recorded/played back separately although they are not shown on the M.D.R. panel. Separate recording for Lead Voice and/or Keyboard Percussion parts: Hold down the SHIFT button and simultaneously press the appropriate button in the top row in the procedure #2 above. The two buttons (indicated in the illustration at the right) function as Lead Voice and Keyboard Percussion selectors in the record mode. ■ RECORD/LEAD Records the performance data of the Lead voice when turned on. Recording is cancelled when turned off. ■ RECORD/K.PERC. Records the performance data of the Keyboard Percussion when turned on. Recording is cancelled when turned off. Keyboard percussion can be recorded/played back independently from rhythm section. 3 4 6 RECORD PLAY SHIFT (LEAD) (K.PERC.) (LEAD) (K.PERC.) PAUSE REM.MEM. NOTE: If you don’t record the Lead Voice and Keyboard Percussion parts separately, the Lead part will be recorded as the Upper data and the Keyboard Percussion part will be recorded as the Lower/ Pedal data. Press the PLAY button, and start playing after numbers appear in the display. For this example, play the lower keyboard and pedalboard. Music Disk Recorder Press the STOP button when you are finished with your performance to stop recording. Now that you’ve recorded the first parts of your performance. Press the RECORD button to set up recording of the next part, Upper part in this case. RECORD 5 UPPER Press the RECORD button. In this case, the song (number) contains the performance data of the Lower and Pedal in addition to the registration and setup data. The small bars (“--”) appear at the left part of LED display and flash along with the song number, warning you that the selected song number already contains recorded data. LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT RECORD 6 PEDAL CONTROL CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER UPPER Press the RECORD button again to record another part (Upper part). The RECORD lamp lights up and the PLAY and CUSTOM PLAY lamps begins blinking, indicating that the Music Disk Recorder is ready to record. LOWER LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER RECORD 7 UPPER Press the RECORD buttons for each part in the upper left row to turn off the parts you have already recorded. In this case, press RECORD/LOWER, RECORD/PEDAL and RECORD/CONTROL to turn them off. SONG REPEAT PAUSE LOWER PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER PEDAL CONTROL STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY MUSIC DISK RECORDER 80 LOWER SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY RECORD 8 UPPER Press the CUSTOM PLAY button to start recording of the new part or parts (Upper part). Playback of the previously recorded parts starts immediately. The CUSTOM PLAY button is used here to record only the parts that have been selected for recording, and play back only those parts that have been selected for playback. While you listen to the parts being played back, start playing the melody on the Upper keyboard. Since registration data has already been recorded with the first parts of the song, recording begins immediately. When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback is automatically stopped and the STOP status is resumed. SONG REPEAT PAUSE LOWER PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER NOTE: The CUSTOM PLAY button is used to record or play back the parts and data other than the registration data. NOTE: The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. If you want to change the song length, first delete the existing song (see Song Delete on page 92) and record again. Punch-in Recording 6 You can retry to change specified measure(s) or a specific part you don’t want to use. Music Disk Recorder 1. Press the PLAY button to start playback of the song containing the part you want to change. 2. Press the PAUSE button at the point you want to execute punchin recording. The current song is stopped momentarily. 3. Press the RECORD button. The PLAY and CUSTOM PLAY lamps begins blinking, indicating that the Music Disk Recorder is ready to record. 4. Press the RECORD buttons for each part in the upper left row to turn off the parts you want to keep as they are. (Only the part you want to do punch-in recording should be turned on.) 5. Press the PLAY button to start punch-in recording. Play the specified range you want to change. 6. Press the STOP button to quit the Punch-in recording function as soon as you reach the end of the range. 81 4 Recording Registrations (and Bulk Data) You can also record registrations by themselves, without recording a performance. Bulk data, including Registration Memory, Registration Shift settings, Rhythm Pattern (User rhythms), and Rhythm Sequence data, are also saved in the operation. There are two ways to record the registrations and bulk data: [1] 1 2 3 6 On the Electone, set the registrations and all other data you want to record. Select the song number to which you wish to record the registrations. RECORD UPPER While holding down the RECORD button, press the M./TO DISK (Memory) button on the Registration Memory panel. Small bars flash across the LED display from left to right, indicating that the M.D.R. is reading the registrations and other settings. After recording, the M.D.R. is automatically stopped and returns to STOP status. LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP SHIFT PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER Music Disk Recorder 1. While holding down the RECORD button... 2. Press the M./TO DISK (Memory) button. REGISTRATION MEMORY M. / TO DISK 1 2 3 4 5 6 [2] 1 2 Set up the registrations and select the song number as you did in steps #1 and #2 above. RECORD UPPER LOWER PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT Press the RECORD button to make the M.D.R. ready to record. SONG REPEAT PAUSE SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER RECORD 3 82 Press the PLAY button to record the registrations, then press the STOP button as soon as you see the small bars flash across the LED display from left to right. This is the same procedure as the one when you start recording. The small bars that flash across the display indicate that the M.D.R. is recording the registrations and being set up for normal recording; pressing the STOP button interrupts this process. UPPER SONG REPEAT PAUSE LOWER PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY 5 Recalling Recorded Registrations (and Bulk Data) The registrations (and bulk data) recorded to song numbers in the above operation can be loaded back to the Electone by simply selecting the appropriate song number and pressing the PLAY button. When the operation has been completed, the M.D.R. returns to STOP status. 1 2 Insert the disk and select the song number you want to load back to the Eelectone. Press the PLAY button. Using More Than 8 Registrations The M.D.R. makes it possible to use more than 8 registrations (8 Registration Memory locations) in a performance, — without having to alter the current panel settings. A disk can accommodate 40 song numbers and each song number can contain 8 registrations. 6 Music Disk Recorder To play a performance using more than 16 different registrations: 1. First record the registrations you need into several song numbers on the M.D.R. before the performance. (You should also try to record them in the order that you’ll use them, if possible.) 2. During the performance, after all 8 registrations from a certain song number have been used, select the next song number and press the PLAY button on the M.D.R. This replaces all 8 registrations in Registration Memory with the new ones from the selected song number. 3. By repeating the above steps, you can run through an entire performance without having to change the panel settings. NOTE: Selecting the Next Song in the User Registration Shift settings makes it possible to have the M.D.R. automatically read the 8 registrations in the next song number. See page 71 for more information. 6 Replacing Registrations The M.D.R. also lets you change the registrations of an existing song without changing the performance data. The procedure is the same as that of Recording Registrations mentioned in the previous page. 83 7 Playback You can play back your recorded performance by simply pressing the PLAY button. Registrations and other data will be recalled to the Electone. 1) To play back a song: 1 RECORD Select the number of the song you want to play back by using the SONG SELECT buttons. You can also select the song number by pressing the appropriate Data Control buttons. UPPER SONG REPEAT PAUSE <SONG NAME> 03:SONG 3 LOWER PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER PEDAL CONTROL STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY ⁄ MUSIC DISK RECORDER RECORD 2 LOWER UPPER Press the PLAY button to begin playback of the song. The PLAY lamp lights up and small bars move across the display, indicating that the M.D.R. is resetting registrations on the Electone. LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER RECORD 3 6 UPPER Music Disk Recorder Playback starts automatically after reading the song data. The elapsed time will be displayed on the LED. Playback automatically stops at the end of a song. You can, however, stop playback in the middle of a song by pressing the STOP button. LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER If you have recorded the Lead Voice/Keyboard Percussion part separately: On the EL-100 the Lead/Keyboard Percussion part(s) you have recorded separately will automatically set to on when you start playback. NOTE: When you play back the data made with other Electone models such as EL-90/87 and which includes the separately recorded Lead/Keyboard Percussion part(s), Lead part will be off and Keyboard Percussion will be on as the defaults. (To turn on the Lead part, press PLAY/UPPER while holding down the SHIFT.) 2) To play back the selected part(s): You can also play back the selected parts of your recorded performance, while other parts are temporarily turned off. This function is especially useful for playing a single part, such as the melody, over previously recorded accompaniment parts. 1 2 84 Select the number of the song to be played back. RECORD UPPER Set the parts you wish to mute to off, by pressing the appropriate PLAY button in the upper right row. The LED of the selected part should be off. Make sure to turn on the parts you wish to play back. SONG REPEAT PAUSE LOWER PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY 3 Press the PLAY button to begin playback of the song. First the registration and other data are read, then playback of the performance starts (excepting the parts that were turned off in step #2). 4 Now perform your new part or parts over the playback parts. When the end of the recorded performance is reached, playback is automatically stopped and the STOP status is resumed. 3) To repeat playback of a song or songs: This feature allows you to repeatedly play back either all songs on a disk or only one specific song. 1 RECORD UPPER Select the song number you wish to play back. If you wish to play back all songs on a disk, select the first song that will be played back. The others will follow in order. LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER RECORD 2 UPPER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL PLAY 6 SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT Music Disk Recorder Hold down the SHIFT button and simultaneously press the SONG REPEAT button. The lamps above SHIFT and SONG REPEAT light up, and “ALL” appears on the LED display. LOWER CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER 3 To repeatedly playback all songs starting with the selected song: Press the PLAY button to begin playback of the song. Playback will begin from the song selected and repeat indefinitely. To repeatedly play back only the selected song: 1. Again hold down the SHIFT button and simultaneously press the SONG REPEAT button. “SinG” appears on the LED display to indicate that a single song will be repeatedly played back. RECORD UPPER LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER RECORD 2. Press the PLAY button to begin playback of the song. Playback of the selected song will begin and repeat indefinitely. UPPER SONG REPEAT PAUSE LOWER PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY To stop playback, press the STOP button. MUSIC DISK RECORDER 85 About XG The EL-100 allows you to play back the commercially available XG song data using the M.D.R. Also, the XG Easy Converter function of the EL-100 lets you convert the data to the XG compatible data. NOTE: The XG song data created with EL-100 conforms to the SMF format 0 or 1. Playing back the XG Song Data This function is for playback only. You can practice a specific part of the XG song data by muting that part. NOTE: 1. Insert the XG song disk into the floppy disk slot. The following display appears. Total amount of reverb value may be changed inadvertently while playing back XG Song Data. Song Name Display 2 DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL 1 Selects a song. 2 Change the LCD to Part Display. <SONG NAME> [PART]˛˝ 01:AMBIENT.MID [XG] page will be added to the upper right side of the display. 1 The XG song data will be displayed on the XG page. You can store both the XG songs (on the XG page) and Electone songs (on pages 1 - 4) in a single disk. 6 Music Disk Recorder 2. Use the bottom left Data Control buttons 1 to select a song you want to play back. 3. Press the PLAY button in the M.D.R. section to start song playback. 4. Use the top right Data Control buttons 2 to change the LCD to part display. Part Display 3 4 DATA CONTROL 3 -2 3 -1 DATA CONTROL PART:ALL [NAME]˛˝ ’SOLO ’MUTE VOL.:24 5 6 7 Use 3 button to select a part, and press 5 to engage the solo playback of the selected part, press 6 to mute some parts or press 7 buttons to adjust the volume of a specific part. 86 3 Selects a part. Range: 1 16, ALL (all parts) 3 -1 Select next part. 3 -2 Select previous part. 4 Change the LCD to Song Name Display. 5 Solo: Use the corresponding Data Control button to turn on/ off the solo function. When solo is turned on all other parts will be muted automatically. 6 Mute: Use the corresponding Data Control button to turn on/ off the mute function. 7 VOL. (VOLUME): Adjusts the volume of each part within the range, 0 - 24. If you have selected ALL, you can adjust overall volume. XG Easy Converter This function allows you to convert the EL-100 song data to the XG format data. You can then play back the data using XG devices and/ or personal computer. Depending on the type of XG devices, sound may be different from the original data you created. The contents to be converted: Voice (Program) number, Volume, Feet (octave settings), Pan, Vibrato, Slide (for the Lead voices), Initial Touch, Effects (Tremolo and Delay), Reverb (except for Length), Sustain, Rhythm Patterns (except for Accompaniment), Expression, Registration, Registration Shift (except for Next Song) To convert the EL-100 data to the XG song data: 1. Insert the disk containing the Electone data into the floppy disk slot. 2. Select the song to be converted to the XG data. 3. While holding down the top right Data Control buttons press the RECORD button in the M.D.R. section. The following message appears to confirm the operation. NOTE: Confirm that the disk should contain enough amount of available memory before the conversion. RECORD DATA CONTROL PLAY DATA CONTROL UPPER ≥Confirm Conv.Data ≥ ≥ [CONFIRM][CANCEL]≥ SONG REPEAT PAUSE ≥Conv.to XGSONG01? ≥ ≥ [CONV.] [CANCEL]≥ 5. Press the Data Control buttons corresponding to [Convert]. After the process of the conversion the LCD returns to the original display. <SONG NAME> [PART]˛˝ 01:XGSONG01.MID When the XG song data is newly created in the disk, XG page will be added to the top right side of the display. The converted song (XG data) will be stored on the XG page and the original song (Electone data) is left as is. PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL PLAY 6 SONG DEL. TO FROM SONG COPY STOP SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY Music Disk Recorder 4. Press the Data Control buttons corresponding to [Confirm]. The M.D.R. starts playback of the selected song for you to decide whether you convert it to the XG data, or not. After finishing playback the following message appears. LOWER MUSIC DISK RECORDER NOTE: In this case the M.D.R. uses the XG tone generator built in the EL-100 to play back the data. NOTE: Select [Cancel] to abort the operation and return to the original display. NOTE: The converted XG song data may sound differently from the original data. NOTE: The converted data cannot be deleted. 87 8 Other Functions 1) Custom Play If you want to play back the song without resetting the registrations and other data, press the CUSTOM PLAY button. This displays the song time and starts playback immediately. RECORD UPPER LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER NOTE: If you hold down the SHIFT and press CUSTOM PLAY or if you execute the following Read and Auto Increment function, all data, except for that of Rhythm Pattern Program, Rhythm Sequence and Keyboard Percussion assignment, will be loaded and played back. It is handy when you want to call up the registrations only. 2) Read and Auto Increment 6 RECORD UPPER Another method for calling up only registration data, besides that mentioned in the NOTE above. Music Disk Recorder Pressing the UPPER button in the RECORD section while M.D.R. is in the stop status calls up the registration data and automatically selects the next song number. This method is more convenient than the one mentioned above since the M.D.R. automatically selects the next song number. LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER NOTE: This function is not possible if the next song contains no registration data. 3) Pause RECORD UPPER If you want to temporarily stop playback of the song or songs, press the PAUSE button. To resume playback from the point at which the song was paused, press the PAUSE button again. SONG REPEAT PAUSE LOWER PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER 4) Fast Forward and Fast Reverse During playback, these buttons function as fast forward and fast reverse buttons, much like those of a tape recorder. Press SONG SELECT H button to advance to a later point in the song or press SONG SELECT G button to return to an earlier position. While either of these buttons is held down, playback stops and the song time is advanced or reversed accordingly. Even when the button is released, playback is paused. To resume playback from the point you’ve advanced or reversed to, press the PLAY button. 88 NOTE: It may take some time to search the point at which you want to resume playback when you return to an earlier position using the fast reverse function. NOTE: Fast Forward and Fast Reverse operate at five times the normal playback speed. 5) Changing the Tempo RECORD UPPER LOWER PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SHIFT You can change the tempo of the song as the song is playing back. While holding down the SHIFT button, press the TEMPO + or TEMPO button. Each press of the button slows down or speeds up the tempo by a small amount (not affecting the pitch). Pressing TEMPO + causes the song faster and TEMPO – slower. (The Tempo button on the Electone panel cannot be used to change the tempo on the Music Disk Recorder.) To restore the original recording tempo of a song, hold down the SHIFT button and simultaneously press both TEMPO buttons. SONG REPEAT PAUSE SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER NOTE: When tempo is changed, the LED display indicates the change as a percentage of the original recorded tempo (100). Values less than 100 indicate a slower tempo; values greater than 100 indicate a faster tempo. RECORD PLAY Indicates faster tempo UPPER SONG REPEAT Indicates original tempo PAUSE LOWER PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER 6 Indicates slower tempo NOTE: Music Disk Recorder Tempo change remains in effect even when you change songs. If you have changed the tempo in one song, you should perform above step to restore the original tempo before playing another song. Turning the power switch off and on again also restores the original tempo. 89 6) Song Copy This function lets you copy the data recorded at one song number to another song number. You can copy and exchange the data even between two different disks. To use the Song Copy function within a disk: Select the song number to be copied (source) with the SONG SELECT buttons. 1 2 NOTE: This function is available with the Electone data only, not with the XG data. RECORD UPPER LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE While holding down the SHIFT button, press the SONG COPY FROM button. The song number to be copied from appears at the left of the LED display. PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER NOTE: If the specified song number has no recorded data, the M.D.R. automatically searches for and selects the next song that contains recorded data. RECORD 3 6 UPPER Music Disk Recorder Next, designate the destination song number. While holding down the SHIFT button, press the SONG COPY TO button. The M.D.R. automatically searches for an empty song number to copy the data to, and displays that number at the right side of the display. The RECORD lamp will start flashing indicating that the M.D.R. is ready to copy. If all songs numbers contain recorded data, “FULL” appears on the LED display. In this case, you should erase one of the songs on the disk by using the Song Delete function (page 92). LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER NOTE: The message “FULL” may appear when the available memory is short. NOTE: If you want to abort the operation, press STOP button. 4 Use the SONG SELECT buttons to select a destination song number for copying. Follow this step if you wish to select a different destination song number than the one displayed. The M.D.R. will display only those song numbers that have no data. RECORD 5 90 UPPER Press the RECORD button to execute the Song Copy function. The RECORD lamp stops flashing and remains lit, indicating that the Song Copy function is in process. The LED display shows the “size” of the song in numbers, and counts down as the data is being copied. When the display shows “000,” the song has been completely copied. SONG REPEAT PAUSE LOWER PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY To use the Song Copy function between two different disks: Insert the source disk that contains the song you want to copy from. 1 2 RECORD UPPER While holding down the SHIFT button, press the SONG COPY FROM button. The song number to be copied from appears at the left of the LED display. LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER 3 Use the SONG SELECT buttons to select a destination song number for copying. NOTE: You can also use the Data Control buttons to select the song number. RECORD 4 UPPER Press the RECORD button. The RECORD lamp lights up and the LED continues to indicate “00.--” as shown at the right. LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY 6 MUSIC DISK RECORDER 6 7 Insert the destination disk to which you want to copy . NOTE: Music Disk Recorder 5 Press the Eject button to take out the source disk. The RECORD lamp remains lit. Although ejecting the disk while the RECORD lamp is lit is prohibited, you are allowed to eject the disk in this case. RECORD UPPER While holding down the SHIFT button, press the SONG COPY TO button. The song number to be copied to appears at the right side of the LED display. The M.D.R. automatically searches for an empty song number to copy the data to. SONG REPEAT PAUSE LOWER PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER 8 9 Use the SONG SELECT buttons to select a destination song number for copying. Press the RECORD button to execute the Song Copy function. The LED display shows the “size” of the song in numbers, and counts down as the data is being copied. When the display shows “0000,” the song has been completely copied. NOTE: An asterisk (*) is added to the end of the (destination) song’s name to differentiate from the original (source) song. 91 7) Song Delete You can delete a song on disk by performing this function. 1 2 Use the SONG SELECT buttons to select the number of the song you wish to delete. RECORD UPPER While holding down the SHIFT button, press the SONG DEL. button. The letters “dL” appear on the left side of the LED display, next to the selected song number. RECORD lamp flashes to indicate that the M.D.R. is ready to delete the song. If you wish to, you can still select a different song number in this step by using the SONG SELECT buttons. LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER NOTE: If you want to abort the operation, press STOP button. NOTE: XG song data cannot be deleted. 3 6 Music Disk Recorder Press the RECORD button to execute the Song Delete function. The RECORD lamp stops flashing and remains lit, indicating that the Song Delete function has begun. When the Song Delete function is completed, the STOP status is automatically resumed. 8) Disk Copy You can duplicate a floppy disk by copying the contents. Yamaha recommends that you keep two copies of important data on separate floppy disks by using this function. 1 Prepare the source disk and the formatted blank disk to be copied. The disk type of both source disk and destination disk must be the same. For example, use 2HD for the disk to be copied (destination) if the source disk is 2HD type. Be sure to set the Write-protect tab (page 74) on the source disk to on. The message “Prot” may appear if you insert the source disk with the Writeprotect tab “off.” On the contrary, set the Writeprotect tab on the destination disk to off. The message “Prot” may appear if you insert the destination disk with the Write-protect tab “on.” In this case, the Disk Copy function cannot be executed. RECORD 2 UPPER While holding down the SHIFT button, press the LOWER button in the RECORD part. “In 1” appears on the LED display to indicate that the M.D.R. is ready to execute the Disk Copy. SONG REPEAT PAUSE LOWER PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER PEDAL CONTROL STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY MUSIC DISK RECORDER 92 LOWER SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY RECORD 3 UPPER Insert the source disk into the disk slot. The M.D.R. starts reading the data in the source disk. “out 1” appears on the LED display. LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER RECORD 4 UPPER Press the eject button to take out the source disk. “In 2” appears on the LED display to urge you to insert the destination disk. LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER RECORD 5 Insert the destination disk. The number “160” appears on the LED display and counting down is initiated as the disk is being copied. When finished, “End” will appear on the LED display for few seconds. UPPER LOWER SONG REPEAT PAUSE PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER RECORD UPPER SONG REPEAT PLAY PEDAL CONTROL UPPER LOWER PEDAL CONTROL SONG DEL. FROM TO SONG COPY STOP PLAY 6 SHIFT SONG SELECT RECORD TEMPO FORMAT Music Disk Recorder PAUSE LOWER CUSTOM PLAY MUSIC DISK RECORDER NOTE: “Fort” or “bAd” may appear if an error occurs in the middle of the operation. If this happens, please retry formatting the destination disk and copying disk. Follow the M.D.R. direction to eject/insert the disks during the operation. Do not eject/insert the disks frivolously ignoring the M.D.R. direction. Doing so can damage the disk and possibly the disk drive. 93 9) Checking the Remaining Memory RECORD PLAY SHIFT You can check the amount of memory available for additional recording in a disk by pressing PAUSE button while holding down SHIFT button. The amount of available memory will be displayed on the LED. The maximum amount of memory is ca.700 for 2DD disks and ca.1400 for 2HD disks. (LEAD) (K.PERC.) (LEAD) (K.PERC.) PAUSE REM.MEM. 10) Pattern Disks The M.D.R. also allows you to select rhythms from optional disks. To load the patterns from a Pattern disk: Insert the Pattern Disk into the disk slot under the Music Disk Recorder. The pattern number and name from the Pattern Disk appears. 1 2 Refer to the pattern list included in the Pattern Disk for the information on each rhythm. Select the rhythm you want to use using the appropriate Data Control buttons. Jumps back 10 numbers 6 NOTE: Jumps ahead 10 numbers Save DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL Music Disk Recorder <PATTERN DISK>[SAVE] 01:Pop.R-1 Pattern Number Selects previous number 3 94 Pattern Name Selects next number Start the rhythm to check the pattern to be called up. Selects previous number Selects next number 4 If you want to save the current pattern to a User Rhythm space, select the “SAVE” with the corresponding Data Control buttons. The following display appears. DATA CONTROL Selects the destination (User Rhythm) number DATA CONTROL ≥ ÚÆSave to USER1-A≥ ≥ [SAVE] [CANCEL]≥ Execute save 5 6 Select the User number to which you want to save using the top left Data Control buttons. Press the Data Control buttons corresponding to [Save]. The rhythm is saved and loaded to the designated User Rhythm number. NOTE: Select [Cancel] to abort the operation and return to the original display. NOTE: See page 50 for the details to use the loaded User pattern. 6 Music Disk Recorder 11) Copy Protect Some of the Disks available for the Electone are purposely protected from being copied or erased. You cannot save the data to another floppy disk. If you try to load data from such a “copy-protected” disk to the Electone, a “Protected Disk” (PrXX*) message will appear on the LED display. The data cannot be saved to the disk. *XX: song number 95 Messages on the M.D.R. LED Display Display Description of the Messages No disk is installed. Install a disk. 1) The installed disk is write-protected, so the Record, Song Copy, and Song Delete jobs cannot be performed. Set the disk’s Write-protect tab (page 74) to OFF. 2) If you are using a copy-protected playback-only disk, this message may appear when you attempt the Record, Song Copy, or Song Delete operations. Cancel the operation. 3) When executing Disk Copy, set the Write-protect tab on the source disk to ON. The installed disk is not formatted. Format the disk. (page 75) 1) The disk’s memory capacity is full, so the Record or Song Copy operation cannot be performed. Use another formatted disk or delete unnecessary data. 2) All of the song numbers contain recorded data, so the Song Copy operation cannot be performed. Press the STOP button, then delete any unnecessary data. None of the song numbers contain recorded data, so the Song Copy operation cannot be performed. Press the STOP button and abort the operation. An error occurred because the disk was removed during recording or playback. Press the STOP button, and replace the disk, then start the operation over again. Incompatible disk has been inserted. Insert the appropriate disk. Recording cannot be performed because too much data was received at one time. Press the STOP button and retry recording. 6 The disk is defective and cannot be formatted. Use another disk. Music Disk Recorder An error occurred during the transmission or reception of data. Press the STOP button and retry the operation over again. You are trying to record to the song number that already contains recorded data. Stop the recording and select the other blank song number by pressing the SONG SELECT buttons. XX: song number When you insert the “copy-protected” disk to the Electone, this message will appear on the LED display. You cannot overwrite or save the changes. XX: song number oooo This message indicates that an incompatible disk is inserted in the Pattern Disk or Registration Menu Disk operation. Insert the appropriate disk. _XX An under line (_) before the song number indicates that it is XG song data. XX: song number or 96 You have inserted a wrong type disk as the destination disk in the Disk Copy operation. Use the same disk type as the source disk. 7 Footswitches and Expression Pedal These foot-operated controls allow you to turn on and execute various performance functions without taking your hands from the keyboards. 1 Footswitch The Electone has two Footswitches on the expression pedal that can be used to control various functions. The Right Footswitch is used for the Registration Shift function. (See page 69 for the details of the Registration Shift function.) The Left Footswitch can be set to control one of the following functions: Glide, Tremolo, rhythm controls. Assignments of the functions to the Left Footswitch are made in the FOOTSWITCH pages. Press the FOOT SW. button in the DISPLAY SELECT section. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY EFFECT SET A.B.C. M.O.C. FOOT SW. REGIST. SHIFT PITCH MIDI TREMOLO (FAST) The following display appears. 7 Footswitch-Left Page DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL Footswitches and Expression Pedal <FOOT.SW>MODE:OFF 1 2 3 4 OFF RHYTHM GLIDE TREM. 1 Off Cancels Left Footswitch control. 97 2 Rhythms Selection of Left Footswitch control over rhythm functions. When this is chosen, the following items appear at the bottom of the display: DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <FOOT.SW>MODE:RHYTHM ”STOP ’ENDING ’FILL 2 -1 2 -2 2 -3 2 -1 Stop Functions as an on/off switch for the rhythm or the rhythm sequence. 2 -2 Ending Switches the rhythm to the Ending pattern, after which the rhythm is stopped. 2 -3 Fill In Switches the rhythm to the Fill In pattern. 3 Glide Selection of Footswitch control over Glide. Pressing the Footswitch immediately lowers the pitch of the selected voice or voices by a half step. And releasing it slowly returns the pitch to the original. When the Glide setting is chosen, the following display appears: Also, page number will be shown at the top right side. The Glide function is configured with three pages. 7 Footswitch – Glide Page 1 Footswitches and Expression Pedal DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE DATA CONTROL PAGE DATA CONTROL PAGE <FOOT.SW>MODE:GLIDE⁄ ”UPPER1 ”UPPER2 3 -1 3 -1 Footswitch – Glide Page 2 DATA CONTROL <FOOT.SW>MODE:GLIDE¤ ’LOWER1 ’LOWER2 3 -1 3 -1 Footswitch – Glide Page 3 DATA CONTROL <FOOT.SW>MODE:GLIDE‹ ”LEAD TIME:2 3 -1 98 3 -2 3 -1 3 -2 Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead The Glide function can be applied to any or all of the voice sections shown in the display. Select the desired voice section(s). Time Determines the speed of the Glide function, or in other words, how gradually the pitch returns when the Footswitch is released. Higher settings produce slower pitch changes. NOTE: When the Glide function is applied, the Vibrato is not effective. Range: 1-5 4 Tremolo Selection of Footswitch control over Tremolo. Pressing the Footswitch turns the Tremolo effect on and off (Chorus), performing the same function as the TREMOLO (FAST) button in the DISPLAY SELECT section. (If you want to use this function, the tremolo settings must be set properly. See page 42 for more information.) DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <FOOT.SW>MODE:TREM. 7 Footswitches and Expression Pedal 99 2 Expression Pedal You can choose the function of the Expression Pedal from three settings. 1 2 Press the PITCH/MIDI button in the DISPLAY SELECT section. Transpose/Pitch function, the first page, will be displayed. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY EFFECT SET A.B.C. M.O.C. FOOT SW. REGIST. SHIFT PITCH MIDI TREMOLO (FAST) Select page 3 using Page buttons at the right side of the LCD display. MIDI IN page will be displayed. DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <MIDI IN> LEAD:INT.‹ SYNC:INT. EXP.:AUTO EXP. (Expression) Determines the control of the expression pedal functions. 7 DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL Footswitches and Expression Pedal <MIDI IN> LEAD:INT.‹ SYNC:INT. EXP.:AUTO AUTO INT. EXT. Ordinarily, this control is set to Auto. However, when it is set to INT., the expression pedal lets you control Electone volume even during M.D.R. playback. When set to EXT., another (external) Electone controls over the volume of the Electone. 100 PAGE 8 Transpose and Pitch Controls There are two pitch-related controls on the Electone: Transpose and Pitch. Transpose allows you to change the key of the instrument and Pitch lets you finely adjust the tuning. These features make it easy to change the key of a song to accommodate a vocalist’s range or to precisely match the tuning of another instrument. 1 Press the PITCH/MIDI button in the DISPLAY SELECT section. Transpose/Pitch function, the first page, will be displayed. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY EFFECT SET A.B.C. M.O.C. FOOT SW. REGIST. SHIFT PITCH MIDI TREMOLO (FAST) Transpose/Pitch Page DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <TRANSPOSE><PITCH> ⁄ 0 A=440.0Hz 1 2 1 Transpose Determines the coarse pitch setting of all the voices, and is adjustable in half steps (semitones). Range: -6 - +6 (one octave) 2 Pitch Determines the fine pitch setting of all the voices. The range is about a quarter of semitone. NOTE: 8 The default Pitch is 440.0Hz (=A3). NOTE: Range: 438.8Hz – 444.5Hz Transpose and Pitch Controls The pitch changes cannot be recorded to the Music Disk Recorder. About the Pitch Each voice is tuned with the temperament. Cent LEAD voice +6.0 LEAD UK voice +2.4 (UK voice 2) +1.2 UK NOTE: When matching the pitch with other instrument, use the Clarinet voice on the Lower keyboard. (UK2) LK voice 0 (Standard 440Hz) LK (LK voice 2) –1.2 (LK2) PK voice –3.6 PK 101 9 MIDI MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a kind of communication system for electronic musical instruments. It is built into most every modern digital musical instrument and allows different instruments to “talk” to each other and control each other’s functions. For example, the Upper keyboard of your Electone could be used to play sounds on a connected synthesizer. In another application, a rhythm machine can be programmed to play its rhythms in perfect synchronization with the tempo set on the Electone. To use the MIDI functions you must, of course, have a second MIDI device (such as a synthesizer or rhythm machine), and a set of MIDI cables. For more information see page 105. To select the MIDI page: 1 Press the PITCH/MIDI button in the DISPLAY SELECT section. DISPLAY SELECT VOICE DISPLAY EFFECT SET A.B.C. M.O.C. FOOT SW. REGIST. SHIFT PITCH MIDI TREMOLO (FAST) Transpose/Pitch function, the first page, will be displayed. The MIDI related settings are shown on the second and third pages. 2 Select pages 2 and 3 using Page buttons at the right side of the LCD display. MIDI OUT Page 2 DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL <MIDI OUT>LOWER: 2 ¤ UPPER: 1 PEDAL: 3 1 3 For setting the channels over which MIDI information will be transmitted. Any channel from 1 through 16 can be assigned to each keyboard, the Upper keyboard, the Lower keyboard and the Pedalboard. The note on/off messages on each keyboard will be sent through the channels set here. 9 MIDI 1 Upper Selects the transmit channel for Upper keyboard from channels 1 - 16. 2 Lower Selects the transmit channel for Lower keyboard from channels 1 - 16. 3 Pedal Selects the transmit channel for Pedalboard from channels 1 - 16. The MIDI receive channel of each connected MIDI device should match the numbers set here. 102 PAGE Receive Channels When using another MIDI device to play the Electone’s voices, you must set the MIDI transmit channel(s) of the connected device to match the receive channel(s) of the Electone. The MIDI receive channels of the Electone are fixed to the following values: Upper Keyboard: 1 Lower Keyboard: 2 Pedalboard: 3 MIDI IN Page 1 -1 DATA CONTROL DATA CONTROL PAGE <MIDI IN> LEAD:INT.‹ SYNC:INT. EXP.:AUTO 1 -2 1 Internal/External Controls Switches between the Electone (INT.: Internal) and the connected device (EXT.: External) to control the displayed items. Lead Determines Internal or External control of the Lead Voices. When set to Internal, Lead Voices are played from the Electone and the sounds from a connected MIDI instrument can be played via MIDI channel 1 (or channel 2, when the To Lower function is on). When set to External, the Lead Voices can only be played from the connected instrument via MIDI channel 4. 1 -2 Sync. Determines the source of the timing control, for rhythm synchronization purposes. Setting this to Internal gives the Electone timing control over the connected rhythm machine. This also allows you to start and stop the rhythms of the connected rhythm machine from the Electone’s panel controls. Setting this to External gives timing control to the connected rhythm machine. 9 NOTE: Accompaniment pattern sounds cannot be controlled via MIDI. MIDI 1 -1 NOTE: For the information on EXP. See page 100. 103 10 Accessory Jacks and Controls On the underside of the Electone keyboard is a separate panel equipped with various input/output terminals and miscellaneous controls, the functions of which are described below. 5 2 HOST SELECT TO HOST 4 PC-2 MIDI 1 HEADPHONES R AUX. L OUT PC-1 Mac MIDI OUT IN 3 1 AUX. OUT (RCA, L/R) This pair of RCA jacks is for connection to an external amplifier/speaker. 2 HEADPHONES (Phone) For connection of a stereo headphone set. When headphones are connected to this jack, sound to the Electone’s built-in speaker system is automatically cut off, allowing you to play without disturbing others. 3 MIDI IN/OUT For connecting external devices such as synthesizer and rhythm machine with MIDI cables. MIDI cables are required (page 106). 4 TO HOST This terminal can be connected to the serial port of a personal computer instead of using MIDI connection. 5 HOST SELECT When you have connected the Electone and the personal computer using the TO HOST terminal, you need to select the appropriate setting here depending on the computer used. (page 105) 10 Accessory Jacks and Controls 104 NOTE: See next page for the details of the connection using the TO HOST terminal. 11 Appendix MIDI On the right underside of the Electone keyboard you will find the MIDI IN/ OUT jacks and TO HOST terminal. MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving MIDI messages. If your Electone is connected with external devices via these MIDI jacks (with a personal computer via the TO HOST terminal) and appropriate MIDI settings are done, you can play an external MIDI device such as synthesizer from your Electone keyboard or your Electone can be played by an external device such as sequencer (by a personal computer with a sequencing software installed). You need MIDI cable(s) when you exchange the data between Electone and an external device. Or you need a serial cable when you connect Electone’s TO HOST to the computer serial port instead of using MIDI cables. Also, to exchange the data between your Electone and connected MIDI device you have to match the MIDI transmit/receive channels on both devices. Receive channels of Electone are fixed as mentioned on page 103. Accordingly, you need to match the transmit channels on the external device to the fixed receive channels of Electone when you want to control Electone by the external device. See page 102 for the detailed information about the MIDI channel settings. NOTE: See page 107 for the information on the MIDI message types. Setting examples Using the TO HOST terminal Using a separately available Serial Cable allows you to directly connect them (between the TO HOST terminal of your Electone and the Serial Port of the personal computer). In this case you need to select one of the HOST SELECT switches to match the computer type you use. No additional MIDI setting is necessary. NOTE: MIDI jacks will be inactive when the TO HOST terminal is currently used. Windows 95/98/Me NOTE: HOST SELECT PC-2 MIDI 8-pin MINI DIN to D-SUB 9-pin Cable PC-1 Mac For Windows users: To actually exchange the data via the Serial Cable you need to install the appropriate MIDI driver to your personal computer in advance. TO HOST 11 NOTE: RS-232C (DB9) Windows 95/98/Me EL-100 (Computer) HOST SELECT PC-2 MIDI Macintosh Peripheral Cable (M0197) PC-1 Mac Appendix Macintosh Select the HOST SELECT switches as follows: When you use MIDI connection: MIDI When you use TO HOST connection with Windows system: PC-2 When you use TO HOST connection with Macintosh: Mac TO HOST NOTE: If you use a PC with USB terminal, you need to use USB interface. EL-100 Macintosh (Computer) 105 Using MIDI IN/OUT jacks Controls an external device using the EL-100 (as a master) Controls the EL-100 using an external device (as a slave) Exchanges the data between EL-100 and an external device EL-100 EL-100 EL-100 MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN HOST SELECT PC-2 MIDI PC-1 Mac MIDI IN MIDI OUT HOST SELECT PC-2 MIDI HOST SELECT PC-1 Mac PC-2 MIDI MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MUSIC SYNTHESIZER REALTIME CONTROL EXTENDED SYNTHESIS PC-1 Mac MIDI IN MIDI Interface MU80 etc. MIDI Keyboard PC 1 Control an external device using the EL-100 Using an external MIDI keyboard or MIDI tone generator ● Playing your Electone can cause the MIDI keyboard (or tone generator) to be played using its own voices, accomplishing thick sound layers. (The MIDI receive channels of the MIDI keyboard must match the transmit channels on your Electone.) ● Various messages including the values how far the expression pedal is pressed down and how hard you play the Electone keyboard can be transmitted as digital data. However, how the external device responds depends on the external device you have connected. ● The performance on your Electone can be recorded onto your PC using an appropriate sequencing software. (You need a sequencing software in this case.) 2 Control the EL-100 using an external device Using an external MIDI keyboard ● Playing the external MIDI keyboard can cause your Electone to be played using Electone’s voices. (The MIDI transmit channels of the MIDI keyboard must match the (fixed) receive channels on your Electone. The channels 1, 2 and 3 for the Upper, Lower and pedal voices, respectively.) ● Also, Keyboard Percussion on your Electone can be played by playing the external MIDI keyboard. (The MIDI transmit channels of the MIDI keyboard must be channel 15) 11 Appendix ● The MIDI data played back by the external PC (using a sequencing software) can be played using Electone’s voices. You can use the Electone as an XG tone generator for computer-based music production. See page 110 for the details to use the EL-100 as an XG tone generator. 106 NOTE: You cannot use the M.D.R. and MIDI function at one time since the M.D.R. is also connected via MIDI internally. The MIDI Messages of the EL-100 The MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: the Channel Messages and System Messages. The Channel Messages are the data related to the performance on the keyboard for a specific channel. Each time you play the keyboard on the EL-100, the channel messages, which keys are played and how hard the keys are pressed, will be transmitted via a specific channel. The System Messages are the data that allows several MIDI devices communicate each other. Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI messages which the EL-100 can receive/transmit. Channel Messages Channel Messages are the data related to the performance on the keyboard for a specific channel. Key related messages These are transmitted every time you play the keyboards on your Electone. Reversely, the Electone can be played using these data from an external keyboard. Note On Indicates which keys are played with the note numbers 0 through 127. The note range is C-2 (0) – G8 (127), C3=60. Velocity Indicates how hard the key is held. The range is 1 - 127. Note Off Generated when a key is released. Program Change The Program Change messages allow you to change voices in the middle of a song. With these messages you can change the registrations of the EL-100. NOTE: For more detailed information see MIDI Data Format on page 111 and MIDI Implementation Chart on page 120. NOTE: For more detailed information see MIDI Data Format on page 111 and MIDI Implementation Chart on page 120. Control Change The Control Change Messages let you select a voice bank, control volume, panning, modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other control parameters, through specific Control Change numbers. NOTE: For more detailed information on the Control Change messages available for the EL-100 see MIDI Data Format on page 111 and MIDI Implementation Chart on page 120. 11 Appendix 107 System Messages System Exclusive Messages System Exclusive messages are used to exchange the system and voice/ registration data. These allow you to execute bulk dump operation, sending and receiving all the data of the EL-100 including registrations to and from an external device. This is especially useful for you to build up the library of the registration data in a device like a hard disk. Examples of Exchanging the Data Use the following examples to send (or receive) the registration data to (or from) a personal computer (a sequencing software). First, you need to connect your EL-100 with a personal computer (a sequencing software) using a Serial Cable or a MIDI cable (page 105). NOTE: You also need a sequencing software, which has been properly installed in the personal computer, and which can send and receive system exclusive messages. Send the Registration Data from the EL-100 to the Personal Computer (PC) Preparation (Setting up registrations) Set the Strings voice on the Upper Keyboard of the EL-100. Press STRINGS button on the Upper Keyboard Voice section, and select String 1 from the Strings Menu. 1 2 Store the registration to the Registration Memory button 1. While holding down the M. button Press the Registration Memory button 1. Sending the Registration Data Send the Request-to-Send all RAM message, “F0, 43, 70, 70, 10, F7” (Hexadecimal), from the sequencing software (PC) to the EL-100. 3 Once the EL-100 receives the Request-to-Send all RAM message, the EL-100 automatically sends all registration data in the all registration numbers to your PC. You can store the registration data in a file on your PC. 11 Appendix 108 NOTE: Depending on the capacity of your sequencing software, you may need to divide the data into two and send them to the PC separately. If you want to divide, see page 114, “Data Code to Send” table. For example, by changing the message from “F0,43,70,70,10,F7” (all data) to “F0,43,70,70,17,F7,” the Electone will send the Keyboard Percussion Assignment data only. Send the Registration Data from your PC to the EL-100 and Change the Registration Memory Buttons Send the data stored in the PC back to your Electone. Also, select a Registration Memory button and then play the upper keyboard using PC. Receiving the Registration Data Send the Request-to-Receive all RAM message, “F0, 43, 70, 70, 20, F7” (Hexadecimal), from the sequencing software (PC) to the EL-100. 1 Once the EL-100 receives the Request-to-Receive all RAM message, it automatically receives all registration data and relocates them to the all registration numbers. Selecting the Registration Memory Buttons Sending the Program Change messages from the PC to your EL-100 makes it possible to change the registration on the Electone. 2 Send the Program Change message, “CF, 00” (Hexadecimal) to the EL100. Once the Program Change message is received, the EL-100 automatically turns the Registration Memory button 1 on. Sending the Note-On Messages Send the Note-On message, “90, 30, 7F” (Hexadecimal) to the EL-100. 3 EL-100 receives the note-on message and plays C2 key on the Upper keyboard. It plays String voice you have set in the previous step. Send the Note-Off message, “90, 30, 00” to the Electone. All the above operations can also be done with the M.D.R. easily and efficiently. However, using the PC/ hard disk allows you to build up a large data library a single disk cannot deal with. 11 Appendix 109 Use the EL-100 as an XG Tone Generator You can also use the EL-100 as an XG tone generator since the EL-100 is compatible with the XG format. You can play back the commercially available XG song data with the Electone’s M.D.R., and also play them using an external sequencer (or sequencing software) and the internal XG tone generator. The internal tone generator section of the EL-100 is normally set to EL Mode for playing as an “Electone.” Sending an appropriate system exclusive message from the sequencing software (PC) to the EL-100 changes the mode to XG Mode, in which you can use the Electone as an XG tone generator. 1 Send the XG System On message, “F0, 43, 1N*, 4C, 00, 00, 7E, 00, F7” (Hexadecimal), from the sequencing software (PC) to the EL-100. *N: Device Number (“0” for the EL-100) Once the XG System On message is received, the internal tone generator will be in the XG Mode allowing the EL-100 to receive all the MIDI messages defined by the XG format such as NRPN and Bank Select. NOTE: The M.D.R. lets you play back the commercially available XG song data and convert the Electone song data to XG data. For more information on XG song playback and data conversion functions, see page 86, 87. NOTE: When you create an XG song data using a sequencing software, be sure to insert the XG System On message at the beginning of the data. The internal tone generator mode automatically changes to XG when you start to play back the data. NOTE: The internal tone generator mode automatically changes to XG when you play back commercially available XG song data. 11 Appendix 110 MIDI Data Format 1. Channel Messages 1.1 EL Mode Code (Hexadecimal) Function Transmit Receive 8n,nn,00-7F Note Off ˛ 1ch UK Remarks ˛ 2ch LK ˛ 3ch ˛ (4ch)* LEAD ˛ 5-14ch XG ˛ 15ch Keyboard Percussion PK 9n,nn,00 Note Off (1ch)* 1ch UK 9n,nn,01-7F Note On (2ch)* 2ch LK (3ch)* 3ch ˛ (4ch)* LEAD ˛ 5-14ch XG ˛ 15ch Bank select ˛ 5-14ch XG Bn,01,00-7F Modulation ˛ 5-14ch XG Bn,04,00-7F 2nd Expression ˛ 16ch ˛ (4ch)* LEAD Bn,00,00-7F PK (note on transmit velocity=50H) Keyboard Percussion Bn,20,00-7F Control Bn,05,00-7F Portamento Time ˛ 5-14ch XG Bn,06,00-7F Data Entry ˛ 5-14ch XG Bn,26,00-7F Bn,07,00-7F Volume ˛ 5-14ch XG Bn,0A,00-7F Pan ˛ 5-14ch XG Bn,0B,00-7F Expression 16ch 16ch 5-14ch Control XG Bn,40,00-7F Hold ˛ 5-14ch XG Bn,41,00-7F Portamento ˛ 5-14ch XG Bn,42,00-7F Sostenuto ˛ 5-14ch XG Bn,43,00-7F Soft Pedal ˛ 5-14ch XG Bn,47,00-7F Resonance ˛ 5-14ch XG Bn,48,00-7F Release Time ˛ 5-14ch XG XG Bn,49,00-7F Attack Time ˛ 5-14ch Bn,4A,00-7F Brightness ˛ 5-14ch XG Bn,54,00-7F Portamento Control ˛ 5-14ch XG Bn,5B,00-7F Reverb Send Level ˛ 5-14ch XG Bn,5D,00-7F Chorus Send Level ˛ 5-14ch XG Bn,5E,00-7F Variation Send Level ˛ 5-14ch XG Bn,60,00-7F Data Increment ˛ 5-14ch XG Bn,61,00-7F Data Decrement ˛ 5-14ch XG ˛ 5-14ch XG ˛ 5-14ch XG Bn,62,00-7F NRPN LSB Bn,63,00-7F NRPN MSB Bn,64,00-7F RPN LSB Bn,65,00-7F RPN MSB All Sounds Off Bn,79,00 Reset All Controllers Bn,7B,00 All Note Off Bn,7C,00 Omni Off Bn,7D,00 Omni On Bn,7E,00 Mono Bn,7F,00 Poly 11 Appendix Bn,78,00 111 Code (Hexadecimal) Function Cn,nn Program Change Transmit Receive ˛ 1ch UK Remarks ˛ 2ch LK ˛ 3ch PK ˛ 5-14ch XG 16ch 16ch Dn,00-7F After Touch ˛ 5-14ch Control XG En,00-7F,00-7F Pitch Bend ˛ 5-14ch XG * Can be changed in the MIDI settings. 1.2 XG Mode Code (Hexadecimal) Function Transmit Receive 8n,nn,00-7F Note Off ˛ 1-16ch Remarks 9n,nn,00 Note Off (1ch) UK 9n,nn,01-7F Note On (2ch)* LK (3ch)* PK (note on transmit velocity=50H) 1-16ch Bn,00,00-7F Bank select ˛ 1-16ch 1-16ch Bn,20,00-7F Bn,01,00-7F Modulation ˛ Bn,04,00-7F 2nd Expression ˛ ˛ Control ˛ ˛ LEAD Bn,05,00-7F Portamento Time ˛ 1-16ch Bn,06,00-7F Data Entry ˛ 1-16ch Bn,26,00-7F 11 Appendix 112 Bn,07,00-7F Volume ˛ 1-16ch Bn,0A,00-7F Pan ˛ 1-16ch Bn,0B,00-7F Expression 16ch 1-16ch Bn,40,00-7F Hold ˛ 1-16ch Bn,41,00-7F Portamento ˛ 1-16ch Bn,42,00-7F Sostenuto ˛ 1-16ch Bn,43,00-7F Soft Pedal ˛ 1-16ch Bn,47,00-7F Resonance ˛ 1-16ch Bn,48,00-7F Release Time ˛ 1-16ch Bn,49,00-7F Attack Time ˛ 1-16ch Bn,4A,00-7F Brightness ˛ 1-16ch Bn,54,00-7F Portamento Control ˛ 1-16ch Bn,5B,00-7F Reverb Send Level ˛ 1-16ch Bn,5D,00-7F Chorus Send Level ˛ 1-16ch Bn,5E,00-7F Variation Send Level ˛ 1-16ch Bn,60,00-7F Data Increment ˛ 1-16ch Bn,61,00-7F Data Decrement ˛ 1-16ch ˛ 1-16ch Bn,62,00-7F NRPN LSB Bn,63,00-7F NRPN MSB Bn,64,00-7F RPN LSB Bn,65,00-7F RPN MSB Control Code (Hexadecimal) Function Bn,78,00 All Sounds Off Bn,79,00 Reset All Controllers Bn,7B,00 All Note Off Bn,7C,00 Omni Off Bn,7D,00 Omni On Bn,7E,00 Mono Bn,7F,00 Poly Cn,00-7F Program Change Transmit Receive ˛ 1-16ch 16ch Control Remarks 1-16ch Dn,00-7F After Touch ˛ 1-16ch En,00-7F,00-7F Pitch Bend ˛ 1-16ch Transmit Receive Ø Ø* * Can be changed in the MIDI settings. 2. Realtime Messages Code (Hexadecimal) Function F8 Clock FA Start Ø Ø FC Stop Ø Ø FE Active Sensing Ø Ø FF Reset ˛ ˛ Remarks * Received only when in the Ext. mode 3. System Exclusive Messages 3.1 Format Universal Realtime Messages Code (Hexadecimal) Message F0,7F,7F,04,01,SS,TT,F7 XG Master Volume XN Transmit Receive ˛ Ø ˛ Ø Transmit Receive ˛ Ø ˛ Ø Transmit Receive Universal Non-Realtime Messages Code (Hexadecimal) Message F0,7E,7F,09,01,F7 GM ON XN XG Native Code (Hexadecimal) Message F0,43,1N,4C,AH,AM,AL,..data..,F7 XG Parameter Change ˛ Ø F0,43,0N,4C,BH,BL,AH,AM,AL,..data..,cc,F7 XG Bulk Dump ˛ Ø F0,43,1N,27,30,00,00,MM,LL,cc,F7 XG Master Tuning ˛ Ø F0,43,1N,4C,00,00,7E,00,F7 XG System On ˛ Ø Transmit Receive Electone/Single Keyboard Common Messages Code (Hexadecimal) Message F0,43,73,01,02,F7 Request for Internal Synch. Mode ˛ Ø Request for External Synch. Mode ˛ Ø 03 11 Appendix 113 Electone Exclusive Code (Hexadecimal) Message F0,43,70,70,00,...(Data)...F7 Bulk Dump Data 78 ID F0,43,70,ID,00,F7 Model ID Data F0,43,70,70,nn(*1),F7 Request-to-Send Data 78 ID Ø Ø Ø ˛ Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ Ø ˛ Ø Ø 78 ˛ Ø ID ˛ Ø Ø Request-to-Receive Data F0,43,70,70,30,F7 Request-to-Send Model ID data ˛ F0,43,70,70,38,7F,F7 Bulk Dump Acknowledge ˛ ˛ Bulk Dump Unacknowledge Ø ˛ 00 F0,43,70,70,40,nn(*3),7F,F7 Switch On Ø Ø Switch Off Ø Ø F0,43,70,70,40,50,TL,TH,F7 Tempo Ø Ø F0,43,70,78,41,cd,dd,F7(*4) Panel Switch Events Ø Ø F0,43,70,78,42,...(Data)...F7 Current Registration Data Ø Ø F0,43,70,78,44...(Data)...(*5),F7 EL MIDI Parameters Ø Ø F0,43,70,70,70,nn(*6),F7 External MDR ˛ Ø F0,43,70,70,73,F7 EL ON ˛ Ø F0,43,70,70,78,SC,NC,F7 Bar Signal Ø Ø 00 X : don't care N : Device Number(“0” on EL-100) ID=4C *1 Data Codes to Send nn Data 10 All RAM 11 Registrations 12 14,15 Rhythm Sequences User Patterns 16 User Voices 17 Keyboard Percussion Assignments *2 Data Codes to Receive nn Data 20 All RAM 21 Registrations 22 24,25 Rhythm Sequences User Patterns 26 User Voices 27 Keyboard Percussion Assignments *3 Switches Appendix 114 Receive ˛ ˛ F0,43,70,70,nn(*2),F7 11 Transmit nn Switch 45 Left Footswitch Transmit Receive Ø Ø 47 Knee Lever ˛ Ø 48 Fill In Ø Ø 4B Intro./Ending Ø Ø *4 Switch Codes Selectors Code Switch Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Remarks 02 UK Voice 1 Ø [00-0D] Ø [00-0D] 03 LK Voice 1 Ø [00-0D] Ø [00-0D] Switch Number Switch Number 04 UK Voice 2 Ø [00-01] Ø [00-0D] Switch Number 05 LK Voice 2 Ø [00-01] Ø [00-0D] Switch Number 06 LEAD Voice Ø [00-04] Ø [00-04] Switch Number 07 Pedal Voice 1 Ø [00-04] Ø [00-04] Switch Number 08 Pedal Voice 2 Ø [00-04] Ø [00-04] Switch Number 0B Rhythm Ø [00-0B] Ø [00-0B] Switch Number 0F Registration Memory ˛ Ø [00-0F] Volume Code Switch Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Remarks 12 UK Voice 1 Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] 13 LK Voice 1 Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data 00:MAX,7F:MIN Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN 14 UK Voice 2 Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN 15 LK Voice 2 Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN 16 LEAD Voice Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN 17 Pedal Voice 1 Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN 18 Pedal Voice 2 Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN 1A Rhythm Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Volume Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN 1B Reverb Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Depth Data; 00:MAX,7F:MIN To Lower Code Switch Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Remarks 36 LEAD Voice Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON 37 Pedal Voice 1 Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON 38 Pedal Voice 2 Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON Sustain Code Switch Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Remarks 50 Upper Keyboard Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON 51 Lower Keyboard Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON 52 Pedalboard Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON Keyboard Percussion Code Switch Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Remarks 5B Lower Keyboard Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON 5C Pedal Board Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON Disable Code Switch 5F Disable Transmit Tx Range Ø [00-01] Receive Rx Range Remarks Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON Tremolo Code Switch 60 Tremolo Transmit Tx Range Ø [00-01] 11 Receive Rx Range Remarks Ø [00-01] 00:SLOW,01:FAST Code Switch Transmit Tx Range Appendix Rhythm Sequence Receive Rx Range Remarks 61 Sequence 1 Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON 62 Sequence 2 Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON 63 Sequence 3 Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON 64 Sequence 4 Ø [00-01] Ø [00-01] 00:OFF,01:ON 115 *5 EL MIDI Parameters Voice Section Parameters Panel Voice Parameters Address 00 00-04, 06, 07 00-0D Parameter Data 2 00-7F Voice Assign Number H Ø [00-7F] Ø 00-7F Voice Assign Number L Ø [00-0F] Ø [00-7F] ˛ [00-0D] Ø [00-0D] ˛ [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Ø [00] Ø [00][05-7F] 00 00-04, 06, 07 10 1 00-0D Voice Selector Number 00 00-04, 06, 07 11 1 00-7F Volume Data Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Remarks Size 00:MIN [00-7F] 7F:MAX 00 00-04, 06, 07 12 1 00-7F Reverb Send Level 00:MIN 7F:MAX 00 00 00-04, 06, 07 00-04, 06, 07 14 15 1 1 00-04 00-7F Feet Pan 00:Preset 01:16Feet [01] [01] 02:8Fee [02] [02] 03:4Feet [03] [03] 04:2Feet [04] 00:Right Ø [0B] [04] Ø [1D] 40:Center 7F:Left 00 00-04, 06, 07 16 1 00-7F Initial Touch Sensitivity 00:MIN [00-11] [12-25] [2B] [26-31] [40] [32-4E] [55] [4F-5A] [63] [5B-6E] [75] [6F-7F] Ø [00-7F] Ø Ø [00] Ø [00-7F] 7F:MAX 00 00-04, 06, 07 19 1 00-01 User Vibrato 00:PRESET 01:USER 00 00-04, 06, 07 1A 1 02-1A Vibrato Delay 00:Short [01] [00] [01-7F] Ø [02-1A] Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-54] Ø [00-7F] Ø [3C-6C] Ø [00-7F] ˛ [00] Ø 7F:Long 00 00-04, 06, 07 1B 1 00-54 Vibrato Depth 00:MIN 7F:MAX 00 00-04, 06, 07 1C 1 3C-6C Vibrato Speed 00:Slow 7F:Fast 00 04, 06, 07 1F 1 00-01 To Lower 00:OFF 01:ON 00 04 20 1 00-02 Slide 00:OFF [01] Ø 01:ON 00 04 21 1 02-7F Slide Speed 00 04 22 1 00-24 Detune [00] [00] [01-7F] Ø [01] [00] [01] Ø [02] [02-7F] Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-24] Ø [00-7F] ˛ [00] Ø 02:KneeControl ˛ 02:Slow Ø 7F:Fast 00:Normal 24:TuneUP 00 00-07 23 1 00-01 2nd Expression Pedal 00, 01, 04, 06, 07 00 00-04 00:OFF 01:ON 24 1 00-01 Glide 00:OFF 01:ON 11 Appendix 116 [01] Ø [00] [01] [00] [01-7F] Ø [00] [01-7F] Effect Parameters (Voice Sections) Address 00-01 00-04, 06, 07 3F Size Data 1 00-05 Parameter Effect Select Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Content Ø 00:Preset Ø [00] Remarks [00][07-7F] 01:OFF [01] [01] 02:Tremolo [02] [02] 03:Symphonic [03] [03] 04:Delay [04] [04] 05:Flanger [05] [05] 06:Distortion [06] [06] 00-01 00-04, 06, 07 40-42 1 00-7F Reverb ˛ [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] 00-01 00-04, 06, 07 48-4A 1 00-7F Tremolo ˛ [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] 00-01 00-04, 06, 07 50 1 00-7F Symphonic Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] 00-01 00-04, 06, 07 58-5B 1,2 00-7F Delay Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] 00-01 00-04, 06, 07 60-62 1 00-7F Flanger Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] 00-01 00-04, 06, 07 68-69 1 00-7F Distortion Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Keyboard Parameters Sustain Parameters Size Data 02 Address 00-02 00 1 00-01 Sustain On/Off Parameter 02 00-02 01 1 00-0C Length Content 00:OFF Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range ˛ [00] Ø [15-3D] 01:ON 00:Short Ø [01] Remarks [00] [01-7F] Ø [00-7F] 0C:Long Keyboard Percussion Parameters Address Parameter Size Data 02 01-02 10 1 00-01 Keyboard Percussion 02 01-02 11 1 00-08 Modes Content 00:OFF Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range ˛ 01:ON 00:Preset [00] Ø [01] Ø 01-08:UserAssign1-8 [00] Remarks [00] [01-7F] Ø [01-08] [00] [01-08] Effect Parameters (Keyboard) Address Size Data Parameter Content Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range 02 00-02 40-42 1 Reverb ˛ [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] 02 00-02 48-4A 1 Tremolo ˛ [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] 02 00-02 50 1 Symphonic ˛ [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] 02 00-02 58-5B 1,2 Delay ˛ [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] 02 00-02 60-62 1 Flanger ˛ [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] 02 00-02 68-69 1 Distortion ˛ [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Remarks Rhythm Rhythm Parameters Address Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Size Data Parameter 03 00 00-0B 1 00-65 Pattern Assign Number Pattern Numbers Ø [00-62] Ø [00-62] 03 00 10 1 00-0B Pattern Select Number Selector Switch Numbers ˛ [00-0B] Ø [00-0B] 03 00 11 1 00-7F Volume 00:MIN ˛ [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Ø [00] Ø [00] Ø [00-7F] Ø ˛ [00] Ø Content Remarks 67-98 7F:MAX 03 00 12 1 00-7F Reverb Send Level 00:MIN 11 7F:MAX 00 14 1 00-01 Auto Variation 03 00 15 1 00-7F Rhythm Balance 00:OFF 01:ON 00:Cymbal [01] [01-7F] Appendix 03 [00-7F] 40:Center 7F:Drums 03 03 00 00 16 17 1 1 00-01 00-03 2nd Expression 00:OFF Tempo Control 01:ON Footswitch Rhythm Mode 00:OFF [01] Ø [00] [01-7F] [00][04-7F] [00] Ø [01] 01:RhythmStop [01] 02:Ending [02] [02] 03:FillIn [03] [03] 117 Rhythm Sequence Parameters Address 03 01 00-03 Size Data 1 00-01 Parameter Rhythm Sequence Content 00:OFF Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range ˛ 01:ON [00] Ø [01] Remarks [00] [01-7F] Accompaniment Parameters Address 03 03 02 02 10 11 Size Data Parameter 1 00-03 Pattern Selector Number 1 00-01 Volume Mute Content 00:Type1 Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Ø 02 12 1 00-7F Volume Ø [01] [01] 02:Type3 [02] [02] 03:Type4 [03] 00:OFF Ø 00:MIN [00] Remarks [00] 01:Type2 [03] Ø [01] 01:MUTE 03 [00] [00] [01-7F] Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] 7F:MAX 03 02 13 1 00-7F Reverb Send Level 00:MIN 7F:MAX A.B.C. Parameters Address 03 03 03 03 00 01 Size Data 1 00-03 1 00-01 Parameter A.B.C. Mode Lower Memory Content 00:OFF Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Ø 03 02 1 00-01 Pedal Memory Ø [01] [01] 02:Fingerd [02] [02] 03:CustomABC [03] 00:OFF Ø 00:OFF [00] [03] Ø Ø [00] [00] [01-7F] [01] Ø [00] [01-7F] [01] 01:ON Remarks [00][04-7F] 01:SingleFinger 01:ON 03 [00] M.O.C. Parameters Address 03 03 04 04 00 01 Size Data 1 00-03 1 00-01 Parameter M.O.C. Mode M.O.C. Knee Control Content 00:OFF Appendix 118 Ø [00] Ø [00][04-7F] 01:Close2Note [01] [01] 02:Close3Note [02] [02] 03:PassBOpen [03] 00:OFF 01:ON 11 Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range ˛ [03] Ø [00] [01-7F] Remarks Overall System Parameters Size Data 04 Address 00 00 1 00-01 Disable Parameter 04 00 02 1 3A-46 Transpose Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Content 00:OFF ˛ [00] Ø [3A] 01:ON 04 00 03 1 00-0B 2nd Expression Range Ø [01] 3A:KeyDown 40:Normal [40] 46:KeyUp [46] 01:100 ¢ Remarks [00] [01-7F] Ø [3A] [40] [46] ˛ [01-0C] Ø [01-0C] Ø [00] Ø [00][04-7F] 0C:1200 ¢ 04 04 00 04 00 1 05 1 00-03 Footswitch Mode 3C-4F Pitch 00:OFF 01:Rhythm [01] [01] 02:Glide [02] [02] 03:Tremolo [03] 3C:PitchDown [03] Ø [3C-4F] Ø [3C-4F] Ø [04-1C] Ø [00-7F] Ø [34-4C] Ø [00-7F] ˛ [00] ˛ [00] Ø [00][02-7F] 40:Normal 4F:PitchUp 04 00 06 1 00-04 Glide Speed 01:Slow 05:Fast 04 00 07 1 34-4C Manual Balance 34:Upper 40:Center 4C:Lower 04 00 09 1 00-01 L.I.T. 00:Mode1 01:Mode2 04 00 0A 1 00-01 Expression INT/EXT [01] ˛ 00:Internal 01:External [00] [01] [01] [01] Effect Parameters (Overall) Address Size Data Parameter Transmit Tx Range Receive Rx Range Content Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Tremolo Ø [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Symphonic ˛ [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] Delay ˛ [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] 1 Flanger ˛ [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] 1 Distortion ˛ [00-7F] Ø [00-7F] 04 00 40-42 1 Reverb 04 00 48-4A 1 04 00 50 1 04 00 58-5B 1,2 04 00 60-62 04 00 68-69 Remarks *6 External MDR nn Command 01 Play Start Transmit Receive ˛ Ø 02 Play Stop ˛ Ø 03 Record Start ˛ Ø 04 Record Stop ˛ Ø 09 Rhythm Pointer Reset ˛ Ø 11 Appendix 119 MIDI Implementation Chart Date:15. Nov. 2001 Version: 1.00 YAMAHA [Electone-EL mode] / Model: EL-100 Function Transmit Default Changed 1, 2, 3, 16 *1 1-16 1-3, 5-16 *2 4 Mode Default Messages Altered Mode 3 ˛ ************************ Mode 3 ˛ ˛ 0-127 *4 True Voice 36-96 *3 ************************ Ø 9nH, v=1-127 Ø 9nH, v=0 Ø 9nH, v=1-127 Ø 9nH, v=0, 8nH Transmit with EL-100: fixed to 80. ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø *6 PK after touch with EL-100: not transmit. ˛ Ø *6 ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ Ø *7 ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø *6 Ø *6 Ø *7 Ø *6 Ø *6, 7 Ø *6 Ø *6 Ø *6 Ø *6 Ø *6 Ø *6 Ø *9 ************************ Ø *10 System Exclusive Ø Ø System Common Song Position Song Select Tune ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ System Real Time Clock Commands Ø Ø Ø *8 Ø Aux Messages Local ON/OFF All Notes OFF Active Sense Reset ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛ Ø (123-127) *6 Ø ˛ Note ON Note OFF Velocity Key's Ch's After Touch Pitch Bend 0, 32 1, 5, 7, 10 4 6, 38 11 96, 97 64-67 71-74 84, 91, 93, 94 98-99, 100-101 120, 121 Control Change Program Change Range Appendix Notes Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY 120 Remarks Basic Channel Note Number 11 Receive *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 *10 Bank Select 2nd Expression Pedal Data Entry Expression Pedal Data Entry SW Sound Controller NRPN, RPN (FAH, FCH) Ch 1: UK; Ch 2: LK; Ch 3: PK; Ch 16: Control Ch 1: UK; Ch 2: LK; Ch 3: PK; Ch 4: LEAD 1; Chs 5 - 14: XG; Ch 15: Keyboard UK: 48 - 96; LK: 36 - 84; PK: 36 - 55 UK, LK, PK, LEAD 1: 36 - 96; XG: 0 - 127; Keyboard Percussion: 3 - 127 UK: UK Horizontal Touch; LK: LK Horizontal Touch XG only Control only External Mode only Control: 0 - 15, 112 - 116 UK, LK, PK, Control: 0 - 15, 112 - 116; XG: 0 - 127 Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO Ø : YES ˛ : NO Date:15. Nov. 2001 Version: 1.00 YAMAHA [Electone-XG mode] / Model: EL-100 Transmit *11 Function Receive Basic Channel Default Changed 1, 2, 3, 16 1-16 1-16 1-16 Mode Default Messages Altered Mode3 ˛ ************************ Mode 3 ˛ ˛ 36-96 ************************ 0-127 True Voice Ø 9nH, v=1-127 Ø 9nH, v=0 Ø 9nH, v=1-127 Ø 9nH, v=0, 8nH ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø Ø ˛ Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø Ø 0-15, 112-116 ************************ Ø System Exclusive Ø Ø System Common Song Position Song Select Tune ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ System Real Time Clock Commands Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Aux Messages Local ON/OFF All Notes OFF Active Sense Reset ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛ Ø (123-127) Ø ˛ Note Number Note ON Note OFF Velocity Key's Ch's After Touch Pitch Bend 0, 32 1, 5, 7, 10 4 6, 38 11 96, 97 64-67 71-74 84, 91, 93, 94 98-99, 100-101 120, 121 Control Change Program Change Range Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Transmit with EL-100: fixed to 80. Bank Select 2nd Expression Pedal Data Entry Expression Pedal Data Entry SW Sound Controller NRPN, RPN 11 Appendix Notes Remarks *11 The same as the one in the EL Mode Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO Ø : YES ˛ : NO 121 Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution GENERAL OPERATION A cracking noise is sometimes heard. Noise may be produced when either an electrical appliance is turned on or off, or an electric power tool (such as drill) is used in the proximity of the Electone. If this occurs, plug the Electone into an electrical outlet located as far as possible from the device that seems to be the source of the problem. Interference from radio, TV, or other sources occurs. This is caused by the proximity of a high-power broadcasting station, an amateur ham radio setup or a mobile phone. Electone generates some noise. A cell phone may be used in the proximity of Electone. Using a cell phone beside the Electone may cause a noise. Turn off the power of the cell phone. Radio or TV generates some noise. Locating a radio or TV close to the Electone causes to produce a noise from it. Relocate it farther from the Electone. The sound of the Electone causes surrounding objects to resonate. Because the Electone is capable of producing powerful bass sounds, resonance may be caused in surrounding objects, such as cabinets or glass windows. To avoid this, relocate the objects or lower the Electone’s volume. Some of the lamps in the DISPLAY SELECT section do not light. The lamp of TREMOLO (FAST) button is lit when turned on. The others momentarily flash when the function is selected. The sound is too small even when the volume is set to its maximum. ● The Master Volume may be set around the minimum position. Turn it clockwise. ● The Expression Pedal may not be pressed down. Press it down with your toe. The Electone panel does not function normally or the content of the memorized data has changed. This happens very rarely. Occasionally, power surges and spikes due to electrical storms or other reasons may cause the Electone to malfunction and/or alter the contents of memorized data. If this happens, turn the power off and turn it back to on. Pressing a certain panel button doesn’t open its related LCD display. When the Pattern Disk is inserted in the M.D.R., the LCD will not change even if you press any buttons. Eject the Disk and press the desired button again. VOICES/RHYTHMS 11 Appendix 122 Switching voices causes the volume to change, despite their having identical volume setting. The volume of certain voices may seem lower than that of others. Adjust the balance of the sound with the volume control within the appropriate Voice Condition display. The pitch seems to be higher on the Pedalboard and lower on the Upper and Lower keyboards. You may feel it especially when playing piano voice. The temperament for the acoustic piano is tuned by listening to the overtones since the overtone configuration of the acoustic piano is so complicated that the actual notes in the higher and lower registers are difficult to be adjusted. On the contrary, the Electone voices including piano voice are tuned by actual notes. Thus, the tuning method itself in the higher and lower registers is different. Some voices seems to contain crack or distorted noise. You may feel it mainly with wind instrument voices. These are purposely built in effects, which can faithfully reproduce the characteristics of each instrument. You can enjoy more realistic sounds such as brass vibration and breath noise. When too many keys are pressed, not all of the notes sound. Total polyphonic capacity (notes sounding for both Upper and Lower Keyboards) is 10 notes. The notes exceeding this limit may not be produced. Only a note will be produced when pressing two keys or more on the Pedalboard and/or Lead voice. The Lead and Pedal voices are designed to sound one note at a time. When you simultaneously press two or more keys, only the highest note will sound. Problem Possible Cause and Solution VOICES/RHYTHMS The volume of Upper keyboard is louder than that of Lower keyboard, or vice versa. Manual Balance is wrongly set to the either side, Upper or Lower. Open the Voice Display by pressing the VOICE DISPLAY button in the DISPLAY SELECT section, and select page 2 to display the Manual Balance. Then change the balance between Upper keyboard and Lower keyboard. Pedalboard doesn’t sound, even when its volume is properly set. ● One of the A.B.C. modes, Single Finger or Fingered Chord, is active. Set the A.B.C. mode to off on A.B.C. page. ● The TO LOWER button in the Pedal Voice is turned on. Turn them off. When keys on the Lower keyboard or pedalboard are pressed, the sounds of percussion instruments are also heard. Keyboard Percussion function is set to on. Turn the Keyboard Percussion off. Even though a Dotted button’s rhythm has been selected and started, the pattern does not sound. Since the Dotted buttons contain User rhythms, no rhythm will sound if a Pattern Disk pattern has not been saved to the selected Dotted button. EFFECT The Initial Touch function does not operate. Initial Touch setting in the Voice Condition is not high enough to get the effect. Adjust the Initial Touch setting using the Voice Condition display. The Reverb effect does not operate, even when Reverb parameters for the selected voice sections are increased. The Reverb setting of the targeted voice group is set to 0. Raise the Reverb volume in the Voice Condition page 2 of the desired voice group. The Tremolo effect cannot be heard, even when the TREMOLO (FAST) button in the DISPLAY SELECT section is on. To get the Tremolo effect, you first need to select the Tremolo function in the Voice Condition page 3 or Effect Set page. ACCOMPANIMENT The pitch in the Single Finger mode does not change, even when pressing different keys of the keyboard. Single Finger mode will only produce notes when played within a fixed octave interval on the Lower keyboard. If notes with the same letter name are pressed outside of that range, the chords that are sounded will share the same pitch. While an intro./Ending pattern is automatically playing, the Lower keyboard does not produce any sound, even when the keys are played. Since the Accompaniment chords play automatically one after another, the Lower keyboard is designed not to produce any sound during the playback of an Intro./Ending pattern. The Accompaniment cannot be heard even when an appropriate Accompaniment type is selected and the rhythm has been started. The Accompaniment volume is set to 0 as the default. Be sure to raise the Accompaniment volume on the rhythm condition page. The harmony notes of the Melody On Chord function cannot be heard. The Upper keyboard has been set to sound only Lead voices. Raise the volume of Upper Keyboard voices (not Lead voice, in this case) high enough to get the effect. 11 Appendix 123 Problem Possible Cause and Solution REGISTRATION MEMORY Certain functions have not been memorized to Registration Memory. Some functions will not be memorized. (See page 67 for more information.) An error occurs and the registration data is not recorded to M.D.R., when executing To Disk operation. Your operation may be wrong or the Write-protect tab of the floppy disk is set to on. A simple beep sound is produced when I press the Basic Regist. Button. When the contents of the SEQ buttons are different from Electone’s default settings (you may have loaded the sequence data from the upper models), pressing one of the Basic Regist. buttons restores the original data and give a simple beep sound to notify it. MUSIC DISK RECORDER 11 Appendix 124 Recording or playback cannot be performed. The PLAY or RECORD section buttons for selecting parts may be turned off. Turn on the appropriate PLAY or RECORD buttons. A total of 40 songs cannot be recorded. If some song numbers contain a large amount of recorded data, the disk may not have enough available memory left to record the normal maximum of 40 songs. Check the remaining memory. Recording is stopped before the performance is finished, or the Song Copy function cannot be executed. ● The amount of recorded data on the disk is close to the maximum limit. Either use another disk or delete the data of any unnecessary song number. ● The length of a subsequently recorded part cannot exceed the length of the previously recorded parts. If you want to change the song length, first delete the existing song and record again. The rhythm does not start at the beginning of a recording, or stops in the middle of the performance. The M.D.R. is designed so that the rhythm cannot be started at the very beginning of a recording. If you wish to use the rhythm, start it after the available memory display appears on the M.D.R. display. The notes of the recording are “stuck” and sound continuously. During playback, you removed the disk by pressing the EJECT button. Whenever you wish to stop playback, always press the STOP button. YAMAHA Electone EL-100 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS Carefully read these instructions BEFORE assembling the Electone. ■ Precautions Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction by following the procedures given below. Be sure to assemble the Electone with two or more people. Don’t use the screws other than the ones specified and included in this package. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage and malfunction. Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly. To disassemble, reverse the procedures. You need a Phillips (+) screwdriver to assemble the Electone. the package, take out two cardboard pads from the both sides of the package, and place the main unit on 1. Open top of the cardboard pads. Position the pads not to directly contact the terminals equipped on the bottom of the main unit. out all parts from the package. 2. Take Please confirm that all parts shown in the illustration are provided. Dust Cover Music Stand AC Power Cord 1 Long/Black Screws (ø6X25mm): 4pcs. Main Unit 2 Long/Yellow Screws (ø5X25mm): 4pcs. Sideboard (Left) 3 Short/Black Screws (ø5X12mm): 8pcs. Speaker Unit Grill Net (Attached to the Speaker Unit) Pedalboard Cord Cramps: 2pcs. 11 Screw caps: 4pcs. Bench Pedalboard Unit Appendix Sideboard (Right) Bench Board Legs: 4pcs. 125 the Sideboards onto the Pedalboard unit. 3. Mount Be sure not to confuse the Right and Left Sideboards. 3-1 Raise the Pedalboard as shown in the illustration below. 3-2 Position each screw hole on both the Pedalboard and Sideboards as shown in the illustration and mount the Sideboards onto the Pedalboard using the 4 Short/ black screws (2 screws on each Sideboard). 4-2 While holding the Sideboard(s) to the Speaker unit, screw the 4 Short/black screws, from the rear side, to fasten it to the Sideboards. Cover 4 screw holes on the rear side with the 4 screw caps. 4-3 Also, use the 4 Long/yellow screws to secure it. while pushing the Sideboard toward the Speaker unit... 2 Long/yellow screws while pushing the Sideboard toward the Speaker unit... while pushing the Sideboard toward the Pedalboard… 3 Short/black screws 3 Short/black screws Screw caps Screw caps 3 Short/black screws 3-3 Stand the Pedalboard after securing the screws. 4. Mount the Speaker Unit onto the Sideboards. 4-1 Remove the Grill Net from the Speaker Unit. 4-2 Hold the Speaker unit horizontally (by 2 people) and slide it, from the rear side, in place along the brackets. 5. Mount the Main Unit. 5-1 As shown in the illustration, hold the Main unit horizontally (by 2 people), and place it on the rear side of the Speaker unit, then slide it to the front side. Hook the guide screw, protruding from the bottom of the Main unit, here. 11 Appendix Make sure to center the main unit to produce equal clearance on the left and right sides. Take care not to drop the Main unit or to pinch your finger(s) between the Speaker unit and Main unit. Take care not to drop the Speaker unit or to pinch your finger(s) between the Speaker unit and Sideboard. 126 5-2 Use the 4 Long/black screws to fasten the Main unit to the Sideboards as shown in the illustration. the Pedalboard cord and Speaker cord 7. Connect to the Main Unit. Make sure that the latches on each plug of the cords face to your side and that you connect them to each socket securely. 1 Long/black screws Speaker cord Pedalboard cord the Pedalboard cord to the Sideboard using 8. Fix the Pedalboard cord Cramps. 8-1 Stick the 2 Pedalboard cord cramps to the rear side of the Left Sideboard as shown in the illustration. 8-2 Fix the Pedalboard cord in the cramps. 1 Long/black screws Grill Net onto the Speaker. 6. FitFirst,thealign the bottom line and then fix it. Hook up the Grill Net by inserting the protrudents into the holes. 11 Shut the cramp after inserting the cord. Appendix 127 the AC Power Cord plug to the AC Inlet 9. Connect of the Main Unit. BENCH ASSEMBLY Reverse the bench board and place one of the legs to the corner of the bench board, then tighten the nut using the included wrench. Be sure to put the washer between the leg and the bench board. leg washer bench board nut 10.Place the Music Stand. ■ After completing the assembly, please check the following items. • Are there any parts left over? fi Review all assembly procedures. • Is the Electone clear of doors and other movable fixtures? fi Move the Electone to an appropriate location. • Does the Electone make a rattling noise when you shake it? fi Tighten all screws. • Can the Electone be turned on? fi Confirm that the AC power cord plug is securely connected to the Electone’s AC Inlet and the other side of the cord is connected to an appropriate power outlet. • Does the Electone produce sounds? fi Confirm that the Speaker cord plug and the Pedalboard cord plug are securely connected to each socket on the Main unit. 11. Turn on the Electone’s power switch and confirm that the Electone can be played, or that the assembly is successful. 11 Appendix If the Electone creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly instructions and tighten all screws again. 128 EL-100 Specifications KEYBOARD Upper: 49 keys (C – C), Lower: 49 keys (C – C), Pedal: 20 keys (C – G) Initial Touch Upper 1, 2, Lead, Lower 1, 2, Pedal 1, 2 (Available only when it is played by external MIDI control) VOICE Tone Generation AWM Upper Keyboard Voice Strings 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, Pizz. Strings, Tremolo Strings, Synth. Strings 1, 2, 3; Brass 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Lower Keyboard Voice Synth. Brass 1, 2, 3; Clarinet 1, 2, Bass Clarinet, Synth. Clarinet 1, 2; Saxophone 1, 2, Upper Keyboard Voice 2 Soprano Sax., Sax. Ensemble 1, 2, Synth. Sax, Synth. Lead 1, 2, 3, 4, 5; Chorus 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Lower Keyboard Voice 2 Vocal; Organ 1, 2, 3, 4, Jazz Organ 1, 2, 3, 4, Pop Organ 1, 2, Theatre Organ 1, 2, Accordion, Bandoneon; Piano 1, 2, Honky Tonk, Elec. Piano 1, 2, 3, Harpsichord, Clavi., Clavichord; Guitar 1, 2, 3, 12 String Guitar, Banjo, Mandolin, Sitar, Shamisen, Elec. Guitar 1, 2, Muted Guitar, Distortion Guitar, Harp, Steel Guitar, Koto, Taisho Koto; Vibraphone, Glockenspiel, Celesta, Music Box, Marimba, Xylophone, Chime, Synth. Chime, Steel Drum; Cosmic 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16; Tutti 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7; [Upper] Harmonica 1, 2; [Lower] Horn 1, 2, 3, 4, Muted Horn; 2 Dotted Buttons; [Upper] 115 Voices; [Lower] 118 Voices; Volume Fine Lead Voice Violin 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Pizz. Violin, Cello, Kokyu; Flute 1, 2, Piccolo, Yokobue, Recorder, Ocarina, Pan Flute, Shakuhachi, Whistle; Oboe 1, 2, English Horn, Bassoon 1, 2; Trumpet 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, Muted Trumpet, Trombone 1, 2, Muted Trombone, Flugel Horn, Euphonium; To Lower; Dotted Button; 34 Voices; Volume Fine EFFECT/ CONDITION Pedalboard Voice Contrabass 1, 2, 3, Pizz. Bass, Upright Bass; Elec. Bass 1, 2, 3, 4, Synth. Bass 1, 2, 3; Organ Pedalboard Voice 2 Bass 1, 2, 3, 4; Tuba, Timpani, Timpani Roll; To Lower; Dotted Button; 19 Voices; Volume Fine Voice Display Upper 1, 2; Lower 1, 2; Lead; Pedal 1, 2; Manual Balance Digital Reverb 3 Types: Room, Hall, Church; Length; Depth; Volume: Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead, Pedal 1, 2, Accompaniment, Percussion Sustain Upper, Lower, Pedal: Length Tremolo/Chorus Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead, Pedal 1, 2, Tremolo (Fast): Speed; Chorus: Slow, Stop Symphonic/Celeste Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead, Pedal 1, 2; Mode: Symphonic/Celeste Vibrato Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead, Pedal 1, 2: Preset/User (Delay, Depth, Speed) Delay Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead, Pedal 1, 2; Control: Time, Feedback, Balance; Mode: Mono, Stereo 1, 2, 3 Flanger Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead, Pedal 1, 2; Control: Speed, Feedback, Depth Distortion Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead, Pedal 1, 2; Control: Level, Hi-pass Glide Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead; Control: Time Lead Slide On/Off; Control: Time Lead Tune Tune Control Panning Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead, Pedal 1, 2; (7 positions) Feet Upper 1, 2, Lower 1, 2, Lead, Pedal 1, 2; Preset 2' (Pedal Voices only)/4'/8'/16' 11 Appendix 129 RHYTHM Rhythms March 1, 2, 3, Polka 1, 2, Country 1, 2, Broadway, Baroque; Waltz 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Jazz Waltz 1, 2, 3, Bolero; Swing 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, Jazz Ballad, Dixieland 1, 2; Bounce 1, 2, 3, Reggae 1, 2; Slow Rock 1, 2, 3; Tango 1, 2, 3; Chacha, Rhumba, Beguine; Mambo, Salsa, Samba 1, 2, 3, Bossanova 1, 2, 3; 8Beat 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Dance Pop 1, 2, 3, 4; 16Beat 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, Funk 1, 2, 3; User 1-8 (A-D); 2 Dotted Buttons; 66 Rhythms; Volume Fine Variations Fill-In; Intro. Ending; Lead In; Auto Variation: On/Off Others Start; Synchro Start; Tempo; Bar/Beat LED; Condition: Reverb, Balance, Volume Rhythm Sequence On/Off, Sequence 1 - 4 KEYBOARD PERCUSSION Lower, Pedal On/Off: Lower Preset, Pedal Preset, User 1- 8; Copy: LK Preset, PK Preset, User; Assign: 120 Instruments, Clear ACCOMPANIMENT Auto Bass Chord Mode: Off; Single Finger; Fingered Chord; Custom A.B.C.; Memory: Lower, Pedal Accompaniments Type 1, 2, 3, 4, All Off, Volume, Reverb MELODY ON CHORD Mode: Off, 1, 2, 3 BASIC REGISTRATION 1-5 REGISTRATION MEMORY M./To Disk, 1 - 8; Disable Button; Registration shift MUSIC DISK RECORDER Play/Record: Upper, Lower, Pedal, Lead, Keyboard Percussion, Control; Pause, Stop, Fast Forward/ Reverse, Song Select, Shift, Custom Play, Tempo; Format, Read & Auto Increment, Song Repeat; Song Delete; Song Copy: From/To; Disk Copy, Punch in Recording, XG Song Playback, XG Easy Converter, Song Name, Pattern Disk, Remaining Memory; LED Display; Eject FOOT SWITCH Left Mode: Off; Rhythm (Stop, Ending, Fill-In); Glide (Upper 1, 2/Lower 1, 2/Lead; Time); Tremolo/Chorus Right Regist. Shift Mode: Off, Shift, Jump, User (80 Positions; Cursor Controls: Data: Insert, Delete; Shift End: Stop, Top, Next Song) TRANSPOSE/PITCH Transpose: -6 - +6; Pitch: 438.8Hz - 444.5Hz LCD DISPLAY 20 x 2 Character LANGUAGE English, Japanese OTHER CONTROLS Power On/Off; Exp. Pedal (Right/Left Footswitches); Pitch Control; Transpose; Master Volume; Display Select; Data Controls; Page; MIDI (Output: Upper, Lower, Pedal; Int./Ext.: Lead, Sync., Exp.) OTHER FITTINGS Dust Cover; Music Stand; Bench; Headphone Jack; Aux In/Out (RCA; R/L); MIDI In/Out; To Host; Host Select OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Pattern Disk; HPE-170 Headphones; 3.5" Floppy Disks SOUND SYSTEM Power Amplifiers 40W (Stereo) Speakers 16cm x 2; 5cm x 2 DIMENSIONS (W x D x H) 112.3cm x 48.2cm x 92.5cm (111.1cm with Music Stand) [Bench] 59.5cm x 29.5cm x 58.0cm WEIGHT 55.0kg [Bench] 6.2kg Specifications and description in this Owner's Manual are information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. As specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with Yamaha dealer. 11 Appendix 130 Index A F A.B.C. ............................................................ 52 A.B.C./M.O.C. .......................................... 52, 64 ACC. Reverb ................................................. 55 Accompaniment ...................................... 45, 54 Auto Bass Chord (A.B.C.) ............................. 52 Auto Varietion (Rhythm) ................................ 48 AUX. OUT .................................................... 104 Fast Forward (M.D.R.) ................................... Fast Reverse (M.D.R.) ................................... Feedback (Delay) ......................................... Feedback(Flanger) ....................................... Feet ................................................................ Fill In .............................................................. Fingered Chord ............................................. Flanger ..................................................... 32, Floppy Disk .................................................... FOOT SW. ...................................................... FORMAT ........................................................ B Balance (Delay) ............................................. Balance (Rhythm) ......................................... BAR/BEAT ..................................................... BASIC REGlST. ............................................. 37 48 47 11 G Glide (Footswitch) ......................................... 98 Group (Keyboard Percussion) ...................... 59 C Celeste ........................................................... 35 Characteristics of Each Delay Type ............. 37 Chord ............................................................. 53 Chorus ..................................................... 35, 42 Church (Reverb) ............................................ 40 Clear (Keyboard Percussion) ....................... 59 Control data ................................................... 78 Copy/LK PRESET (Keyboard Percussion) ... 62 Copy/PK PRESET (Keyboard Percussion) ... 63 Copy/USER (Keyboard Percussion) ............. 63 Copy Protect ................................................. 95 Cursor Controls (Registration Shift) .............. 71 Custom A.B.C. ............................................... 52 CUSTOM PLAY .............................................. 88 D D. (Disable) ................................................... DATA CONTROL ........................................... Data Controls (Registration Shift) ................. Delay (Effect) ........................................... 32, Delay (Vibrato) .............................................. Delete (Registration Shift) ............................. Depth (Flanger) ............................................. Depth (Reverb) .............................................. Depth (Vibrato) .............................................. Disk Copy ...................................................... DISPLAY SELECT ...................................... 9, Distortion ................................................. 32, Dotted button (Rhythm) ................................ Dotted button (Voice) .................................... M 88 88 36 38 30 47 52 38 73 97 75 H Hall (Reverb) ................................................. 40 HEADPHONES ............................................ 104 “hidden” voices ............................................. 27 Hi Pass (Distortion) ....................................... 39 HOST SELECT ............................................. 104 I Initial Touch ................................................... 30 Insert .............................................................. 72 Instrument Names (Keyboard Percussion) .. 59 Internal/External (MIDI IN) .......................... 103 INTRO. ENDING ............................................ 46 J 68 14 72 36 33 72 38 40 33 92 20 39 49 21 E K KEYBOARD PERCUSSION ........................... 56 L Language ...................................................... 16 LCD Display .................................................. 13 LEAD (MIDI) ................................................ 103 LEAD IN ......................................................... 46 LEAD VOlCE .................................................. 17 LED Display ................................................... 75 Left Footswitch .............................................. 97 Length (Reverb) ............................................ 40 Level (Distortion) ........................................... 39 Lower (MIDI OUT) ....................................... 102 LOWER KEYBOARD VOlCE .......................... 17 LOWER KEYBOARD VOlCE 2 ...................... 18 N Next Song (Shift End) ................................... 71 P PAGE ............................................................. 14 Panning .......................................................... 31 PART (XG) ..................................................... 86 Pattern Disk ................................................... 94 PAUSE (M.D.R.) ............................................ 88 Pedal (MIDI OUT) ........................................ 102 PEDAL VOICE ............................................... 17 PEDAL VOICE 2 ............................................ 18 Performance data ......................................... 78 Pitch ............................................................. 101 PITCH/MIDI .......................................... 101, 102 PLAY .............................................................. 76 Playback (M.D.R.) ......................................... 84 POSITION (Registration Shift) ...................... 71 POWER .......................................................... 10 Preset (Effect) ................................................ 32 Preset (Keyboard Percussion) ...................... 56 Preset (Vibrato) ............................................. 33 Preset Keyboard Percussion ........................ 57 PRESET/USER (Vibrato) ................................ 33 Punch-in Recording ...................................... 81 R Read and Auto Increment (M.D.R.) .............. RECORD ........................................................ Recording Registrations ............................... Registration data ........................................... Registration Memory ..................................... REGlST. SHlFT .............................................. Remaining Memory (M.D.R.) ........................ Repeat playback ........................................... Retry .............................................................. REVERB ......................................................... Reverb (Rhythm) ........................................... Reverb (Voice Condition) ........................ 31, RHYTHM ........................................................ Rhythm (Footswitch) ..................................... Rhythm Condition .......................................... Rhythm Menu ................................................ Rhythm Sequence ......................................... Right Footswitch ............................................ Room (Reverb) .............................................. 88 76 82 78 67 69 94 85 77 40 48 40 45 98 48 51 66 69 40 11 Appendix Effect ........................................................ 29, 32 EFFECT SET .................................................. 34 Eject ............................................................... 73 ENDlNG ......................................................... 46 EXP. (Expression) ....................................... 100 Expression Pedal .................................. 11, 100 Jump (Registration Shift) .............................. 70 M./TO DISK .................................................... 67 M.BAL ............................................................ 20 MASTER VOLUME ........................................ 11 Melody On Chord (M.O.C.) ........................... 64 Memory (Lower/Pedal) .................................. 53 Metronome .................................................... 66 MIDI ..................................................... 102, 105 MIDI IN ......................................................... 103 MIDI IN/OUT ................................................ 104 MIDI OUT ..................................................... 102 Mode (Chorus) .............................................. 44 Mode (Delay) ................................................. 37 Mode (M.O.C.) .............................................. 65 Music Disk Recorder (M.D.R.) ...................... 73 Mute (XG) ...................................................... 86 131 S V Selecting Voice Group .................................. 35 SEQ. ............................................................... 66 Set (Keyboard Percussion) ........................... 59 SHIFT ............................................................. 75 Shift (Registration Shift) ................................ 70 Shift End ........................................................ 71 Single Finger ................................................. 52 Slide ............................................................... 34 Slide Time ...................................................... 34 SOLO (XG) .................................................... 86 Song Copy ..................................................... 90 Song Delete ................................................... 92 SONG REPEAT .............................................. 85 SONG SELECT .............................................. 75 SPEED (Flanger) ........................................... 38 SPEED (Tremolo) ........................................... 44 SPEED (Vibrato) ............................................ 33 START ............................................................ 46 STOP (Footswitch) ........................................ 98 STOP (M.D.R.) ............................................... 77 STOP (Shift End) ........................................... 71 Sustain ........................................................... 41 Symphonic ............................................... 32, 35 SYNC.(MIDI IN) ........................................... 103 SYNCHRO START ......................................... 46 Vibrato ........................................................... Voice .............................................................. Voice Condition ............................................. Voice Control ................................................. VOICE DISPLAY ...................................... 17, Voice Menu .............................................. 18, Voice section ................................................. Volume (Rhythm) ........................................... Volume (Voice Condition) ............................. Volume (XG) .................................................. Volume (Accompaniment) ............................ Volume balance ............................................ T TEMPO ........................................................... 47 Tempo (M.D.R.) ............................................. 89 Time (Delay) .................................................. 36 TO HOST ..................................................... 104 TO LOWER .................................................... 21 Top (Shift End) .............................................. 71 Transpose .................................................... 101 Tremolo (Effect) ................................. 32, 35, 42 TREMOLO (FAST) ......................................... 44 Tremolo (Footswitch) ..................................... 99 Tune ............................................................... 34 Type (Accompaniment) ................................ 55 Type (Reverb) ............................................... 40 U Upper (MIDI OUT) ....................................... 102 UPPER KEYBOARD VOlCE ........................... 17 UPPER KEYBOARD VOlCE 2 ....................... 18 User (Registration Shift) ................................ 71 User Keyboard Percussion ........................... 58 User rhythm ................................................... 50 User voice (Voice) ......................................... 22 11 Appendix 132 33 17 30 29 20 23 17 48 31 86 55 20 W Write-protect tab ........................................... 74 X XG .............................................................. 4, 86 XG Easy Converter ........................................ 87 XG Song Playback ........................................ 86 11 Appendix 133 11 Appendix 134 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below. CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO ASIA HONG KONG Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 686-00-33 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Reboucas 2636, Sao Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-853-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha de Panamá S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanizacion Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: 507-269-5311 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST * Except Turky and Cyprus Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 971-4-881-5868 Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3770-0661 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-703-0900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. 11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore Tel: 65-747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2713-8999 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor, Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng, Bangkok 10320, Thailand Tel: 02-641-2951 THE PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2317 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2317 [EL] 23 Yamaha Manual Library (English versions only) http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ V788820 ???MW???.?-01A0 M.D.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2002 Yamaha Corporation Printed in Indonesia